HomeMy WebLinkAbout98-0822� Wild Goose Storage, Inc.
Gas Storage Project
80TTE COWS'
SULDNNIG DERARTMENY
APPROVED
Permanent Compressor Facility
Building Permit. Documents
Specifications
Accordance wiff, Rc-so^'�e.`lyatf c ,;;r &`�racficm and
bbf a quality prescripad cr ^'�ti :t?E4.;.IJ-d oa 'in t -he
1lniform Building, Plumbing & NiechanicQ1 Cortes cod
0e UctiOMal Hectricol Coda
,,Tits set of plans and speciftca#ions MUST
,lept on +he job of Q rinses and Mr is unlawful to
.`mi(e any changc;s or oil same wifhout
iSf�
vritien permission from faze Department of Puke:
A.C. Works, .County of bufte,
Prepared by;
Raytheon Engineers & Constructors, Inc.
P.O. Box 5888
Denver, CO 80217
A�11) p.►JMBIND
Q�:jh!A LCCftip"3,q'y �,&[;�l�-o`j`q, �C(��a�Fbnr ENT EDili
R'W E SSlp yq\
D
sTgTF SIC A E���\Q
u
l
ti
a
L
•
•
Wild Goose Storage Project' Raytheon Engineers &
77052001 Constructors
• Table of Contents
Permanent Compressor Installation
Building Permit Documents - Specifications
605.00T: Specification For Concrete Construction, Rev. 0 .....................Section 1
C05.01 T: Specification For Supply and Fabrication of
Structural And Miscellaneous Steel, Rev. 0.............................................Section 2
C05.03T: Specification For Erection of Structural and
Miscellaneous Steelk Rev 0.....................................................................Section 3
605.04T: Grouting Specification For
Equipment and Structural Support, Rev 0................................................Section 4
1308.01T: Specification For
Sampling, Testing and Construction Control of
Concrete, Earthwork and Structural Steel, Rev 0 ....................................Section 5
•
is
i
0
I
0
Raytheon Engineers &
Constructors
CLIENT: Wild Goose Storage JOB/INQUIRY NO.: 77052.001
FACILITY: Wild Goose Gas Storage SPEC NO.: B05.00T
LOCATION: Butte County, California
SPECIFICATION
For
CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION
This title page is a record of all revisions of the specification. Each time the specification is changed, only the new
or revised pages are issued. For convenience, the nature of each revision is briefly noted below.
REV. NO.
DATE
BY
CHECKED
APPROVAL
PAGES
NATURE OF REVISIONS
A
o
10/10/97
/0/29%9
RVO
VV
j
All
All
For Client Review
Approved for Construction
Rev.
No.
LEAD
PROC
LEAD
MECH
LEAD
PIPE
LEAD
CIVIL
LEAD LEAD
STRUC ARCH
LEAD
ELEC
LEAD
I&C
QA
PEM
PM
CDE
CON
SUP
A
--
--
EGD
--
VV --
--
--
J R W
J EY
--
R V O
--
--
ECS
--
--
--
--
-
l
--
--
Distribution:
Per Project Distribution Matrix
0
0
•
Raytheon Engineers &
Constructors
1. SCOPE
SPECIFICATION
FOR
CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION
Project No. 77052.001
Spec. No. B05 -OOT
Page 1 of 40
1.1. The Contractor shall supply all materials, equipment, labor, tools and facilities to construct
the concrete work in accordance with the scope of the Contract and the contract
Drawings. This specification covers the technical requirements for the concrete materials
and mix design, forming materials, reinforcing, embedded items, and curing materials as
well as the technical requirements for mixing, transporting, forming, placement, curing and
finishing of concrete and the technical requirements for the installation of reinforcing steel
and embedded items.
1.2. The Contractor shall be responsible for making all arrangements for and furnishing, his own
concrete, and shall be responsible for the concrete meeting the necessary requirements,
including but not limited to: strength; durability; water -cement ratio; workability;
pumpability (where required); cement type_ and quality; aggregate size, gradation and
quality; slump; admixtures; and entrained air content.
2. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
2.1. The site of the work is located in Butte County, CA, California Building Code, 1995,
Seismic Zone 3.
2.2. The nominal elevation of the plant site is 67 +/- feet above mean sea level.
2.3. The maximum temperature extremes for design purposes are from 20 degrees F. to 115
degrees F.
3. REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
3.1. The latest editions of the following codes, specifications, standards and publications, with
applicable supplements and revisions thereto in effect on May 1, 1997, form a part of this
Specification by reference as if published in full content.
3.1.1. :American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM)
A 36 Specification for Structural Steel.
A 82 Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement.
A 108 Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold -Finished, Standard Quality.
A123 Specification for Zinc (Hot -Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel
Products.
A 153 Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware.
A 185 Specification for Steel Welded' Wire Fabric, Plain, for Concrete
Reinforcement.
• I A 307 Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners.
•
•
•
Raytheon Engineers &
Constructors
SPECIFICATION
FOR
CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION
Project No.: 77052.001
Spec. No. B05.00T
Page 2 Of 45
A 185 Specification for Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain, for Concrete
Reinforcement.
A 307 Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners.
A 525 Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc -
Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process.
A 563 Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts.
A 615 Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet -Steel Bars for Concrete
Reinforcement.
A 706 Specification for Low -Alloy Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete
Reinforcement.
A 775 Specification for Epoxy -Coated Reinforcing Steel Bars.
C 31 Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field.
C 33 Specifications for Concrete Aggregates.
C 39 Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete
Specimens.
C 42 Method of Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams
of Concrete.
C 94 Specification for Ready -Mixed Concrete
C 138 Method of Test for Unit Weight, Yield and Air Content
(Gravimetric) of Concrete.
C 143 Method of Test for Slump of Portland Cement Concrete.
C 150 Specification for Portland Cement.
C 171 Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete.
C 172 Method of Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete.
C 192 Method of Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the
Laboratory.
C 231 Method of Test for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the
Pressure Method.
•
is
•
RayBteon Engineers & SPECIFICATION Project No.: 77052.001
FOR Spec. No. B05.00T
Constructors CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION Page 3 Of 45
C 260 Specification for Air -Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.
C 309 Liquid Membrane -Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete.
C 311 Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Fly Ash or Natural
Pozzolans for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Portland Cement
Concrete.
C 494 Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.
C 618 Specification for Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for
Use as a Mineral Admixture in Portland Cement Concrete.
C 685 Specification for Concrete Made by Volumetric Batching and
Continuous Mixing.
C 920 Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
C 1017 Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Use in Producing
Flowing Concrete.
D 1190 Concrete Joint Sealer, Hot -Poured Elastic Type
D 1751 Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and
Structural Construction (Non -extruding and Resilient Bituminous
Types).
D 1752 Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers for
Concrete Paving and Structural Construction.
F 436 Specification for Hardened Steel Washers.
F 1554 Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105 -
ksi Yield Strength
3.1.2 American Concrete Institute (ACI)
117 Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials
301 Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings
305 Specification for Hot -Weather Concreting
306 Specification for Cold -Weather Concreting
315 Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete
Structures
rI
Raythe0e Engineers & SPECIFICATION Project No.: 77052.001
FOR Spec. No. B05.00T
Constructors CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION Page 4 Of 45
318 Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete
347 Concrete Formwork
3.1.3 American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC)
Specification for Structural Steel Buildings.
Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges.
3.1.4 Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI)
Manual of Standard Practice for Reinforced Concrete Construction
3.1.5 American Welding Society (AWS)
D1.4 Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel
D1.1 Structural Welding Code - Steel
3.1.6 Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)
Title 29, Part 1910 and Part 1926
3.1.7 Steel Structures Painting Council
Steel Structures Painting Manual - Vol. 2
Systems and Specifications
3.2 The latest revision of the following are recommended as guides to meet the
requirements of this Specification. Mandatory requirements of these publications
are as stated in this Specification.
3.2.1 American Concrete Institute (ACI)
211.1 Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal and
Heavyweight Concrete
302 Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction
304 Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete
308 Standard Practice for Curing Concrete
309 Guide for Consolidation of Concrete
311 ACI Manual of Concrete Inspection
•
•
RayM�eon Engineers & SPECIFICATION
FOR
Constructors CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION
347 Guide to Formwork for Concrete
4 MATERIALS
4.1 Cement
Project No.: 77052.001
Spec. No. B05.00T
Page 5 Of 45
4.1.1 Except as otherwise specified, cement shall be Portland cement
conforming to ASTM C 150, Type 11, modified for low alkali.
4.1.2 Cement shall be stored to prevent caking, partial setting, deterioration or
contamination. Cement which has any deleterious characteristics shall not
be used in the mix.
4.2 Aggregates
4.2.1 Coarse aggregate shall conform to ASTM C 33. See Section 5.2. for
maximum size of coarse aggregate.
4.2.2 Fine aggregate shall be sand, clean and sharp. Fine aggregate shall
conform to ASTM C 33.
4.2.3 Aggregates shall be stored and handled so as to preserve the gradation and
cleanliness of the material. Segregation and/or contamination are cause
for rejection and the deficient material shall be removed and replaced.
4.3 Water
Water used in mixing concrete shall be clear, clean and potable, with no unusual
taste or odor.
4.4 Reinforcement
4.4.1 Materials
a. Reinforcing steel bars shall conform to the requirements of ASTM
A 615, Grade 60 except for bars that are indicated on the
Drawings to be welded shall be ASTM A 706. Steel bars shall be
deformed except for sizes less than 3/8 -inch and specified
dowels or spirals.
b. Spiral reinforcing shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A
82 and smooth dowels shall be ASTM A 36 steel.
•
C. Welded wire fabric shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A
185. Unless specified otherwise, the material shall be furnished
only in flat sheets.
0
is
0
Raytheon Engineers &
Constructors
SPECIFICATION
FOR
CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION
Project No.: 77052.001
Spec. No. B05.00T
Page 6 Of 45
d. Fibrous concrete reinforcement shall be 100% virgin
polypropylene fibrillated fibers specifically manufactured for use
as concrete reinforcement, containing no reprocessed . olefin
materials. Fibrous concrete reinforcement shall be as
manufactured by Fibermesh Company. The length of the fibers
shall be as recommended by the manufacturer of _the fibrous
reinforcement for each mix design.
4.4.2 Detailing and Fabrication
a. Reinforcing steel shall be detailed and fabricated in accordance
with, and to the tolerances of, ACI 315 unless otherwise noted
on the engineering design Drawings.
b. Reinforcing as delivered shall be free of loose mill scale, loose
rust, paint, grease, oil, dirt, mud or any other foreign material
which will prevent or reduce bonding.
C. Fabricated reinforcement shall be free of twists, kinks or
unscheduled bends. Such defects shall be cause for rejection.
d. Reinforcing shall be bent cold without inducing fractures or
cracking in the steel.
4.5 Reinforcement Accessories
4.5.1 Bar supports, tie wire and accessories shall be supplied by the Seller.
4.5.2 Bar supports of standard types and sizes shall conform to the Concrete
Reinforcing Steel Institute Specifications. Where concrete will not be
exposed to view, Class 3 bright basic bar supports may be used. Where
concrete will be exposed to view, Class I plastic protected supports shall
be used. Special support systems shall be designed by the Seller and
submitted to the Engineer for review. If the reinforcement is galvanized or
coated, the supports shall also be galvanized or coated.
4.5.3 Tie wire shall be black annealed wire, not less than No. 16 gauge, of
suitable quality for securing reinforcement in place. If reinforcement is
galvanized or coated, then tie wire shall be galvanized, plastic coated or
epoxy coated wire as appropriate.
•
C7
�OII Engineers SPECIFICATION Project No.: 77052.001
FOR Spec. No. 605.00T
Constructors CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION Page 7 Of 45
4.6 Expansion and Control Joint Material
4.6.1 Bituminous type expansion joint filler shall be preformed, non -extruding and
resilient conforming to ASTM D 1751.
4.6.2 Non -bituminous type expansion joint filler shall be preformed, non -extruding
and resilient conforming to ASTM D 1752.
4.6.3 Hot poured joint sealing compound shall conform to ASTM D 1190.
4.6.4 Cold applied joint sealing compound shall conform to ASTM C 920.
4.6.5 Caulking compounds may be "Sikaflex" one -component polyurethane as
manufactured by SIKA Corporation, or equal. Gun -grade shall be used for
vertical joints. Primer shall be as recommended by sealant manufacturer.
4.6.6 Backing rod shall be round, preformed, resilient material such as
"Ethafoam" as manufactured by Dow Chemical Company or equal. The
diameter shall not be less than one and one-half times the width of the
joint in which it is to be installed.
4.7 Void Form
Void form materials used to bridge footing loads over underground pipes or
structures or for expansive soils shall be Denform "K -Void" as manufactured by
K.C. Construction Supply Company or equal.
4.8 Form Oil
Form release agent shall be a commercial product of proven performance that will
prevent adhesion of the concrete to the forms and will not penetrate, stain or
adversely affect concrete surfaces. The material shall not impede wetting of
concrete surfaces to be damp cured nor impair subsequent surface treatments
which depend upon bond or adhesion.
4.9 Waterstoos
Waterstops shall be extruded polyvinyl -chloride of the size and shape specified on
the Drawings. Waterstops shall be as manufactured by Greenstreak Plastic
Products Co. or an approved equal.
4.10 Curing Materials
• 4.10.1 Waterproof paper, polyethylene sheeting, or polyethylene -coated burlap
shall conform to ASTM C 171. Burke Security Blankets or equal is a
suggested material.
0
•
•
Raytheon Engineers &
Constructors
SPECIFICATION
FOR
CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION
Project No.: 77052.001
Spec. No. B05.00T
Page 8 Of 45
4.10.2 Liquid membrane -forming curing compound shall conform to ASTM C 309,
Type 1-D, Class B. Wax base or wax -resin base curing compounds will
not be permitted.
4.10.3 Curing compounds which will stain or alter the natural concrete color shall
- not be permitted.
4.11 Floor Hardener
Liquid -applied floor hardener shall be Sonneborn "Lapidolith" or an approved equal
fluosilicate type floor hardener.
4.12 Forming
Form materials shall be as specified under Section 6 of this Specification.
4.13 Embedded Items
4.13.1 Anchor bolts shall be as shown on the Drawings, and shall conform to the
requirements of ASTM F 1554, Grade 36. Nuts shall be ASTM A 563,
Grade A, heavy hex. Washers shall conform to ASTM F 436. Plate
washers shall be ASTM A 36 material.
4.13.2 Structural steel embedments shall be as shown on the Drawings, shall be
fabricated from ASTM A 36 plates, bars and shapes to the configuration
shown on the Drawings and shall conform to the requirements of the
American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC). Embedments shall be
blast cleaned in accordance with SSPC-6 "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
Surfaces of embedments which will not come in contact with the
concrete, except surfaces which will receive welding, shall be painted with
one shop coat of inorganic zinc paint. The paint system shall conform to
SSPC 12.1 and the paint shall conform to SSPC Paint Specification No.
20., Type 1-C. Surfaces which will come in contact with the concrete and
surfaces which will receive welding shall be protected with a solvent
removable rust -proof coating.
a. Embedded trench and curb angles shall be provided complete
with floor plate or grating when shown on the Drawings.
4.13.3 Steel pipe embedments shall be standard Schedule 40 black pipe
fabricated to the configuration as shown on the Drawings. Pipe
embedments shall receive surface treatment as in paragraph 4.13.2 above
unless shown on drawings to be unpainted.
4.13.4 Weldable steel stud connectors shall be ASTM A 108 by Nelson Stud
Welding Company or Engineer approved equal and of the
0 -
Raytheon Engineers & SPECIFICATION Project No.: 77052.001
FOR Spec. No. B05.00T
Constructors CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION Page 9 Of 45
automatic -end -weld type of the size and length shown on the Drawings.
Studs shall not be* painted.
4.13.5 Welding electrodes for carbon steel materials shall have a 70,000 psi
minimum tensile strength and comply with Table 3.1, AWS D1.1.
4.13.6 Miscellaneous embedded items, which are manufacturer's standard items
shall be as shown on the Drawings, or an Engineer approved equal.
Standard items shall have a zinc coating conforming to ASTM A123,
A153 or A525.
4.13.7 Abrasive stair nosing shall be Wooster Cast Iron, No. 101 ferrogrit, or
Engineer approved equal, 3 inches wide, with concrete anchors and
standard black finish.
4.13.8 Cast iron floor drains shall be as shown on the Drawings.
4.14 Epoxy Material
Epoxy
bonding agents adhesives or grout shall be Sikadur as manufactured by the
Sika Chemical Corporation, or Engineer approved equal. Type and grade shall be as
shown on the Drawings for each particular application.
4.15 Fly Ash
4.15.1 Class F or Class C fly ash may be used in the concrete to be used on this
project. The fly ash shall meet the requirements of ASTM C618,
"Standard Specification for Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan
for use as a Mineral Admixture in Portland Cement Concrete", and shall be
tested in accordance with ASTM C311, "Standard Test Methods for
Sampling and Testing Fly Ash or Natural Pozzolans for Use as a Mineral
Admixture in Portland Cement Concrete."
4.15.2 All fly ash used on the project shall be from one source :and its quality shall
be monitored throughout the duration of its use.
4.15.3 Fly ash shall be stored as a cementitious material per Section 4.1.2
4.15.4 The maximum percentage of cement to be replaced by flyash shall be
20%.
4.16 Concrete Color Pigments
is
4.16.1 Synthetic red oxide coloring shall be used to color the concrete
protecting electrical duct banks. Quantities of coloring added to
concrete mix shall be as recommended by the manufacturer of the color
pigment.
•
•
•
Raytheon Engineers &
Constructors
4.17 Vapor Barrier
SPECIFICATION
FOR
CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION
Project No.: 77052.001
Spec. No. B05.00T
Page 10 Of 45
Vapor barrier shall be polyethylene, single film, 6.0 mil thickness, black in color.
Lap joints shall be sealed using an adhesive of the type recommended by the
vapor barrier manufacturer.
4.18 General
All concrete shall be ready -mixed concrete manufactured and delivered in
accordance with the requirements of ASTM C 94 Option C. The concrete
manufacturer shall assume the responsibility for the design of the concrete mix
or mixes. Design of the concrete mixes to fulfill job requirements shall comply
with ACI 301 and may be done either on the basis of previous field experience
on production mixtures or new trial mixtures. Proportioning of the new
concrete mix shall not be done based on empirical data. The design of the
concrete mix shall be in accordance with ACI 211.1 to attain the properties of
strength, slump, entrained air, and water -cement ratio in conformance with the
following requirements.
4.19 Maximum Size of Coarse Aggregate
Coarse aggregate shall be No. 67 (3/4 inch to No. 4) for concrete classes BSA
and CSA. Coarse aggregate for concrete classes BLA and CLA shall be No.
467 (1-1/2 inch to No. 4).
4.20 Proportioning of Ingredients
4.20.1 The proportion of ingredients -shall be selected to produce the proper
placeability, pumpability, durability, strength and other required
properties, and shall be such as to produce a mixture which will work
readily into the corners and angles of the forms and around
reinforcement by the methods of placing and consolidation employed on
the work, but without permitting the materials to segregate or
excessive free water to collect on the surface.
4.20.2 The determination of the water -cement ratio to attain the required
strength and/or durability shall be in accordance with ACI 301 and with
ACI 211.1. The maximum water -cement ratio for concrete which will
be subjected to special exposure conditions or exposed to sulfate
containing solutions shall be in accordance with ACI 318, Chapter 4.
The maximum water cement ratio for all other concrete shall be 0.50.
4.21 Strengths
4.21.1 Concrete mixes shall be designed for the minimum compressive
strengths, aggregate size and air content as listed hereafter:
•
�J
•
Raytheon En&eerS & SPECIFICATION
FOR
ConstructorS CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION
Project No.: 77052.001
Spec. No. B05.00T
Page 11' Of 45
28•Day
Maximum Size
Percent of
Designation
Strength
Aggregate Entrained Air
Class ASA
5000 psi
3/4"
6.0%
±.1.5%
Class ALA
5000 psi
1 1/2"
5.5%
f 1.5%
Class BSA
4000 psi
3/4"
6.0%
t 1.5%
Class BLA
4000 psi
1 1/2"
5.5%
t 1.5%
Class CSA .
3000 psi
3/4"
6.0%
t 1.5%
Class CLA
3000 psi
1 1/2"
5.5%
t 1.5%
Class D
2000 psi
3/4"
------
(Lean Concrete)
4.21.2 Special Classes
a. Pea -gravel aggregate, 3000 psi at 28 days, to be designated as
CPG (an "A" suffix for air entrainment may be used as required. If
used, air content shall be between 6% and 7.5% with a
tolerance of +/-1.5%.)
b. Sane -cement, 5000 psi at 28 days, shall be referred to on the
Drawingvs as "S -C Grout".
C. The suffix "F" added to the concrete designation shall indicate
fibrous reinvorced concrete.
4.22 Slumn
Except where otherwise indicated on the Drawings, concrete mixes shall be
designed for the following slumps. Slumps shall be measured in the field at the
point of discharge from the transport vehicle one slump test per truck, and shall
be tested in accordance with ASTM C 143 and shall be within the following
limits:
SLUMP IN INCHES
TYPE OF CONSTRUCTION
Reinforced Foundation Walls and Footings
Plain Footings and Substructure Walls
MAXIMUM MINIMUM
4 1
3 1
Drilled Piers 7 5
Beams and Reinforced Walls 4 1
Building Columns 4 1
Pavement Slabs 3 1
Mass or Mat Concrete 2 1
•
•
0
Raytheon Engineers &
Constructors
SPECIFICATION
FOR
CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION
4.23 Correction of Proportions
Project No.: 77052.001
Spec. No. B05.00T
Page 12 Of 45
Prior to concreting operations, the Contractor shall establish minimum
standards of proportions of all the types of concrete to be used on the project.
Concrete operations shall proceed with these mix designs, but if at any time the
tests of job concrete indicate failure to meet the strength, slump, and air
entrainment requirements, the Contractor shall be required to change the
standard proportions to meet the requirements
4.24 Air -Entraining Agent
4.24.1 All concrete shall be air entrained. Air content by volume shall be in
accordance with 5.4.1 above and shall be determined in accordance
with ASTM C 231. Air content shall be based on measurements made
in concrete mixtures at points of discharge from the truck at the
jobsite.
4.24.2 Air entrainment shall be produced by adding an air entraining agent at
the mixer. Air entraining agent shall conform to ASTM C 260. The
agent and the cement proposed for use shall be selected well in
advance of concrete placing, and the Contractor shall provide
satisfactory facilities for ready procurement of adequate test samples.
4.25 Water -Reducing and Set -Controlling Admixtures
4.25.1 A water -reducing admixture shall be used (ASTM C 494, Type A). At
the option of the Contractor, a water -reducing admixture which retards
the time of set may be used (ASTM C 494, Type D).
4.25.2 Water reducing admixtures shall conform to the requirements of ASTM
C 494. Admixtures shall be used in strict accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations and shall be accompanied by the
services of the qualified field representative of the manufacturer to
supervise the use thereof. The Contractor and concrete producer shall
submit a certificate from an approved laboratory attesting that the
admixture equals or exceeds the physical requirements of ASTM C 494,
Type A or D as applicable.
4.26 High Range Water Reducing Admixture (Plasticizer)
4.26.1 At the option of the Contractor, a high range water reducing admixture,
conforming to ASTM C 494 Type F and ASTM C1017, may be used.
The concrete mix shall be specifically designed for the use of a
plasticizer to maintain homogeneity of the flowing concrete. Plasticizers
may only be added at the site of the pour and must be used in strict
accordance with, and under the supervision of, the manufacturer of the
admixture.
•
•
•
RayMteon Engineers &
Constructors
SPECIFICATION,
FOR
CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION
Project No.: 77052.001
Spec. No. B05.00T
Page 13 Of 45
4.26.2 The use of high range water reducers shall be limited. to those
placements which require that concrete be pumped a long distance or
which would be difficult to place at the normal slump.
4.27 Fly Ash
Class F or Class C fly ash may be used in the concrete to be used on this
project. The fly ash shall meet the requirements of ASTM C618, "Standard
Specification for Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for use as a
Mineral Admixture in Portland Cement Concrete", and shall be tested in
accordance with ASTM C311, "Standard Test Methods for Sampling and
Testing Fly Ash or Natural Pozzolans for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Portland
Cement Concrete". If a fly ash admixture is to be used, the establishment of
the concrete mix design shall include the use of fly ash and determine the
amount of fly ash which may be used to obtain the specified concrete
properties and strengths. Any deleterious effects from the use of fly ash shall
be reported in writing with the mix design submittal.
4.28 Concrete Uniformity
Concrete mixers to be used in the performance of the work of this project shall
be tested by the Contractor for their ability to deliver a uniform mix throughout
the batch. This testing shall be in accordance with the requirements of ASTM
C 94, Annex Al, Concrete Uniformity Requirements. Mixers not meeting the
requirements of ASTM 0 94 Annex Al shall not be used until the condition
causing the non-uniformity has been corrected and the mixer re -tested.
4.29 Mixing and Delivery
4.29.1 Scheduling
The Contractor alone shall be responsible for scheduling the class(es) of
concrete needed, slump and additives required, and the start, duration
and rate of concrete deliveries necessary to meet the Contractor's
construction needs.
4.29.2 Cold Weather Conditions
Concrete mixed and delivered when the mean ambient temperature is
40°F or less, shall be mixed and delivered in accordance .with ACI 306.
•
•
0
Raytheon Engineers &
Constructors
SPECIFICATION
FOR
CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION
4.29.3 Hot -Weather Conditions
Project No.: 77052.001
Spec. No. B05.00T
Page 14 Of 45
Concrete mixed and delivered when the mean ambient temperature
would be detrimental to concrete, (as defined in ACI .301, Section
8.4.3.) shall be mixed and delivered in accordance with ACI 305.
4.29.4 Time Limit Between Mixing and Placement
Discharge and placement of each load of concrete shall be complete
within forty-five (45) minutes after addition of water to the mix when
hot weather conditions prevail. At other times, the time limit shall be
ninety (90) minutes.
4.79.5 Delivery Tickets
Each load of concrete shall be accompanied by a delivery ticket, in
triplicate, showing at least the information prescribed by Paragraph
16.1 of ASTM C 94. After each load of concrete has been discharged
or the truck has been released, one copy.of each delivery ticket shall
be grouped with other delivery tickets for that pour, for delivery to the
Construction Manager.
4.29.6 Rejection of Concrete
Deliveries of concrete which has excessive slump, or has commenced
its initial set before or during discharge, or is otherwise observed as
not meeting specification requirements, shall be rejected by the
Contractor and shall not be placed in the work.
4.30 Fibrous Reinforced Concrete
4.30.1 Add fibrous concrete reinforcement to concrete materials at the time
concrete is batched and at the rate recommended by the manufacturer.
4.30.2 Mix batched concrete in strict accordance to the fibrous concrete
manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for uniform and
complete dispersion.
4.30.3 Provide the services of a qualified technical representative from the
fibrous reinforcement manufacturer, or an authorized dealer, to instruct
the concrete supplier in proper batching and mixing of materials.
r�
u
L`
0
Raytheon Engineers & SPECIFICATION Project No.: 77052.001
FOR Spec. No. B05.00T
Constructors CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION Page 15 Of 45
5 DESIGN OF CONCRETE MIX AND CONCRETE SUPPLY
5.1 General
All concrete shall be ready -mixed concrete manufactured and delivered in
accordance with the requirements of ASTM C 94 Option C. The concrete
manufacturer shall assume the responsibility for the design of the concrete mix
or mixes. Design of the concrete mixes to fulfill job requirements shall comply
with ACI 301 and may be done either on the basis of previous field experience
on production mixtures or new trial mixtures. Proportioning of the new
concrete mix shall not be done based on empirical data. The design of the
concrete mix shall be in accordance with ACI 211.1 to attain the properties of
strength, slump, entrained air, and water -cement ratio in conformance with the
following requirements.
5.2 Maximum Size of Coarse Aggregate
Coarse aggregate shall be No. 67 (3/4 inch to No. 4) for concrete classes BSA
and CSA. Coarse aggregate for concrete classes BLA and CLA shall be No.
467 (1-1/2 inch to No. 4).
5.3 Proportioning of Ingredients
5.3.1 The proportion of ingredients shall be selected to produce the proper
placeability, pumpability, durability, strength and other required properties,
and shall be such as to produce a mixture which will work readily into the
corners and angles of the forms and around reinforcement by the methods
of placing and consolidation employed on the work, but without permitting
the materials to segregate or excessive free water to collect on the
surface.
5.3.2 The determination of the water -cement ratio to attain the required strength
and/or durability shall be in accordance with ACI 301 and with ACI 211.1.
The maximum water -cement ratio for concrete which will be subjected to
special exposure conditions or exposed to sulfate containing solutions shall
be in accordance with ACI 318, Chapter 4. The maximum water cement
ratio for all other concrete shall be 0.50.
5.4 Strengths
5.4.1 Concrete mixes shall be designed for the minimum compressive strengths,
aggregate size and air content as listed hereafter:
•
�J
.7
Raytheon Engineers &
Constructors
SPECIFICATION
FOR
CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION
Project No.: 77052.001
Spec. No. B05.00T
Page 16 Of 45
5.4.2 Special Classes
a. Pea -gravel aggregate, 3000 psi at 28 days, to be designated as
CPG (an "A" suffix for air entrainment may be used as required.
If used, air content shall be between 6% and 7.5% with a
tolerance of +/- 1.5%.)
b. Sand -cement, 5000 psi at 28 days, shall be referred to on the
Drawings as "S -C Grout".
C. The suffix "F" added to the concrete designation shall indicate
fibrous reinforced concrete.
5.5 Slumr)
Except where otherwise indicated on the Drawings, concrete mixes shall be
designed for the following slumps. Slumps shall be measured in the field at the
point of discharge from the transport vehicle one slump test per truck, and shall
be tested in accordance with ASTM C 143 and shall be within the following
limits:
SLUMP IN INCHES
TYPE OF CONSTRUCTION MAXIMUM MINIMUM
Reinforced Foundation Walls and Footings 4 1
Plain Footings and Substructure Walls 3 1
Drilled Piers 7 5
Beams and Reinforced Walls 4 1
Building Columns 4 1
Pavement Slabs 3 1
Mass or Mat Concrete 2 1
28 Day
Maximum Size
Percent of
Designation
Strength
Aggregate
Entrained Air
Class ASA
5000 psi
3/4"
6.0%
t
1.5%
Class ALA
5000 psi
1 1/2"
5.5%
t
1.5%
Class BSA
4000 psi
3/4"
6.0%
t
1.5%
Class BLA
4000 psi
1 1/2"
5.5%
f
1.5%
Class CSA
3000 psi .
3/4"
6.0%
f
1.5%
Class CLA
3000 psi
1 1/2"
5.5%
t
1.5%
Class D
2000 psi
3/4"
------
(Lean Concrete)
5.4.2 Special Classes
a. Pea -gravel aggregate, 3000 psi at 28 days, to be designated as
CPG (an "A" suffix for air entrainment may be used as required.
If used, air content shall be between 6% and 7.5% with a
tolerance of +/- 1.5%.)
b. Sand -cement, 5000 psi at 28 days, shall be referred to on the
Drawings as "S -C Grout".
C. The suffix "F" added to the concrete designation shall indicate
fibrous reinforced concrete.
5.5 Slumr)
Except where otherwise indicated on the Drawings, concrete mixes shall be
designed for the following slumps. Slumps shall be measured in the field at the
point of discharge from the transport vehicle one slump test per truck, and shall
be tested in accordance with ASTM C 143 and shall be within the following
limits:
SLUMP IN INCHES
TYPE OF CONSTRUCTION MAXIMUM MINIMUM
Reinforced Foundation Walls and Footings 4 1
Plain Footings and Substructure Walls 3 1
Drilled Piers 7 5
Beams and Reinforced Walls 4 1
Building Columns 4 1
Pavement Slabs 3 1
Mass or Mat Concrete 2 1
•
is
•
Raytheon Engineers & SPECIFICATION Project No.: 77052.001
FOR Spec. No. B05.00T
Constructors CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION Page 17 Of 45
5.6 Correction of Proportions
Prior to concreting operations, the Contractor shall establish minimum standards of
proportions of all the types of concrete to be used on the project. Concrete operations
shall proceed with these mix designs, but if at any time the tests, of job concrete
indicate failure to meet the strength, slump, and air entrainment requirements; the
Contractor shall be required to change the standard proportions to meet the
requirements.
5.7 Air -Entraining Agent
5.7.1 All concrete shall be air .entrained. Air content by volume shall be in
accordance with 5.4.1 above and shall be determined in accordance with
ASTM C 231. Air content shall be based on measurements made in
concrete mixtures at points of discharge from the truck at the jobsite.
5.7.2 Air entrainment shall be produced by adding an air entraining agent at the
mixer. Air entraining agent shall conform to ASTM C 260. The agent and
the cement proposed for use shall be selected well in advance of concrete
placing, and the Contractor shall provide satisfactory facilities for ready
procurement of adequate test samples.
5.8 Water -Reducing and Set -Controlling Admixtures
5.8.1 A water -reducing admixture shall be used (ASTM C 494, Type A). At the
option of the Contractor, a water -reducing admixture which retards the
time of set may be used (ASTM C 494, Type D).
5.8.2 Water reducing admixtures shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C
494. Admixtures shall be used in strict accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations and shall be accompanied by the
services of the qualified field representative of the manufacturer to
supervise the use thereof. The Contractor and concrete producer shall
submit a certificate from an approved laboratory attesting that the
admixture equals or exceeds the physical requirements of ASTM C 494,
Type A or D as applicable.
5.9 High Range Water Reducing Admixture (Plasticizer)
5.9.1 At the option of the Contractor, a high range water reducing admixture,
conforming to ASTM C 494 Type F and ASTM C1017, maybe used. The
concrete mix shall be specifically designed for the use of a plasticizer to
maintain homogeneity of the flowing concrete. Plasticizers may only be
added at the site of the pour and must be used in strict accordance with,
and under the supervision of, the manufacturer of the admixture.
.7
40
�aylheon Engineers &
Constructors
SPECIFICATION
FOR
CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION
Project No.: 77052.001
Spec. No. B05.00T
Page 18 Of 45
5.9.2 The use of high range water reducers shall be limited to those placements
which require that concrete be pumped a long distance or which would be
difficult to place at the normal slump.
5.10 Fly Ash
Class F or Class C fly ash may be used in the concrete to be used on this
project. The fly ash shall meet the requirements of ASTM C618, "Standard
Specification for Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for use as a
Mineral Admixture in Portland Cement Concrete", and shall be tested in
accordance with ASTM C31 1, "Standard Test Methods for Sampling and
Testing Fly Ash or Natural Pozzolans for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Portland
Cement Concrete". If a fly ash admixture is to be used, the establishment of
the concrete mix design shall include the use of fly ash and determine the
amount of fly ash which may be used to obtain the specified concrete
properties and strengths. Any deleterious effects from the use of fly ash shall
be reported in writing with the mix design submittal. .
5.11 Concrete Uniformity
Concrete mixers to be used in the performance of -the work of this project shall
be tested by the Contractor for their ability to deliver a uniform mix throughout
the batch. This testing shall be in accordance with the requirements of ASTM
C 94, Annex Al, Concrete Uniformity Requirements. Mixers not meeting the
requirements of ASTM C 94 Annex Al shall not be used until the condition
causing the non-uniformity has been corrected and the mixer re -tested.
5.12 Mixing and Delivery
5.12.1 Scheduling
The Contractor alone shall be responsible for scheduling the class(es) of
concrete needed, slump and additives required, and the start, duration and
rate of concrete deliveries necessary to meet the Contractor's construction
needs.
5.12.2 'Cold Weather Conditions
Concrete mixed and delivered when the mean ambient temperature is 40°F
or less, shall be mixed and delivered in accordance with ACI 306.
5.12.3 Hot -Weather Conditions
• Concrete mixed and delivered when the mean ambient temperature would
be detrimental to concrete, (as defined in ACI 301, Section 8.4.3.) shall
be mixed and delivered in accordance with ACI 305.
•
•
•
Raytheon Engineers &
Constructors
SPECIFICATION
FOR
CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION
5.12.4 Time Limit Between Mixing and Placement
Project No.: 77052.001
Spec. No. B05.00T
Page 19 Of 45
Discharge and placement of each load of concrete shall be complete within
forty-five (45) minutes after addition of water to the mix when hot
weather conditions prevail. At other times, the time limit shall be ninety
(90) minutes.
5.12.5 Delivery Tickets
Each load of concrete shall be accompanied by a delivery ticket, in
triplicate, showing at least the information prescribed by Paragraph 16.1 of
ASTM C 94. After each load of concrete has been discharged or the truck
has been released, one copy of each delivery ticket shall be grouped with
other delivery tickets for that pour, for delivery to the Construction
Manager.
5.12.6 Rejection of Concrete
Deliveries of concrete which has excessive slump, or has commenced its
initial set before or during discharge, or is otherwise observed as not
meeting specification requirements, shall be rejected by the Contractor and
shall not be placed in the work.
5.13 Fibrous Reinforced Concrete
5.13.1 Add fibrous concrete reinforcement to concrete materials at the time
concrete is batched and at the rate recommended by the manufacturer.
5.13.2 Mix batched concrete in strict accordance to the fibrous concrete
manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for uniform and
complete dispersion.
5.13.3 Provide the services of a qualified technical representative from the fibrous
reinforcement manufacturer, or an authorized dealer, to instruct the
concrete supplier in proper batching and mixing of materials.
6 INSTALLATION
6.1 Sub -grade
6.1.1 The subgrade shall be undisturbed soil, rock or compacted structural fill
free of any loose .'material. The soil density shall be tested for compaction
in compliance with the Project Specifications or compaction specified on
the Drawings.
6.1.2 When concrete is placed on soil, provision will be made to eliminate
moisture from the concrete being absorbed by the soil either by use of
•
•
•
Raytheon Engineers &
Constructors
SPECIFICATION
FOR
CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION
Project No.: 77052.001
Spec. No. B05.00T
Page 20 Of 45
polyethylene sheeting or wetting of the soil; however, the soil shall not be
muddy, or have standing water.
6.1.3 Under adverse conditions, the foundation material may be over -excavated
and filled with lean concrete.
6.1.4 The subgrade shall be finished to smooth even contours conforming to the
sections and grade elevations called for on the Drawings.
6.2 Cold Joints
6.2.1 Existing hardened concrete surfaces shall be roughened by sandblasting,
water blasting or air -tooled and cleaned by air or water jet to expose a
good surface of well bonded aggregate.
6.2.2 Hardened concrete surfaces on which new concrete is to be placed shall
be kept wet for 24 hours previous to the pour. Pools of free-standing
water shall be removed and a neat cement mortar having about the same
proportion of cement to sand as the new concrete shall be well brushed
into the surface just prior to placing the new concrete. This mortar shall
not be allowed to dry out or harden before the new concrete is placed.
6.2.3 Some existing concrete surfaces may require special bonding as specified
on the Drawings. Bonding agents shall be applied in accordance with
Section 6.24.4 of this Specification.
6.3 Cleaning
6.3.1 All debris, foreign material, ice and snow shall be cleaned from the interior
of forms, trenches or excavations. No concrete will be placed on or
against frozen soil or subgrade unless a written procedure is submitted to
the Engineer for approval.
6.3.2 Forms, reinforcement and embedded items shall be free of all dirt, oil and
foreign material including hardened or dried concrete or curing compound
splashed on them from previous concrete placements.
6.4 Inspection Prior to Placement
6.4.1 The terms "shall be", "shall have been", "shall be checked" or "shall be
verified" will mean the work has been performed with the knowledge of
and to the satisfaction of, or under direct supervision of the Construction
Manager.
•
•
Raytheon Engineers &
Constructors
SPECIFICATION
FOR
CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION
Project No.: 77052.001
Spec. No. B05.00T
Page 21 Of 45
6.4.2 Formwork, placement of reinforcement and embedded items shall have
been checked for dimensions, elevations, location and tolerances prior. to
placing concrete.
6.4.3 Formwork shall have been checked for design, shoring and adequacy in
- accordance with Section 6.7 of this Specification.
6.4.4 Reinforcement shall have been checked for proper size, positioning, tying
and support in accordance with Section 6.12 of this Specification, the
Drawings and reinforcement placing drawings.
6.4.5 Embedded items shall have been checked for adherence to the Drawings,
locations and adequate fastening to the forms or templates in accordance
with Sections 6.16 and 6.17 of this Specification.
6.4.6 All equipment required for the placing of concrete in the work shall have
been properly cleaned and the operation of mechanical equipment checked
for reliability to perform its intended use.
6.4.7 All materials used in construction of the work shall have been verified as
being in accordance with the Drawings,. this Specification and the
referenced specifications.
6.4.8 The compliance with all sections of this specification, shall have been
inspected and. approved by the Construction Manager before any concrete
is placed.
6.5 Ground Water
When flowing water is encountered, it shall be pumped or diverted away from
the excavation to avoid washing of the fresh concrete during placement
operations. If this method is not possible, then the water should be allowed to
rise to a static no -flow condition and the concrete placed by tremie.
6.6 Access
The Contractor shall have provided adequate access walkways, safety
barricades and facilities, and adequate access ways for concrete delivery
vehicles or conveyances. Under no circumstances will concrete chutes or
conveyances be supported on reinforcing steel.
6.7 Formwork
• 6.7.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for designing and providing suitable and
adequate formwork to meet the safety requirements and the required
quality of the finished work. The material to be used for formwork shall be
selected by the Contractor as being the most suitable for the specific work
r�
•
•
Raytheon Engineers &
Constructors
SPECIFICATION
FOR
CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION
Project No.: 77052.001
Spec. No. B05.00T
Page 22 Of 45
involved. The formwork shall conform to the shapes, lines, elevations and
dimensions of concrete shown on the Drawings. The latest issue of ACI
347 "Guide to Formwork for Concrete" shall be used as a guide.
6.7.2 Formwork shall be designed to resist all loads and forces which it may be
subjected to, safely and without distortion. Dead loads are to be taken as
the weight of formwork including shoring. and bracing, reinforcement,
embedded items and the weight of wet concrete to a minimum of 150
pounds per cubic foot, with due regard to admixtures and rate of placing.
Live loads are to include, but not be limited to, the weight of workmen,
placing equipment, storage of materials, runways, impact and wind loads.
6.7.3 The Contractor shall prepare drawings for the construction and assembly
of formwork including shoring, bracing, guying, tying and reshoring as
required. The drawings shall show details for the work such as, but not
limited to, the following:
Materials, concrete placing methods and openings, rate of placing,
sequence and schedule for placing, provisions for adjustment during
placement, camber, anchors, ties, shores and bracing, scaffolds and
runways, construction joints, foundations for formwork, and all details
pertinent to forming the concrete as shown on the Drawings.
The formwork drawings shall indicate the time for removal of formwork
and shall show design and details of reshoring required for the work.
6.7.4 The Contractor's design and drawings are subject to review and/or
approval by the Construction Manager or the Engineer. The review and/or
approval of the design and drawings in no way relieves the Contractor of
his responsibility of providing suitable and adequate formwork for the
concrete work.
6.7.5 The forms shall be constructed, shored, braced and tied to maintain their
position and shape during and after placing concrete. They shall be
sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar. The forms shall have
adequate stiffeners, wales and braces to prevent noticeable deflection or
waviness. Forms shall be sufficiently rigid to limit deflection under the
weight of wet concrete to 1/8 inch. Forms for beams, floor slabs and
similar members shall be constructed with a camber in order that
deflection due to the weight of forms, reinforcing, and wet concrete shall
be approximately zero after forms are removed.
6.7.6 The forms shall be constructed so that exposed concrete will have smooth
surfaces free from offsets, fins or other unsightly defects. Forms which
are reused shall be thoroughly cleaned of dirt, hardened concrete or
undesirable adhering substances and they shall be patched, repaired and
finished to a smooth surface without broken or chamfered corners.
�J
•
•
Ray�eon Engineers &.
Constructors
SPECIFICATION
FOR
CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION
Project No.: 77052.001
Spec. No. B05.00T
Page 23 Of 45
Form release agent shall be applied to the form surfaces before placing
reinforcement or embedments. Application is to be in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations.
6.7.7 Form ties shall be factory fabricated, removable or snap -off ties, fixed or
adjustable in length, and shall not have devices that will leave a hole larger
than one inch in diameter in the surface of the concrete. The portion of
the tie remaining in the concrete after removal of the exterior parts shall be
at least one inch back from the surface of the concrete. All holes in the
surface of the concrete from ties shall be filled with cement mortar.
Hydraulic structures or other structures requiring watertightness shall have
form ties furnished with waterstops.
All form ties are subject to approval of the Construction Manager.
6.7.8 Openings or other devices shall be provided to permit depositing concrete
in a manner which will prevent segregation or accumulations of hardened
concrete on forms or reinforcement above the concrete level.
Temporary openings shall be provided in forms at the base of columns and
at the bottom of walls to facilitate cleaning and inspection. These
openings shall be securely closed prior to placing concrete.
6.7.9 The corners of all exposed concrete shall have a chamfer of 3/4 inch
unless otherwise noted on the Drawings. The forms shall be provided with
chamfer strips, except where it can be troweled or at the top of piers
where it can be formed in the grout.
6.8 Form Removal
6.8.1 Forms shall be designed and constructed for removal without damage to
concrete.
6.8.2 Forms and shoring shall. not be removed until the concrete has attained
sufficient strength to support its own weight and any construction or
storage loads to which it may be subjected. The use of criteria in this
Specification or in referenced specifications shall not relieve the Contractor
of responsibility for the complete safety of or damage to the structure.
6.8.3 The mix design ingredients (such as type of cement, fly -ash, curing
additives) and the curing procedures (including temperature), shall be
considered in determining the strength of the concrete. The times given
below do not apply to cold weather concreting and are minimum times for
removal of forms only. Curing shall continue as specified in Section 6.26.
C7
C7
0
RayMteon Engineers &
Constructors
SPECIFICATION
FOR
CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION
Project No.: 77052.001
Spec. No. B05.00T
Page 24 Of 45
a. Structures such as footings, mats, equipment piers and pile caps
where form removal induces no stress in the concrete; .the forms
may be removed 12 hours after completion of placement.
b. Structures such as columns, walls or sides of beams for which
the forms do not provide vertical support; the forms may be
removed 24 hours after completion of placement, or when the
concrete has attained 500 psi minimum compressive strength.
C. For all other form removal the strength attained by the concrete,
the stresses from loads the structure may be subjected to, and
the complete safety of the structure shall be evaluated.
6.8.4 If form removal is critical to the construction schedule and the safety of
the structure is questionable, compressive strength control tests shall be
used as evidence that concrete has attained sufficient strength to permit
removal of supporting forms. Cylinders required for the control tests will
be in addition to those required for standard compressive strength testing.
The control test cylinders will be removed from the molds after 24 hours
and stored in the structure where they will be cured in the same manner as
the structure. The cylinders shall be tested' as near the end of the form
removal period as is practical. The forms shall not be removed until the
control test strength has been calculated to be sufficient to withstand the
stresses to which the structure may be subjected.
6.8.5 No concrete section shall be loaded earlier than twenty eight (28) days
after placement without approval of the Construction Manager. Loads
shall not exceed those permitted by the Construction Manager at any
concrete age.
6.9 Shoring
6.9.1 The structural support for formwork shall be designed and constructed in
conformance to criteria given in the design and construction sections of
this Specification as well as conforming to referenced specifications and
publications.
6.9.2 If settlement is a possibility then shoring shall be provided with adjustment
devices so that allowable deflections and tolerances can be monitored and
maintained during placement and curing of the concrete.
6.9.3 The shoring shall not be removed until the structure can safely withstand
the loads it may be subjected to.
•
•
•
Raytheon Engineers &
Constructors
6.10 Reshoring
SPECIFICATION
FOR
CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION
Project No.: 77052.001
Spec. No. B05.00T
Page 25 Of 45
6.10.1 The structure shall be reshored if the formwork is removed before 28 days
or the concrete has not attained the full design strength and the structure
is to be subjected to. loading in excess of the structure's reduced strength
capacity.
6.10.2 Concrete which has cured for 28 days or has attained the full design
strength and is to be subjected to storage or construction loads in excess
of the loads for which it was designed shall be reshored to safely
withstand the loading to which it is to be subjected.
6.10.3 Retaining walls and structures having compacted backfill placed against
them shall be shored to resist the compaction and vibration loads during
backfilling operations.
6.11 Tolerances
6.1 1.1 Tops of piers, pedestals and equipment foundations shall be ± 1/4 inch
within specified elevation and with a variation from level of 1/4 inch in any
10 feet.
6.11.2 Finished floor slabs shall be a true plane within 1/4 (*) inch in 10 feet, as
determined by a 10 -foot straight edge placed anywhere on the slab in any
direction unless special finish tolerances are noted on the Drawings.
(*) May be 5/16 inch for concrete slabs on metal decking.
6.11.3 The tolerance of all concrete work shall be suitable to accommodate all
equipment and. machinery for which it was intended.
6.11.4 All other tolerances shall be in accordance with ACI 117, Tolerances for
Concrete Construction and Materials.
6.12 Reinforcing Steel
6.12.1 Installation of reinforcing 'steel and welded wire fabric shall be in
accordance with ACI 318 and the Drawings. Reinforcing steel shall not be
bent or straightened in a manner injurious to the steel. Bars with kinks or
bends not indicated on the Drawings shall not be used in the work. The
use of heat to bend or straighten reinforcing steel is authorized only if
approved in advance by the Construction Manager. Before placement,
reinforcing steel shall be thoroughly cleaned of loose or flaky rust, mill
scale, or coatings of any foreign substance that would reduce or destroy
the bond. Reinforcing steel reduced in section shall not be used in the
work. Steel shall be placed where indicated on the Drawings. In the event
of a substantial work delay, previously placed reinforcing steel left for
0
•
•
Raylh�n Engineers &
Constructors
SPECIFICATION
FOR
CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION
Project No.: 77052.001
Spec. No. B05.00T
Page 26 Of 45
future bonding shall be inspected and cleaned. Field splices, if required,
shall be made with a wire -tied lap of. not less than the number of bar
diameters indicated in ACI Code 318 for the proper class of splice as
shown on the Drawings. As an alternate, mechanical connectors used in
strict conformance to the manufacturer's recommendations may be used
with prior approval of the Engineer in lieu of the lapped and tied splices.
6.12.2 The clear distance between parallel bars, except in columns, shall be not
less than the nominal diameter of the bars, 1-1/3 times the maximum size
of the coarse aggregate, or' ' 1 inch, whichever is, greater. Where
reinforcement in beams or girders is placed in two (2) or more layers, the
clear distance between parallel layers shall not be less than 1 inch, and the
bars in the upper layers shall be placed directly above those in the bottom
layer.
6.12.3 Reinforcing steel over "K -Void" fibre or equal forms shall be supported on
rods driven into the ground beneath the K -Void, or upon slab bolsters over
steel plates resting on the K -Void. Plate areas and thicknesses shall be
such that the K -Void is not crushed under the combined weight of wet
concrete and reinforcing steel.
6.12.4 Welding shall not be performed on reinforcing steel unless shown on the
Drawings.
6.12.5 Prior to placing any reinforcing in thick mats (i.e., over 2'-0" thick), the
Contractor shall design an adequate reinforcing steel support system to
hold reinforcing for these mats to proper position as shown on the
Drawings. The Construction Manager will inspect and/or review
Contractor's support system prior to placing the reinforcing steel.
6.13 Concrete Covering over Steel Reinforcement
The thickness of* the concrete covering over steel reinforcement shall not be
less than the diameter of the round bars and in the following specific instances,
not less than specified below:
Footings and other principal
structural members in which
concrete is deposited against
the earth or void forms.
Mats on lean concrete mud slabs
3 inches between
earth or void forms
2 inches
Structures where surfaces are 3 inches
in contact with water plus
freezing and thawing.
Concrete surfaces which, after removal
of forms, are exposed to earth or weather:
L_J
•
is
�ay�heon Engineers &.
Constructors
6.14 Suaaorts
SPECIFICATION
FOR
CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION
For bars No. 6 and larger
For bars No. 5 and smaller
Where surfaces are not directly exposed
to earth or weather:
For slabs and walls for
No. 11 and smaller
For beams, girders and tied columns
Project No.: 77052.001
Spec. No. B05.00T
Page 27 Of 45
2 inches
1-1 /2 inches
3/4 inches
1-1 /2 inches
6.14.1 Reinforcement shall be securely held in position by spacers, chairs, or other
approved supports. The type, number and spacing shall conform to ACI
315. They shall be plastic tipped where the finished concrete will be
exposed.
6.14.2 Reinforcement shall be securely tied at intersections and splices, as
required by the CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice for Reinforced
Concrete Construction", to maintain their position during work by other
trades and during concrete placement. Tying shall be done using black or
coated annealed wire, with wire tie ends pointing away from the form.
Tack welding of reinforcing or of reinforcing steel assemblies shall not be
permitted.
6.14:3 When mats and footings are cast on mud slabs, the reinforcing may be
supported on spacers or chairs; however, when slabs, mats or footings are
cast on grade the reinforcing shall be supported on precast concrete blocks
or other approved device. Such supports shall be spaced at intervals
required by the reinforcing size to maintain the specified minimum concrete
cover over the steel bars.
6.15 Splicing of Welded Wire Fabric
6.15.1 End laps shall be avoided in mid -span and support areas of structural slabs;
end cross -wires shall be overlapped by at least two cross -wires plus two
inches, but not less than six inches.
6.15.2 In non-structural slabs, and in structural slabs at points laying between
1/10 and 1/4 of the span from a support, end cross -wires shall be
overlapped at least two inches, unless noted otherwise on the Drawings.
6.15.3 Side laps shall be 1./2 spacing of longitudinal wires.
•
•
Ray�heo�t Engineers &
Constructors
6.16 Embedded Items
SPECIFICATION
FOR
CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION
Project No.: 77052.001
Spec. No. B05.00T
Page 28 Of 45
6.16.1 Prior to placement of concrete and during formwork operations, the
Contractor shall properly locate and set all items to be placed in the. forms
or set into the concrete; such as but not limited to anchor bolts, conduit,
pipe sleeves, floor drains, drain piping, curb angles, weld plates and inserts.
The contractor shall be responsible for securely fastening and supporting
all embedded' items shown on the Drawings and to the dimensions as
shown thereon.
6.16.2 Prior to. setting embedded items into the formwork, all rust -proof protective
coatings which will come in contact with the concrete shall be removed by
solvent cleaning.
6.16.3 Weld plates, inserts, and pipe sleeves shall be located within 1/4 inch of
the location shown on the Drawings.
6.16.4 Cast iron floor drains shall be installed in floor slabs at the location and
elevation shown on the Drawings.
6.17 Anchor Bolts
6.17.1 Anchor bolts and anchor bolt groups shall be supported and set using
templates attached to the forms, and embedded ends securely tied to
prevent displacement during placing of concrete. Tolerances from
dimensions shown on the Drawing shall not exceed the following:
a. Bolt projection - plus 1/4 inch, minus 0 inch.
b. inch center -to -center of any two bolts within an anchor bolt
group, where an anchor bolt group is defined as the set of anchor
bolts which -receive a single fabricated steel shipping piece of
equipment base.
C. inch center -to -center of adjacent anchor bolt groups.
d. Maximum accumulation of 1/4 inch per hundred feet along the
established column or plant control line of multiple anchor bolt
groups, but not to exceed a total of 1 inch, where the established
column line is the actual field line most representative of the centers
of the as -built anchor bolt groups along a line of columns.
e. 1/4 inch from the center of any column or equipment anchor bolt
• group to the established column or plant control lines through
that group.
•
•
Raytheon Engineers &
Constructors
SPECIFICATION .
FOR
CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION
Project No.: 77052.001
Spec. No. B05.00T
Page 29 Of 45
f. The tolerances of paragraphs .3, .4, and .5 apply to offset
dimensions' shown on the plans, measured parallel and
perpendicular to the nearest established column line for individual
columns shown on the plans to be offset from established column
lines.
6.17.2 Unless shown otherwise, anchor bolts shall be set perpendicular to the
theoretical bearing surface.
6.17.3 Welding to anchor bolts will not be permitted except where specifically
shown on the Drawings.
6.17.4 Anchor bolt sleeves shall be plugged, capped, or otherwise securely closed
to prevent entry of concrete, dirt, debris or water during subsequent
construction. Packing or water shall not be permitted to freeze in anchor
bolt sleeves. The use of anti -freeze in anchor bolt sleeves is prohibited.
6.17.5 Exposed anchor bolt threads shall be given a coat of grease and protected
. from corrosion or other damage to the threads.
6.18 Depositing Concrete
6.18.1 Concrete shall be conveyed and placed as rapidly as practical, either by
manual or mechanical means that will prevent the segregation or loss of
ingredients. No aluminum material shall be used to convey or place
concrete. Concrete shall be deposited continuously in horizontal layers, in
a manner to prevent displacing reinforcement and the accumulation of
concrete on the forms or the reinforcement above the level of fresh
concrete. Concrete that has attained its initial set or otherwise becomes
unsuitable for placement, as established by the Construction Manager in
accordance with ASTM C 94, shall not be placed in the work.
6.18.2 Chuting of concrete shall be permitted only upon approval by the
Construction Manager. Chutes shall be of rounded cross-section to avoid
accumulation of concrete in corners. The slopes of chutes shall be steep
enough to permit flow without requiring a slump greater than that
specified or required for placement (slope usually 1 vertical to 2 or 2-1/2
horizontal). In intermittent operations, when free movement of concrete in
the chute is not possible, discharge the material from the chute into
approved hoppers. Thoroughly clean all chutes and hoppers before and
after each run. Wash water and debris shall be discharged outside of
forms.
6.18.3 Where concrete is conveyed and placed by mechanically applied pressure,
the equipment shall be suitable in kind and adequate in capacity for the
work. The operation of the pump shall be such'that a continuous stream
of concrete without air pockets is produced. When pumping is completed,
•
40
is
Raytheon Engineers &
Constructors
SPECIFICATION
FOR
CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION
Project No.: 77052.001
Spec. No. B05.00T
Page 30 Of 45
the concrete remaining in the pipeline shall be ejected in such a manner
that there will be no contamination of the concrete or separation of the
ingredients. After this operation, the entire equipment shall be thoroughly
cleaned.
6:18.4 Concrete shall be placed in the forms in uniform layers as nearly as
practicable in final position. It shall not be allowed to fall freely more than
5 feet in unexposed work nor more than 3 feet in exposed work. Drop
chutes shall be available in sufficient number so the concrete placement .
can be made in horizontal layers with little lateral concrete movement in
the forms. .
Concrete layers shall not exceed 2 feet in thickness and shall be
thoroughly consolidated before the succeeding layer is placed. Timing of
placement shall be such that each succeeding layer is placed before the
preceding layer has reached its initial set.
6.19 Consolidation
6.19.1 During and immediately after placing, concrete shall be vibrated and
worked to provide thorough consolidation around reinforcement,
embedded items, and into corners of forms. It shall be consolidated with
immersion -type vibrators having frequencies in the range of 3600 to
13,000. vibrations per minute. External vibrators mounted on or held
against the forms will not be permitted.
6.19.2 After a level surface has been attained by inserting the vibrator into
centers of high concrete points left during depositing, the vibrator should
be inserted vertically at uniform spacings of about 12 to 24 inches such
that the area visibly affected overlap previously vibrated material by a few
inches.
6.19.3 The vibrator should penetrate rapidly through the- full depth of each new
concrete layer and about six (6) inches into any preceding fresh layer. The
vibrator should be held in such position until consolidation is considered
adequate (5 to 15 sec). The vibrator should then be withdrawn slowly at
a rate of about three (3) inches per second. Concrete should move back
into the space vacated by the vibrator. To prevent segregation of mix,
vibration shall be continued only long enough to accomplish thorough
consolidation and complete embedment of the reinforcement and fixtures.
•
•
•
Rayl Leon Engineers & SPECIFICATION
Constructors
FOR
nStrUCtOIS CONCRETE FOR
Project No.: 77052.001
Spec. No. B05.00T
Page 31 Of 45
6.19.4 Vibrators shall not be used as a means of moving concrete to a desired
placement area. ' This action shall be accomplished by correct initial
placement augmented by the use of hand shovels. The Contractor shall
provide a sufficient number of vibrators so that consolidation can be
accomplished immediately after the concrete has been deposited in the
forms. Vibrators should not come in contact with forms, reinforcing or
embedded items.
6.20 Retemverina
Water shall not be added to mixed batches of concrete to increase the slump
without specific approval of the Construction Manager. When batches
delivered to the job show an unduly * low slump (as might occur during hot
weather) consideration shall be given to the use of retarders.
6.21 Construction Joints
6.21.1 The plans will show normal requirements for construction joints.
Therefore, field work shall be planned so that a minimum number of field
located construction joints are needed. The type, number, and location for
such field established construction joints, shall be reviewed by the
Construction Manager.
6.21.2 Unless otherwise directed by the Construction Manager or shown on the
Drawings, construction joints shall be located as follows:
a. In floor slabs on grade, construction joints shall be located on
interior column lines or at the center of slab panels.
b. In concrete framed floors and roofs, construction joints shall be
placed at the center of span in slabs, beams and girders, except
where intersecting members occur at such points. In these
cases, offset the construction joint a distance approximately
equal to twice the width of the intersecting member and provide
supplementary reinforcing as directed by the Construction
Manager.
C. In steel framed floors and roofs, construction joints shall be
placed at the centerlines of supporting members.
d. In columns, construction joints shall be placed at underside of
floor or roof members and undersides of column capitals,
haunches, or brackets.
e. Horizontal joints below grade and in one story walls above grade
shall be avoided. If joints are necessary, they shall be located at
•
0
U711Moe Engineers &
Constructors
SPECIFICATION
FOR
CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION
Project No.: 77052.001
Spec. No. B05.00T
Page 32 Of 45
well defined horizontal lines such as window sills .or heads, or
other well defined architectural trim lines.
L When vertical joints are deemed necessary in flat wall surfaces,
special care shall be exercised to prevent offsetting of adjacent
wall faces.
6.21.3 The joint surfaces shall be perpendicular to the concrete surfaces in which
they occur, whether the concrete is a wall, slab, mat, beam, or otherwise.
Shearing forces across the joint may be carried by shear keys or web
steel. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, reinforcing steel shall be
continuous across the joints.
6.21.4 For joint preparation see Section 6.2, Cold Joints in this Specification.
6.22 Expansion and Control Joints
6.22.1 Expansion and Control joints shall be provided as located and detailed on
the Drawings. Field changes as to either location or type shall be
approved by the Construction Manager. The Contractor shall supply and
install all material as specified in Section 4., Materials, of, this
Specification. All expansion and control joints shall be sealed. The
maximum horizontal dimensions of concrete wall or floor slab sections
placed at one time shall be 40 feet unless otherwise noted on the
Drawings.
6.22.2 Expansion joints shall have keys or other mechanical devices to keep
adjacent surfaces in alignment, and in accordance with details provided on
the Drawings.
6.22.3 Control joints may be either formed and tooled or sawed. Care shall be
taken in formed joints to not damage the form during placing of concrete
or to not damage the concrete surfaces during removal of form. Saw cut
joints shall be sawed within 24 hours after placing concrete and care shall
be taken to avoid cutting reinforcement. Joints shall be a minimum of one
third the depth of wall or slab.
6.23 Waterstoos
6.23.1 Waterstops shall be provided in all,cold joints for hydraulic structures and
joints below grade where water is present. Joints where waterstops are
provided shall have keys or other mechanical devices designed to prevent
differential movement across the joints.
•
•
•
RayMEeon Engineers &
Constructors
SPECIFICATION
FOR
CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION
Project No.: 77052.001
Spec. No. B05.00T
Page 33 Of 45
6.23.2. Waterstops shall be installed to produce a continuous diaphragm in each
joint indicated on the Drawings or in field -located construction joints in
slabs and walls as approved by the Construction Manager. Splices shall
be made in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
Waterstops shall be accurately secured in position and shall be protected
from damage and displacement during concrete placement. Punctured or
poorly spliced waterstops shall be repaired or replaced by and at the
expense of the Contractor.
6.24 Bonding
6.24.1 Concrete on which other concrete is placed shall be either still plastic or
thoroughly hardened, but not in a semi -hardened state that may be
disrupted and weakened by the added load and the jarring due to
placement of additional concrete.
6.24.2 To provide bond between successive lifts of concrete, the exposed surface
of the hardened concrete shall be cleaned and roughened, without
loosening the embedded aggregate. Brooms or air -water jets shall be used
after the start of initial setting of the concrete. Sand -blasting or air -tooling
shall be employed after the concrete has • hardened. In all cases, the
surface film and laitance or diluted paste shall be removed and a .
reasonably high percentage of aggregate exposed. Immediately before the
new concrete is placed, the old surface shall be clean, damp and free from
standing pools of water.
6.24.3 Batches of neat cement or of mortar having about the same proportion of
cement to sand as used in the concrete, or as otherwise specified herein,
shall be deposited and well brushed in, just ahead of the new concrete.
6.24.4 Where a more positive bond is required and where indicated on the
Drawings, a two-part epoxy bonding compound shall be used to bond new
concrete work to hardened or aged concrete surfaces. The surface
preparation and application of the epoxy bonding compound shall be in
accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendations and specifications.
6.25 Concrete Finishes
6.25.1 Repairing and Patching Formed Surfaces
a. Concrete surfaces shall be repaired immediately after form
removal. Cavities produced by form ties, honeycomb, rock -
pockets, spalling or other similar defects shall be thoroughly
cleaned and kept saturated with water for a period of at least one
hour prior to repair. Before placing dry -pack or mortar, a grout of
cement and water mixed to a consistency of paint shall be
brushed into the surfaces to which the dry -pack or mortar is to be
•
C
•
RayMteoe Engineers &
Constructors
SPECIFICATION
FOR
CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION
Project No.: 77052.001
Spec. No. B05.00T
Page 34 Of 45
bonded. Repair of defective areas shall be in accordance with
ACI 301, Chapter 9.
b. Holes left by tie rods shall be hammer -packed with stiff, dry -pack
mortar of the same materials as that in the concrete.
c. Honeycombed areas shall be removed to a depth at which sound
concrete is exposed. Cut-out areas shall be straight at right
angles to the surface, and filled with concrete matching that of
the structure.
d. Spalled and pitted areas resulting from concrete sticking to the
forms shall be chipped back to obtain a good mechanical bond,
undercut at the edges, and repaired with mortar matching that of
the concrete.
e. On concrete which will be exposed in finished work,
approximately 20 percent white cement shall be mixed with the
gray patching cement to offset the tendency of patches to show
up darker than the surrounding concrete.
f. While defects are being repaired, the surface shall not be allowed
to become dry, nor shall the underlying concrete be damaged.
Patched areas shall be damp cured for 7 days.
g. Finished repairs shall be subject to the approval of the
Construction Manager. Unsatisfactory repairs shall be redone by
and at the expense of the Contractor.
6.25.2 Finishes on Formed and Flat Concrete Surfaces
a. Formed concrete surfaces against which .backfill will be placed,
and which will therefore be concealed in the finished work, shall
have a rough form finish 'with all tie rod holes packed, and all
defects repaired. No other finishing will be required. Rough form
finish. shall be in accordance with ACI 301, Chapter 10.
b. Unformed surfaces of foundations which will be backfilled and
not exposed to view in the finished work shall be screeded to
proper elevation followed by a darby or bull float. Surface
cracking occurring prior to set of the concrete shall be closed by
hand float.
C. Formed concrete surfaces which will be exposed in the finished
work shall have a smooth form finish with all fins and burrs
removed and ground smooth, all the rod holes packed and all
defects repaired. Patches shall match the color of the
•
40
•
Raylfteoi� EnoeerS SPECIFICATION, Project No.: 77052.001
FOR Spec. No. B05.00T
Constructors CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION Page 35 Of 45
surrounding surface and shall be smooth and level. Smooth form
finish shall *be in accordance with ACI 301, Chapter 10.
d. Interior floor surfaces which will remain exposed to view .in the
finished work shall be given a "Double Steel Troweled Finish",
unless noted otherwise on the Drawings.
e. Roof slab surfaces, and floor slab surfaces to receive the or other
overlayment, shall be given a "Single Steel Troweled Finish."
f. Surfaces which will subsequently be grouted for support of
column base plates, equipment, etc., shall be given a "Float
Finish."
g. Unformed concrete surfaces other than slabs or floors, which
remain exposed to view in the finish work shall be given a "Single
Steel Troweled Finish."
h. Exterior slabs for paving, stoops, ramps and sidewalks shall be
given a "Broomed Finish", unless otherwise noted on the
Drawings.
6.25.3 "Float Finish" shall be accomplished by either wood, cork, or metal floats
or by a finishing machine. After the concrete has been properly placed,
vibrated, and roughly leveled, it shall be screeded off to the proper
elevation. Coarse aggregate shall be tamped below the surface. After
screeding and tamping of coarse aggregate, the surface shall be made
uniform by means of a bull float. After floating, the surface shall be tested
for uniformity by use of a straightedge. Variations from desired finished
elevations shall not exceed 1/4 inch in ten feet. Use of neat cement to
absorb excessive surface water is prohibited.
6.25.4 "Single Steel Troweled Finish" shall consist of a float finish followed by
steel troweling. Steel troweling shall be performed after the surface
moisture has disappeared. Concrete surfaces shall be steel troweled to a
smooth, even finish, free from trowel marks.
6.25.5 "Double Steel Troweled Finish" shall consist of a single steel troweled
finish with additional troweling to produce a smoother and harder or
denser finish. Time shall be allowed to elapse between trowelings so that
the concrete will set further. Final troweling shall result in a burnished
appearance.
•
.7
•
Raytheon Engineers &
Constructors
SPECIFICATION
FOR
CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION
Project No.: 77052.001
Spec. No. B05.00T
Page 36 Of 45
6.25.6 "groomed Finish" shall be performed after the "Float Finish" by drawing a
natural bristle broom across the surface to produce corrugations of regular
appearance not over 1/16 inch deep. The fibers shall be kept clean by
frequent washings and cake on the fibers shall not be allowed to score the
surface.
6.26 Protection and Curing
6.26.1 Protection and curing shall be accomplished by preventing loss of
moisture, rapid temperature change, mechanical injury, or damage from
rain, frost or flowing water. Curing shall be started after placing and
finishing as soon as the surface conditions are suitable. Curing of formed
surfaces shall be accomplished by moist curing with forms in place for the
full curing period, or, if forms are removed prior to the end of the curing
period, by one of the following methods, or combinations thereof.
The minimum curing periods for concrete placed hereunder, except as
noted in ACI 306, shall be:
Curing Temperature Curing Period
50017- 70°F 7 days
70°F - 100°F 5 days
a. Protective Wet Curing
The protective medium for wet curing shall consist of saturated
cotton mats or a double layer of burlap, of sufficient size to cover
the entire concrete surface and side forms. The mats or burlap shall
be kept continuously wet during use. After finishing operations and
prior to start of protective wet curing, .the concrete surface shall be
kept wet with adequate fog spraying equipment. During any change
in curing medium, the concrete shall remain exposed for not more
than one hour.
b. Moist -Curing
Unformed surfaces shall be covered with burlap, cotton or other
approved fabric mats kept in contact with the surface, or with sand,
and shall be kept continually wet. Where formed surfaces are cured
in the forms, the forms shall be kept continually wet. If the forms
are removed before the end of the curing period, curing shall be
continued as on unformed surfaces, using suitable materials. Burlap
shall be in two layers.
0
•
0
Raytheon Engineers, &
Constructors
SPECIFICATION
FOR
'CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION
C. Waterproof -Paper Curing
Project No.: 77052.001
Spec. No. B05.00T
Page 37 Of 45
Surfaces shall be covered with waterproof paper with 4 inches of
overlap at sides and ends and sealed with mastic or pressure -
sensitive tape not less than 1-1/2 inches in width. The paper shall
be weighted to prevent displacement, and tears or holes appearing
during the curing period shall be immediately repaired by patching.
d. Membrane Curinq
Pressure spray tinted curing compounds shall be of the type
previously specified. The compound shall be applied according to
the manufacturer's directions immediately after finishing operations
are completed and forms removed. The quantity applied shall be
sufficient to ensure the formation of a continuous unbroken film.
The curing compound shall cover the entire area of the exposed
surface, and shall be applied in two separate applications, each of
which shall be an even sweeping motion of the nozzle with sufficient
overlap to ensure uniform •and complete coverage. The second
application shall follow five to thirty minutes after the first and shall
be so directed as to cross and recross the sweep of the first
application.
Curing compound shall not be used or permitted on surfaces where
future bonding, concrete hardener, or painting is indicated. Such
surfaces shall be cured by the moist process as specified previously.
After final application of the compound, surfaces shall be protected
from traffic and other damage to the membrane for a period of
curing as specified herein.
The use of any membrane material which will impart a slippery
surface to the concrete or alter its natural color shall not be
permitted. The compound, however, shall contain a dye of color
strength sufficient to render the film distinctly visible on the concrete
surface for a period of at least four hours after application and shall
be of such character that it will harden within thirty (30) minutes.
If concrete surfaces which are to receive curing compound are
expected to be exposed. to freezing temperatures within five (5)
days, the membrane curing compound shall not be used.
•
is
Ray�eon Engineers &
Constructors
e.
SPECIFICATION
FOR
CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION
Project No.: 77052.001
Spec. No. B05.00T
Page 38 Of 45
Polyethylene Sheeting and Polyethylene -Coating Waterproof
Paper and Burlap
Surfaces shall be completely covered. Where a single sheet does
not cover the entire surface, additional sheets shall be used. The
ends and sides shall be lapped not less than four (4) inches and
sealed with pressure -sensitive tape.
6.26.2 . Protection
The Contractor shall be fully responsible for protecting finished concrete
work .from damage, marring of finish, discoloration or other detrimental
conditions during curing and subsequent construction operations.
After the curing periods specified, concrete shall not be allowed to heat or
cool faster than at a rate of 5 ° F per hour, or 20 ° F per twenty-four hour
period, until outside temperatures are achieved. Either dry or steam heat
will be an acceptable means of maintaining temperature control.
6.27 Cold Weather Reauirements
Concrete shall not be placed during cold weather unless special precautions are
taken. Cold weather is defined as any period when, for more than three
successive days, the mean daily temperature is, or .is forecast to be, below
40°F or when any unformed concrete surface less than forty-eight (48) hours in
age is, or is forecast to be, exposed to temperatures less than 32°F. If it is
necessary to place concrete under conditions of low temperature, placement
and protection methods shall be in accordance with this Section and ACI 306.
Concrete damaged by freezing shall be removed and replaced by and at the
expense of the Contractor.
6.27.1 Concrete temperatures and curing periods shall conform to the
following charts:
Concrete temperature* as delivered:
Minimum Placement Dimension
Ambient Less Larger
Temperature Than 12" 12"-36" 36"-72" Than 72"
Above 30°F 60°F 55°F 50°F 45°F
30°F to 0°F 65°F 50°F 55°F 50°F
Below 0°F 70°F 65°F 60°F 55°F
• *Concrete temperature as delivered shall not exceed the above minimum concrete
temperatures by more than 10°F.
•
r�
Raytheon Engineers & SPECIFICATION Project No.: 77052.001
FOR Spec. No. B05.00T
Constructors CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION Page 39 ' Of 45
Concrete temperatures as placed .and maintained for curing period:
Minimum Placement Dimension
Less Larger
Than 12" 12"-36" 36"-72" Than 72"
Min. Concrete Temp 55°F 50°F 45°F 40°F
Min. Curing Period
(Days) 7 7 6 5
Max. Temp. of Concrete 80°F 75°F 70°F 65"F
Surface or Form During
Curing Period
6.27.2 Temperatures of forms, reinforcing, embedments or earth to be in
contact with fresh concrete shall be at least 35°F but shall not exceed
600F.
6.27.3 Enclosures shall be windproof, weatherproof and provide for the
circulation of air in contact with concrete surfaces or forms.
6.27.4 Heating units shall be located, so as not to heat or dry the concrete
locally. Heaters shall be vented, if necessary, so that the concrete is
not exposed to carbon dioxide. Open type or oil pot salamanders shall
not be used.
6.27.5 Blanket or batt insulation shall be protected by a tough moisture proof
cover from wind, rain or snow which will impair its insulating
properties. Such insulation shall be lapped and kept in close contact
with the concrete or formed surfaces.
6.27.6 Records of outside temperatures, weather conditions and concrete or
form temperatures shall be maintained for the placements.
Temperatures should be secured at several locations within enclosures,
on the concrete or formed surfaces, and at corners and edges of forms
or concrete to indicate the range of temperatures. Temperature data
shall be submitted to the Construction Manager.
6.28 Normal and Hot Weather Requirements
For normal and hot weather concreting, when the requirements for cold
weather concreting are not applicable, concreting shall be subject to the
following.
• I 6.28.1 Concrete temperatures as delivered shall be within the limits below.
L`
•
•
Raytheon Engineers &
Constructors
SPECIFICATION
FOR
CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION
Project No.: 77052.001
Spec. No. B05.00T
Page 40 Of 45
Minimum Placement Dimension
Less than 48" 48" or Larger
Maximum Concrete Temp. 80°F 70°F
Minimum Concrete Temp. 60°F 50°F
6.28.2 When air temperatures are expected to exceed 90°F during placing,
finishing and the first twenty four (24) hours after finishing or when
the rate of evaporation :as determined by Figure 2.1.5 (ACI 305) is
expected to exceed. 0.2 lbs/ft2/hr. during placing and finishing,
precautionary measures shall be put into effect by the Contractor to
prevent damage to concrete due to hot weather. Every effort shall be
made to minimize the time of delivery, placing, consolidation and
finishing. When the air temperature is expected to exceed 90°F
within forty-eight hours after placement, all surfaces shall be protected
from direct sunlight for a minimum period of forty-eight hours. If it is
necessary to place concrete during hot weather conditions, placement
and protection methods shall be in accordance with this Section and
ACI 305.
6.29 Attachment of Bolts or Dowels to Hardened Concrete
6.29.1 Holes drilled in hardened concrete for epoxy grouting of anchor bolts,
reinforcing bars and dowels shall be drilled with a rotary impact drill to a
diameter 1/8 inch greater than the item to be installed in the hole. The
hole shall be cleaned with water to remove concrete dust and then dried.
Do not use compressed air to dry the hole unless it is oil -free air. The hole
shall be clean and dry prior to introduction of the epoxy.
6.29.2 Reinforcing bars, dowels and anchors bolts, which are to be epoxy
grouted, shall be sandblasted to white metal and shall be clean, dry and at
temperatures specified by the epoxy manufacturer.
6.30 Clean -Up
Following completion of the work covered by the contract and this Specification for
any structure or portion thereof, the Contractor is required to clean-up the area for
subsequent construction or equipment installation. The clean-up work shall consist
of, but not be limited to, removal of construction equipment and materials used in
the work, forms, unused materials, and spilled concrete. The clean-up work and
disposal of trash and debris shall be as directed and approved by the Construction
Manager.
C,
0
•
Raytheon Engineers & SPECIFICATION
FOR
COIlStrUdOrS CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION
7 TESTING AND INSPECTION
7.1 Subgrade Density
Project No.: 77052.001
Spec. No. B05.00T
Page 41 Of 45
The subgrade density of undisturbed soil or the compaction of fill material will
be tested by others retained by the Construction Manager using an approved
method as directed by the Construction Manager.
7.2 Concrete Strength Testing
7.2.1 During the course of construction, tests shall be made by others retained
by the Construction Manager to determine whether the concrete, as being
produced and delivered, complies with the standards of quality specified.
The sampling and testing of concrete shall be in accordance with
Specification for Sampling, Testing and Construction Control of Concrete,
Earthwork and Structural Steel, 808.01.
a. The Contractor is not relieved of the responsibility of proper
placing and curing even though test reports indicate adequate
strengths.
b. The Contractor shall provide such access and assistance as these
personnel may require in obtaining their samples, and shall not
place any concrete rejected by them for any reason.
C. For concrete containing fly ash, the fly ash shall be tested every
30 days minimum or as specified in ASTM C 311.
7.2.2 Enforcement of Strength Requirements
a. Definition of Failure
1) Cast Specimens
The test specimens cast in the field will be considered to
have failed the strength requirements when, for any class of
concrete, the average of any set of three consecutive
strength test results are not equal to the specified strength or
any individual test result falls below the specified strength by
more than 500 psi.
2) Cored Specimens
The concrete represented by cored specimens will be
considered to have failed the strength requirements when the
average strength of the cores falls below 85 percent of the
•
•
0
MINI on Engineers & SPECIFICATION Project No.: 77052.001
FOR Spec. No. B05.00T
Constructors CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION Page 42 Of 45
specified strength or the strength of any single core specimen
falls below 75 percent of the specified strength. ,
b. Failure of Test Specimens
When test specimens, made, cured, and tested fail as above
defined, the Construction Manager may request one or more of the
following actions be taken:
1) Additional Wet Curing
The Contractor shall wet cure the structure • in accordance
with a plan approved by the Construction Manager.
2) Testing of Cored Specimens
The Construction Manager will specify the location where
each core specimen shall be secured. At least three cores
shall be taken from each portion of the structure for which
cast test specimens have failed.
Specimens will be secured, prepared and tested in
accordance with ASTM C 42 and ACI 301. Cored
specimens shall be tested no later than 60 days after the
concrete was placed unless' otherwise authorized by the
Construction Manager.
Where cored specimens fail as defined in Section 7.2.2.1,
the Contractor shall strengthen or replace the structure in
accordance with a plan approved by the Construction
Manager.
3) Reinforcing the Structure
The Contractor shall strengthen the deficient portions of the
structure in accordance with a plan approved by the
Construction Manager.
4) Replacement
The Contractor shall replace the deficient portions of the
structure in accordance with a plan approved by the
Construction Manager.
•
•
RayM�eon Engineers &
Constructors
7.3 Slump Tests
SPECIFICATION
FOR
CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION
5) Test Loading
Project No.: 77052.001
Spec. No. B05.00T
Page 43 Of 45
The Contractor shall conduct a test loading of the structure
according to Chapter 20, ACI 318 in an area, orareas,
areas,
designated by the Construction Manager.
7.3.1 Slump tests will be made in accordance with ASTM C 143.
Slump tests will be made from samples taken in accordance with ASTM C
172.
7.3.2 Tests for Entrained Air
The entrained air content of fresh concrete shall be determined in
accordance with ASTM C 231.
7.4 Inspection
7.4.1 The Contractor shall allow the Construction. Manager a minimum of eight
working hours notice prior to anticipated start of placement of concrete for
inspection. The work to be performed in the presence of, with the
knowledge of, or inspected by the Construction Manager or person
delegated by him to approve the work, consists of, but is not limited to the
following: Subgrade conditions; formwork location, dimensions, adequacy
and support; reinforcement sizes, location, tieing, support, splicing and
cleanliness; embedded items location, dimensions and support; the
condition and adequacy of all placement equipment including pumps,
chutes, vibrators, and provision of cold or hot weather equipment or
materials required; and the provisions for work platforms, barricades and
safety provisions.
7.4.2 Materials supplied and work performed under this Specification may, at
the Construction Manager's option, be inspected in the shop and, or batch
plant and will be inspected in the field. The Contractor shall provide
facilities for shop or batch plant inspection, if requested by the
Construction Manager, at no additional cost to the Construction Manager.
Inspection of material does not in any way relieve the Contractor of
responsibility for the quality and accuracy of the material.
7.4.3 Material or work not meeting the requirements specified herein will be
rejected and shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense.
• 7.4.4 The Contractor shall be responsible for all'.. errors in detailing and
fabrication.
•
•
Raytheon Engineers & SPECIFICATION
FOR
Constructors CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION
8 HANDLING AND STORAGE
8.1 Reinforcement
8.1.1 Packaging
Project No.: 77052.001
Spec. No. B05.00T
Page 44 Of 45
Bars shall be bundled and tagged in accordance with the Manual of
Standard Practice, latest revision thereof, as published by the Concrete
Reinforcing Steel Institute.
8.1.2 Storing
Reinforcing steel shall be handled and stored in a manner to avoid
distortion, excessive rusting, and objectionable coatings of paint, oil,
grease, dried mud, dried mortar or other materials. Bars shall be stored so
that each may be identified after bundles are broken.
8.2 Embedded Items
Embedded items shall be handled and stored in a manner to avoid distortion,
excessive rusting, and objectionable coatings of paint, oil, grease, dried mud,
dried mortar or other materials. Anchor bolt threads shall be protected from
rusting or burring.
8.3 Accessories
Accessories shall be stored in a manner to avoid distortion and objectionable
coatings. Expansion joint material shall not be crushed or broken. Waterstop
material shall not be crushed, distorted or punctured. All materials shall be
stored in a manner to prevent it being lost or misplaced.
9 DOCUMENTATION
9.1 Concrete Placement Clearance
The "Concrete Placement Clearance" form will be provided by the Construction
Manager. This form must be completed and submitted to the Construction
Manager prior to concrete placement.
9.2 Material Soecifications
9.2.1 The Contractor shall provide the Construction Manager with a copy of the
manufacturer's specifications for all materials purchased by the Contractor
and used in the work, such as but not limited to; form ties, expansion joint
material, waterstops, sealants, curing compounds, concrete additives,
embedded items, concrete protective coatings, and any manufactured
items used in the work.
•
•
•
Raytheon Engineers & SPECIFICATION
FOR
Constructors CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION
Project No.: 77052.001
Spec. No. B05.00T
Page 45 Of 45
9.2.2 The Contractor shall provide confirmation specifications or mill reports for
steel reinforcement, fibrous reinforcement, and fabricated embedded
items.
9.2.3 Submittal of documentation shall be in accordance with the Contract to
which this Specification is attached.
9.3 Concrete Mix Design
9.3.1 Prior to placing concrete, the Contractor shall submit to the Construction
Manager the concrete materials and the concrete mix designs proposed for
use with a written request for acceptance. This submittal shall include the
results of all testing performed to qualify the materials and to establish the
mix designs in accordance with ACI -301, Paragraph 3.8. The data
submitted shall also include certification that all material proposed for use
in the concrete meets the specified requirements and all test results, or
manufacturer's certification and/or analyses which are the basis of this
certification. No concrete shall be placed in the work until the Contractor
has received such acceptance in writing.
9.3.2 The Contractor shall submit printed recommendations from the
manufacturer of fibrous concrete reinforcement. The recommendations
shall state the length of fiber which shall be used and the quantity of fiber
to be added per cubic yard for each class of concrete specified herein.
9.4 Fabricated Item Shoo Details
9.4.1 Reinforcing Steel
Prior to fabrication or shipment of reinforcing and accessories, the
Contractor shall submit, and receive approval of, shop drawings. Shop
drawings shall indicate bending diagrams, assembly diagrams, splicing and
lapping of rods, shapes, dimensions and details of bar reinforcing and
accessories. Drawings shall show all openings and penetrations that pass
through concrete construction. The approval of drawings will be for
conformance to the design intent and will not relieve the Contractor of
responsibility for errors, omissions or the accuracy of his own dimensions.
Drawings and details shall conform to ACI 315 and ACI 318.
9.4.2 Embedded Items
Prior to fabrication or shipment of embedded items, the Contractor shall
submit, and receive approval of, shop drawings. The drawings will show
all material specifications, cuts, anchorage devices, welds and finish in
accordance with the engineering Drawings and the American Institute of
Steel Construction Code of Standard Practice. The approval of drawings
will be for conformance to the design intent and will not relieve the
Contractor of responsibility for errors, omissions, or the accuracy of
dimensions.
•
�
�
v
a
Raytheon Engineers &
Constructors
CLIENT: Wild Goose Storage JOB/INQUIRY NO.: 77052.001
FACILITY: Wild Goose Gas Storage SPEC NO.: C05.01 T
LOCATION: Butte County, California
SPECIFICATION
For
SUPPLY AND FABRICATION OF
STRUCTURAL AND MISCELLANEOUS STEEL
This title page is a record of all revisions of the specification. Each time the specification is
changed, only the new or revised pages are issued. For convenience, the nature of each
revision is briefly noted below.
REV. NO.
DATE
BY
CHECKED
APPROVAL
PAGES
F NATURE OF REVISIONS
A
0
10/28/97
02/03/98
RVO
VV
All
For Client Review
Approved for Construction
Rev.
No.
LEAD
PROC
LEAD
MECH
LEAD
PIPE
LEAD
CIVIL
LEAD
STRUC
LEAD
ARCH
LEAD
ELEC
LEAD
I&C
OA
PEM
PM
CDE
CON
SUP
-'
--
--
VV
--
--
--
J RW
J Y
RVO
--
0
--
--
--
--
G%
--
--
--
(,
--
--
Distribution:
Per Project Distribution. Matrix
rl
•
SPECIFICATION FOR Project No. 77052.
ftVH M Engineers & SUPPLY AND FABRICATION OF Spec. No. C05.0
Constructors STRUCTURAL AND MISCELLANEOUS STEEL Page i
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1
SCOPE................................................................................................
1
2
APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS................................................................
2
3
MATERIALS...............................:........................................................
5
4
DESIGN AND DETAILING.....................................................................
7
5
FABRICATION.....................................................................................
12
6
PAINTING...........................................................................................
14
7
GALVANIZED MATERIAL.....................................................................
16
8
INSPECTION................................................:.......................................
17
9
AUTHORITY TO REJECT............................................................ :.........
18
10
LIABILITY FOR DEFECTIVE MATERIAL ..................................................
18
11
PACKAGING AND SHIPPING................................................................
18
12
DOCUMENTATION..............................................................................
19
G: \HOME\E6828\VIMGOOSE\COS-01 T. DOC
U
SPECIFICATION FOR Project No. 77052.001
ftVHMM Engineers & SUPPLY AND FABRICATION OF Spec. No. C05.01 T
Constructors STRUCTURAL AND MISCELLANEOUS STEEL Page 1 of 21
1. SCOPE
1.1 This Specification governs. the detailing, fabrication and delivery of structural and
miscellaneous steel for the Wild Goose Gas Storage Facility Project.
1.2 Items to be furnished shall consist of, but not necessarily be limited to, the
following:
1.2.1 Structural steel as defined in the AISC Code of Standard Practice.
1.2.2 Base, leveling and cap plates; columns, posts, hangers and struts; beams,
girders, plate girders and trusses; gins, purlins, sag -rods, bracing, and
miscellaneous tees, angles -and plates; including all essential clips, gussets
and separators.
1.2.3 Preassembled and non-preassem bled steel stairs, including: stringers and
treads, nosings, landings, handrails, bracing and struts.
1.2.4 Handrail, guardrail and kickplates.
1.2.5 Monorail and crane beams, clips, bumpers, wheel stops, and framing.
1.2.6 Crane rails complete with fasteners.
1.2.7 Metal ladders complete with ladder safety cages and safety gates.
1.2.8 Metal grating with anchoring devices (galvanized and ungalvanized).
1.2.9 Raised pattern floorplate (galvanized and ungalvanized).
1.2.10 Bolts with washers and nuts (common and high strength), both for
shop bolting and bolting for field erection. An extra 2 percent of each
field bolt size, washers and nuts shall be furnished to allow for waste
in field erection by others.
1.2.11 Direct Tension Indicators, including an extra 2 percent to allow for
waste in field.
1.2.12 Metal frames, which form a part of the structural steel framing, for
penetrations and other openings shown on design Drawings.
1.2.13 Shims required for connections.
1.2.14 Surface preparation, galvanizing, cladding and shop painting.
• 1.2.15 Certified Material test reports and Certificates of Compliance/
Conformance for materials as required by this Specification.
G: \HOME\E6828\WL LKiOOSE\COS-01'1'. LWJC
•
•
•
SPECIFICATION FOR Project No. 77052.001
ftVHmmn Engineers & SUPPLY AND FABRICATION OF Spec. No. C05.01 T
Constructors STRUCTURAL AND MISCELLANEOUS STEEL Page 2 of 21
1.2.16 Inspection and testing of shop welding and shop high strength bolting.
1.2.17 Fabric reinforced neoprene or other proprietary bearing pads, bushings,
etc. required in conjunction with the structural steel erection.
1.2:18 Shop and erection drawings and other engineering design and data as
specified.
1.2.19 Fabrication and delivery to the jobsite of the specified items.
1.3 Work Not Included
The following will be provided by others:
1.3.1 Unloading and installation at the Project Site.
1.3.2 Furnishing, delivering and installing the following:
a. Steel items to be embedded in concrete or attached to masonry
(unless attached to steel framing).
b. Metal door and window frames that are not an integral part of the
steel framing.
C. Steel items designated on the Drawings as being furnished by
others.
2. APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS
The latest editions of the following specifications, codes and standards, including
revisions and supplements in effect on May 1, 1997, form a part of this Specification
in their entirety except as modified by this Specification.
2.1 American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC)
Manual of Steel Construction, ASD
Specification for Structural Steel Buildings
Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges
AISC Quality Certification Program
Manual of Steel Construction, Volume II, Connections, ASD
Detailing for Steel Construction
Engineering for Steel Construction
G:\IiONffiAM828\VaDGGOSE\CO5-OIT.DOC
C7
•
SPECIFICATION FOR Project No. 77052.001
ftVHW 11 Engineers & SUPPLY AND FABRICATION OF Spec. No. C05.01T
Constructors STRUCTURAL AND MISCELLANEOUS STEEL Page 3 of 21
2.2 Research Council On Structural Connections of the Engineering Foundation
Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts.
2.3 American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI)
Specifications for the Design of Cold -Formed Steel Structural Members.
2.4 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
Al Specification for Carbon Steel Tee Rails
A3 Specification for Steel Joint Bars, Low, Medium, and High Carbon
(Non -Heat Treated).
A6 Specification for General Requirements for Delivery of Rolled Steel
Plates, Shapes, Sheet Piling and Bars for Structural Use.
A36 Specification for Structural Steel
A49 Specification for Heat Treated'Joint Bars
A53 Specification for Pipe; Steel, Black and Hot -Dipped, Zinc -Coated
Welded and Seamless
A90 Test Method for Weight of Coating on Zinc Coated (Galvanized) Iron
or Steel Articles.
A108 Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold -Finished, Standard Quality
A123 Specification for Zinc (Hot -Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel
Products.
A143 Practice for Safeguarding Against Embrittlement of Hot -Dip
Galvanized Structural Steel Products and Procedure for Detecting
Embrittlement.
Al 53 Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware
A307 Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile
A325 Specification for High -Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints
A370 Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing of Steel Products
A384 Practice for Safeguarding Against Warpage and Distortion During
Hot -Dip Galvanizing of Steel Assemblies
G:\HOME\E6828\Y4.DGOOSE\COS-OIT.DOC
•
•
SPECIFICATION FOR Project No. 77052.001
ftVH mn Engineers & SUPPLY AND FABRICATION OF . Spec. No. C05.01 T
Constructors STRUCTURAL AND MISCELLANEOUS STEEL Page 4 of 21
A385 Practice for Providing High -Quality Zinc Coatings (Hot -Dip) .
A446 Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot
Dip Process, Structural (Physical) Quality
A449 Specification for Quenched and Tempered Steel Bolts and Studs
A490 Specification for Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Bolts for
Structural Steel Joints
A500 Specification for Cold -Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel
Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes
A501 Specification for Hot -Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel
Structural Tubing
A525 Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated
(Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process.
A563 Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts
'A569 Specification for Steel, Carbon (0.15 Maximum Percent) Hot -Rolled
Sheet and Strip, Commercial Quality,
A668 Specification for Steel Forgings, Carbon and alloy, for General
Industrial Use
B695 Specification for Coatings of Zinc Mechanically Deposited on Iron
and Steel
E165 Practice for Liquid Penetrant Inspection Method
E709 Practice for Magnetic Particle Examination
F436 Specification for Hardened Steel Washers
F959 Specification for Compressible -Washer -Type Direct Tension
Indicators for Use with Structural Fasteners
2.5 American Welding Society (AWS)
A2.4 Symbols for Welding and Nondestructive Testing
D1.1 Structural Welding Code.
2.6 Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC)
PA1 Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting
li: \ti V MC\COlSLES\ W 11JCiV VJhK:U�-U11.11VU
r�
•
SPECIFICATION FOR Project No. 77052.001
ftVH M Engineers & SUPPLY AND FABRICATION OF Spec. No. C05.01 T
Constructors STRUCTURAL AND MISCELLANEOUS STEEL Page 5 of 21
PA2 Measurement of Dry Paint Thickness with Magnetic Gauges
SP1 Solvent Cleaning
SP2 Hand Tool Cleaning
SP3 Power Tool Cleaning
SP5 White Metal Blast Cleaning
SP6 Commercial Blast Cleaning
SP7 Brush -Off Blast Cleaning
SP8 Pickling
SP10 Near -White Metal Blast Cleaning
PS Guide
12.00 Guide to Zinc Rich Coating Systems
2.7 National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM)
Specifications
"Standard Specification for Metal Bar Grating and Metal Bar Grating
Treads".
2.8 Crane Manufacturer's Association of America (CMAA)
#70, Specification for Electric Overhead Traveling Cranes
2.9 Steel Deck Institute
Specifications and Commentaries for Composite Steel Floor Deck
Specifications and Commentaries for Non -Composite Steel Form Deck
Specifications and Commentaries for Steel Roof Decks
2.10 Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)
Title 29, Part 1910, Occupational Safety and Health Standards
2.11 Should a conflict be found between the listed codes and standards and this
Specification and/or Project Drawings, the conflict shall be submitted to the
Engineer for resolution prior to proceeding with the affected work.
3. MATERIALS
3.1 All material shall be new and free of imperfections. Scrap material shall not be
• used. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, structural steel shapes, plates.
and bars shall conform to ASTM A36.
G:\HOME\E6828\WLDGOOSE\C05-O1T.11OC
C�
is
•
SPECIFICATION FOR Project No. 77052.001
ftYU M Engineers & SUPPLY AND FABRICATION OF Spec. No. C05.01 T
Constructors STRUCTURAL AND MISCELLANEOUS STEEL Page 6 of 21
3.2 Steel pipe and handrail shall conform to ASTM A53, Grade B, Type E or S.
Handrail shall be 1 -1/2 -inch nominal inside diameter.
3.3 Structural steel tubing shall conform to ASTM A500 and/or ASTM A501.
3.4 High-strength bolts shall conform to ASTM A325 Type 1 with ASTM A563,
Grade DH nuts. ASTM A194 nuts are not acceptable. Washers shall conform to
ASTM F436. Bolts, nuts and washers shall be marked by the manufacturer to
show the manufacturer's name, type, grade, etc., as required by A325, A563,
F436, respectively.
3.5 Common bolts, . nuts, and washers shall conform to ASTM A307, Grade A.
Minimum size- of common bolts shall be 3/4 inches diameter, except for those
bolts used to secure stair treads to stringers. These bolts shall be 3/8 ' inches
diameter. Bolts, nuts and washers shall be mechanically galvanized in accordance
with ASTM B695.
3.6 Direct Tension Indicators shall be as manufactured by J&M Turner, Inc. or a
Engineer -approved equal, shall conform to ASTM F959, and shall be mechanically
galvanized in acccordance with ASTM B695.
3.7 Weldable studs, 7/8 inch diameter and smaller, shall be ASTM A108, as
manufactured by Nelson Stud Welding Company, or Engineer approved equal.
3.8 Welding electrodes for carbon steel materials shall have a 70,000 psi minimum
tensile strength and comply with Table 4.1, AWS D1.1.
3.9 Steel floorplate shall be U.S. Steel "Multigrip", minimum thickness of 1/4 inch, or
Engineer approved equal, hot -dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123 after
fabrication. Plate shall be pressed flat as required after galvanizing.
3.10 Metal grating shall be ASTM A569 welded carbon steel with, unless otherwise
noted on the design Drawings, 1-1/4 inches deep by 3/16 inches wide bearing
bars spaced at 1-3/16 inches center -to -center and cross bars at 4 inches
center -to -center. Grating shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123 and
shall be serrated for outdoor use or as shown on the Drawings.
3.11 Stair treads shall be ASTM A569 welded carbon steel bar grating with, unless
noted on the design Drawings, 3/16 inches wide bearing bars spaced at 1-3/16
inches center- to -center, cross bars at 4 inches center -to -center and a raised
pattern, checkered plate nosing with nonslip finish. Stair treads and nosings shall
be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123 after fabrication. The stair treads
shall be serrated for outdoor use or as shown on the Drawings. The depth of
bearing bars shall be 1-1/2 inches for 30 -inch and 36 -inch long treads and shall be
1-3/4 inches for 42 -inch and 48 -inch long treads. Carrier plates shall be in
accordance with the recommendations of the National Association of Architectural
Metal Manufacturers.
u: \HonE\h6sz8\wi.0(jL)USE\cu)-u rr. LIUC
40
is
SPECIFICATION FOR Project No. 77052.001
Raytheon Engineers & SUPPLY AND FABRICATION OF Spec. No. C05.01 T
Constructors STRUCTURAL AND MISCELLANEOUS STEEL Page 7 of 21
3.12 Crane Rails shall conform to ASTM Al and as additionally specified herein:
3.12.1 Joint bars for non -heat-treated rails shall be high carbon steel conforming
to ASTM A3 and shall match rail section.
and she" Fneteh few! seeteeig. Joint bars will be specially punched for tight
fitting rail joints.
3.12.2 Joint bar bolts shall conform to ASTM A449; nuts shall conform to
ASTM A563, Grade B. Alloy ,steel spring washers shall meet American
Railway Engineering Association (AREA) specifications.
3.12.3 Rail clamps shall be of pressed or forged steel.
3.12.4 Matefial fef efene Fail nts she" be Fail steel eF an appice-ved
Rpqg
alley steel having the sai::i.e.h.e.rdies and weef fesistaigee as Fail steel.
3.12.4 All rails shall have end faces ehemfefed. Raw! shall be end hafelened by
milled for tight joints. Rails shall
require special drilling for' use with tight joint splices.
3.12.5 No tack welding shall be permitted on crane rails.
3.13 Self-lubricating bearing pads, if required, shall be as manufactured by
Fluorocarbon, or Engineer approved equal.
3.14 Fabric reinforced neoprene bearing pads, if required, shall be as manufactured by
Fabreeka Products Co., or Engineer approved equal.
3.15 Miscellaneous items not specifically described, but required for completion of the
work shall, as nearly as practicable, be of standard types.
3.16 Material imperfections discovered after delivery of materials or during fabrication
may, at the Fabricator's option, be repaired as prescribed in .ASTM A6.
3.17 Materials which do not meet the tolerances set forth in ASTM A6 may, at the
Fabricator's option, be adjusted by him as specified in ASTM A6 using mechanical
means and/or the application of heat.
4. DESIGN AND DETAILING
4.1 Drawings furnished herewith are descriptive of requirements for the structural and
miscellaneous steel to be furnished hereunder, but do not attempt to describe all
design details. Such design and all detailing shall be provided by the Fabricator,
subject to the Engineer's review and to the following conditions:
4.1.1 Design performed by the Fabricator shall be accomplished by or under the
direction of a qualified professional engineer registered in the State of
California.
G:UiU11EU:6323\ WLDGUUSENC W -U11. DUC
•
•
SPECIFICATION FOR Project No.
ftVH NM Engineers & SUPPLY AND FABRICATION OF Spec. No.
Constructors STRUCTURAL AND MISCELLANEOUS STEEL Page 8 ' of 21
4.1.2 Work shall comply with the "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings",
"Code of Standard Practice","Manual of Steel Construction, ASD",
"Manual of Steel Construction", Volume II, Connections, ASD", "Detailing
for Steel Construction", and the "Engineering for Steel Construction"
manuals of AISC, the locally adopted building code and OSHA, unless
otherwise specified or indicated.
4.2 Work points on columns, beams, trusses and braces shall be concentric, where
connections of reasonable size and complexity are achievable. Work points for
deep beams, girders and deep columns may be moved to the top and bottom
flanges of the beams and girders and to the face of the columns in order to
simplify and reduce the size of the connection. In such situations, the connections
and members shall be designed for the secondary eccentric moments.
4.3 All substitutions by the Fabricator of sections and modifications of details, with
reasons therefor, shall be submitted with the Fabricator's shop drawings for the
Engineer's review. Substitutions of sections, or modifications, and resulting
changes in related portions of the work shall be made without increase in the price
of the work.
4.4 Connections
4.4.1 Design of connections not detailed on the Drawings shall be completed by
the Fabricator and detailed on the shop drawings. Complete calculations
for such connections shall be submitted with the Fabricator's shop
drawings for review by the Engineer.
4.4.2 Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, or shown on the Drawings,
shop connections shall be welded and field connections shall be bolted.
4.4.3 High strength bolting shall conform to the latest edition of the "Research
Council Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490
Bolts," as endorsed by AISC. Size of high-strength bolts shall be 3/4 inch
diameter (minimum) unless otherwise noted on the Drawings. All high-
strength bolts shall have one plain hardened washer under the turned
element (nut or bolt head). Bolts and nut threads shall be lubricated.
4.4.4 Field connections shall be made using high-strength bolts and Direct
Tension Indicators and shall be tensioned to the full pre -tension
requirements of the "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325
or A490 Bolts".
4.4.5 Field connections for secondary members, such as door, window and
louver frames, stairs, small free-standing platforms, ladders, handrails and
girts, may be bearing -type connections made with bolts conforming to
ASTM A307.
G:\HONEE\E6828\WLDGOOSE\CO5-OIT.DOC
•
•
•
SPECIFICATION FOR Project No. 77052.001
RayHWM Engineers & SUPPLY AND FABRICATION OF Spec. No. C05.01 T
Constructors STRUCTURAL AND MISCELLANEOUS STEEL Page 9 of 21
4.4.6 Minimum size of common bolts shall be 3/4 inch diameter, except for
those bolts used to secure stair treads to stringers. These bolts shall be
3/8 inch diameter..
4.4.7 Field connections for primary members (i.e., columns, struts, bracing,
beams and girders) shall be made with A325 Bolts. Unless shown
otherwise on the drawings, primary connections shall be bearing type
connections with threads not excluded from the shear plane. Bolts for
bearing connections shall be high-strength, 3/4 -inch diameter (minimum)
with one hardened washer and one Direct Tension Indicator.
4.4.8 Shear connections on beams and girders shall be standard AISC
connections for A325 Bolts unless special connections are required.
4.4.9 Where slip -critical connections are shown on the drawings, unless other
surface preparation is noted elsewhere, faying surfaces of connections
shall be assumed to have a Class "A" finish.
4.4.10 The minimum capacity of any framed beam connection shall be for the
number of A325 bolts shown in Table A with double angles of 5/16 -inch
thickness. Where design shear values exceed these capacities or when
tension is transferred through the connection, such that angle thickness or
bolt diameter must increase, the design loads will be shown on the design
Drawing for fabricator design or the connection will be detailed in its
entirety on the design Drawing.
Beam connections shall be furnished in accordance with Table II and III,
Framed Beam Connections, in the AISC Manual of Steel Construction,
Ninth Edition, using the number of rows for a given nominal beam depth
as shown in the following Table A.
Table A
W or M Shape
S Shane
Channel.
Rows
36
10
33
9
30
_ :
8
27,24
7
21
24
6
18
20,18
18
5
16
15
15
4
14,12
12
12
3
10,8
10,8
10,9,8
2
6,5
7,6,5
7,6,5
1
G: \HOME\E6828\WIDGOOSE\C05-01T. DOC
r�
U
SPECIFICATION FOR Project No.
ftVHMM Engineers & SUPPLY AND FABRICATION OF Spec. No.
Constructors STRUCTURAL AND MISCELLANEOUS STEEL Page 10 of 21
4.4.11 Connections of all truss members and bracing members which are
subjected primarily to tension and/or compression loads shall be designed
for the full capacity of the member in tension.
4.4.12 Connections for monorails and crane rails shall be designed to allow
adjustment in the field to meet the rail elevation and alignment tolerances
set forth in CMAA specifications No. 70 and No. 74. These specification
state that rail and/or running surfaces shall be set within one-eighth (1/8)
inch plus or minus in elevation and horizontal alignment.
4.4.13 Minimum field connections, except for lacing on stair stringers which may
have single -bolt connections, shall contain not less than two bolts.
4.4.14 Gussets at bracing connections shall be concentrically connected to both
adjacent members unless shown otherwise on the Drawings. If this is not
practical, the design shall account for the moment due to eccentric
loading.
4.4.15 All bracing member connections shall be designed for the loads shown on
the Drawings, but not less than the capacity of two (2) 3/4 inch diameter
A325 bolts in bearing type connections.
4.4.16 Material Test Reports for all structural and miscellaneous steel, bolts, nuts
and washers shall be forwarded to the Engineer prior to fabrication.
4.4.17 ASTM A325 nut rotation test results for mechanically galvanized bolts
and nuts shall be certified and forwarded to the Engineer prior to
delivery of bolts and nuts to the project site.
4.5 Gratin
4.5.1 Cutouts at columns and bracing gusset plates shall be detailed to clear the
column and gusset plates by 1/4 inches. At fireproofed columns the
grating shall be detailed to clear fireproofing by 1/4 inches.
4.5.2 Grating shall be anchored to each supporting member with at least two
anchoring devices. A minimum of four anchoring devices shall be provided
with each piece of grating. Anchoring devices shall be supplied with 5%
extra to cover losses. Grating shall be provided with stops to prevent any
section from slipping off of supporting steel. Anchors shall consist of 1/4
inch welded stud bolts with hexnut and galvanized steel "U" shaped clip
that fits over two bearing bars, or other proprietary anchorage devices as
approved by the Engineer, furnished by the steel fabricator.
04.5.3 Except as noted, banding bars shall be of the same cross section as the
bearing bars to which they are welded. Banding 'bars shall be provided as
follows:
U:Ui0Mh%kaHZH%WL1JUUUb u;w-urr.ixx;
•
•
SPECIFICATION FOR Project No. 77052.001
ftYHmmn Engineers & SUPPLY AND FABRICATION OF Spec. No. C05.01 T
Constructors STRUCTURAL AND MISCELLANEOUS STEEL Page 11 of 21
a. At open ends of grating, removable grating and their
corresponding openings, tops of ladders and approaches to
platforms. -At heads (tops) of stairs the grating shall receive
checkered plate nosing to match the stair tread nosing. 'At base
(bottoms) of stairs, the grating shall receive a band to match the
landing kickplate.
b. At grating panels with four or fewer cross bars.
C. At openings in grating for piping or similar penetrations in which
the dimensions of the opening perpendicular to the bearing bars
exceeds 4 inches. Openings for penetrations shown on the
Drawings shall. be cut and banded by the Fabricator. Grating
shall be split around the openings into easily removable sections:
Unless otherwise shown on the design Drawings, the openings
shall be banded with material matching the bearing bar and
extending 4 inches above the grating as shown on the Drawings.
d. Clear gaps greater than "or equal to 2 inches in openings around
wide flange columns shall be banded with bars extending 4
inches above the grating. Where these clear gaps are less than
2 inches, the banding shall extend 1 inch above the grating.
e. Grating subject to rolling loads shall be banded with material
matching the thickness of the bearing bars and 1/4 inches less
than the height of the bearing bars. Banding shall be flush with
the top of the bearing bars.
4.5.4 All grating warped during fabrication or galvanizing shall be straightened
prior to shipment. Each piece of grating, excluding stair treads, shall be
marked in the shop with a metal plate having raised letters. The plate shall
be continuously tack -welded to each piece prior to galvanizing.
4.6 Flooralate
4.6.1 Removable floorplate shall be attached to supporting steel with 1/2 -inch
diameter countersunk flat head, zinc plated, thread rolling tapping screws
conforming to SAE J81. The screws shall be spaced not more than 2
feet -6 inch on centers, with a minimum of four bolts per panel unless
otherwise shown on approved detail drawings. All other floorplates shall
be plug welded to supporting steel with 1/2 -inch diameter plug welds at
2 -feet spacing with a minimum of four welds per panel.
4.6.2 Each removable plate section shall be shop fabricated with two 1 -inch
diameter lifting holes located in opposite corners.
M; 10M, 0 :6:0,
0
•
SPECIFICATION FOR Project No.
RayHmmn Engineers & SUPPLY AND FABRICATION OF Spec. No.
Constructors STRUCTURAL AND MISCELLANEOUS STEEL Page 12 of 21
4.6.3 Holes in plate shall be cut in the shop and shall be provided with 1/4 -inch
kickplate projecting 4 inches above the floorplate. Removable floorplate
shall be split around all holes into easily removable sections.
4.7 Crane Rails
4.7.1 Horizontal sweep in crane rails shall not exceed 1/4 inch per 50 feet in
length of rail span. Camber shall not exceed +/-1/4 inch per 50 feet in
length.
4.7.2 Crane rails shall be so arranged that joints on opposite sides of the runway
will be staggered with respect to each other. Rail joints shall not occur at
crane girder joints. Rails shall be fastened by means of adjustable clamps
as shown on the Drawings. Clamps shall be spaced approximately three
feet on centers.
4.8 Safety Cable Holes
A 15/16 inch diameter hole shall be provided at the center of the web of each
column for attachment of a safety cable or or safety connector toggle. The hole
shall be located 3'-6" above the top of steel elevation for each floor level.
5. FABRICATION
5.1 General
5.1.1 Work shall be performed in conformance with the applicable portions of the
AISC Specification for Structural Steel Buildings and the AISC Code of
Standard Practice.
5.1.2 Fabrication tolerances shall conform to AISC Specification for Structural
Steel Buildings, the AISC Code of Standard Practice, AWS D1.1, and as
further defined on the Drawings or in these Specifications.
5.1.3 Material shall be fabricated and assembled in the shop to the greatest
practical extent.
5.1.4 Column sections shall be milled at splic3s, at tops of column cap
assemblies and on bottom of entire base assembly for full bearing on base
plates. Column sections shall be cut square°when base plates and splices
are to be welded.
5.1.5 Ladders shall be of the steel fixed -vertical type as detailed on the Drawings
including basket -guard -hoop -type safety cages. All splices and
connections shall have a smooth transition without projections that are
sharp or more extensive than required for joint strength. Provide safety
gates per the Drawings.
G:\HUMkAE6323\WLl)(iWJE\L;W-UI"1 AXA;
•
C7
SPECIFICATION FOR Project No. 77052.001
ftVHh em Engineers & SUPPLY AND FABRICATION OF Spec. No. C05.01 T
Constructors STRUCTURAL AND MISCELLANEOUS STEEL Page 13 of 21
5.1.6 Application of heat to materials shall be as specified in AWS D1.1.
5.1.7 Although the. use of the machine method for flame cutting of steel is
preferred, steel may be flame cut by hand. All flame cut surfaces shall
conform to the tolerances set forth in AWS D1.1.
5.2 Bolting
5.2.1 Bolting shall conform to the "Research Council Specification for Structural
Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts" and to applicable AISC
Standards and Specifications.
5.2.2 A325 bolts used for shop connections shall be tightened by the "turn of
the nut" method.
5.3 Welding
5.3.1 Welding shall be performed in accordance with AWS D1.1.
5.3.2 All welding procedures shall be prepared by the Fabricator and shall be
submitted to the Engineer for review and approval prior to fabrication.
5.3.3 All welders and tackers for the work described herein shall be qualified in
accordance with AWS D1.1. All inspectors used for visual weld inspection
shall be certified in accordance with the provisions of AWS QC1, Standard
for Qualification and Certification of Welding Inspectors. Personnel
performing nondestructive testing shall be qualified in accordance with the
current edition of American Society for Nondestructive Testing
Recommended Practice No. ASNT-TC1A, NDT Level II.
5.3.4 The Engineer reserves the right to require each welding operator to use a
stamp or mark to identify all work done by him.
5.3.5 Welding run-off tabs shall be cut off and ground smooth at the edge of the
finished member.
5.3.6 Tack welds which are not incorporated into the final weld shall be
removed and ground smooth.
5.3.7 Inadvertent arc strikes shall be removed by grinding.
5.4 In order to compensate for allowable camber or sweep in heavy rigid framing,
special shop techniques such as shop layout to working lines should be used.
I 5.5 Application of weldable studs shall be in accordance with manufacturer's printed
instructions.
G: UHOMElE6828 %WLDGOOSE\C05-01 T. DOC
•
•
SPECIFICATION FOR Project No. 77052.001
RayffWM Engineers & SUPPLY AND FABRICATION OF Spec. No. C05.01 T
Constructors STRUCTURAL AND MISCELLANEOUS STEEL Page 14 of 21
6. PAINTING
6.1 All steel surfaces shall be shop painted except as follows:
6.1.1 Steel members and portions of steel members to be embedded in or
bonded to concrete shall be protected with a solvent removable rust -proof
coating.
6.1.2 Field weld connections.
6.1.3 Items specified to be galvanized or cladsteel.
6.1.4 Milled or machined surfaces (protect with grease or other anti -rust
coating).
6.1.5 Rails, clamps and appurtenances.
6.2 Surface Preparation
6.2.1 All surfaces of structural and miscellaneous steel, including surfaces not to
be painted, except galvanized surfaces, shall be prepared in accordance
with SSPC-SP6 "Commercial Blast Cleaning." These surfaces shall be
thoroughly wiped down to remove all traces of grit or other contaminants
and solvent cleaned in accordance with SSPC-SP1 "Solvent Cleaning,"
prior to application of the prime coat. All steel surfaces shall be inspected
immediately prior to prime coat application to assure that no contamination
or rust is present.
6.2.2 Remove all weld splatter and grind smooth the burrs on any cut edges and
rough welds.
6.2.3 Surfaces to be painted shall be primed before any rusting can occur and, in
any case, within 24 hours of completion of surface preparation and under
controlled temperature and humidity. Any rust bloom shall be removed
before paint application by suitable hand or power tool cleaning methods.
6.3 Shop paint shall consist of one coat of modified alkyd rust -inhibitive primer.
6.3.1 The paint shall be Tnemec P10-99 Red as manufactured by the Tnemec
Company Inc. or an engineer approved equal.
6.3.2 Dry film thickness: 3 mils minimum.
6.3.3 Drying time to handle: 2 hours minimum.
• I 6.3.4 Acceptable colors: Manufacturer's standard colors.
(i: \MV Mh\COtSltS\ W1JJl� WJb\l; W -V 1 1. UVI:
•
C7
SPECIFICATION FOR Project No. 77052.001
RayHMWn Engineers & SUPPLY AND FABRICATION OF Spec. No. C05.01 T
Constructors STRUCTURAL AND MISCELLANEOUS STEEL Page 15 of 21
6.4 Application
6.4.1 Prime paint shall be applied in accordance with the SSPC-PA1 and with the
manufacturer's printed instruction. It shall be applied by spray, except that
touch-up may be done by brush. Temperature of steel and relative
humidity at time of painting shall be in accordance with the paint
manufacturer's instructions. Maintain steel surface temperature at least
5°F above the dew point. Measure the coatings DFT in accordance with
SSPC-PA2 with at least one spot gauge reading on each major face and
two other random readings on the other faces every five linear feet of each
prime coated structural steel shape.
6.4.2 All painting products and materials shall be delivered in original undamaged
and unopened containers bearing the manufacturer's name, brand, type
designation, date of manufacture and expiration date.
6.5 Protection
Material shall be kept from exposure to weather until it has been shop painted.
Steel shall be free from moisture, above freezing, and shall remain under cover
until paint has dried.
6.6 Finish Painting
Field touchup will. be performed by Erector..
6.7 Match Marking
Following shop painting or cleaning, each individual steel piece shall receive a
unique identification match or erection mark number. Match or erection marks
shall incorporate the erection sequence drawing numbers and be identical to those
appearing on the Fabricator's shop and erection drawings.
6.7.1 Mark the compass direction on the north or east face of all columns.
6.7.2 Beams and girders shall be marked such that the mark number reads right
side up on the left end of the piece. The left end is the mark numbered
end as shown on the erection drawing.
6.7.3 Each piece mark shall include the number of the shop drawing on which
the piece is detailed, and each column piece mark shall also include the
column designation appearing on the design Drawings.
6.7.4 Erector erected members weighing more than 10 tons and "leave out"
members weighing more than 3. tons shall have the weight marked
thereon.
G: UiOMEXE6823%WLOGOOSEAC05-OIT. DOC
•
0
SPECIFICATION FOR Project No. 77052.001
ftVHW 1 Engineers & SUPPLY AND FABRICATION OF Spec. No. C05.01 T
Constructors STRUCTURAL AND MISCELLANEOUS STEEL Page 16 of 21
6.7.5 All steel other than ASTM A 36 shall be clearly marked with its ASTM
Specification and heat number. Markings shall be legible through all steps
of fabrication and erection.
6.7.6 It is the Fabricator's responsibility to affix weather-proof and durable tags
or marks so they will remain attached and will be legible after normal
shipping, handling and a minimum field outdoor storage of two (2) years.
Tags shall have legible piece mark lettering a minimum of one (1) inch high
and shall not be closer than two inches to any field weld location.
7. GALVANIZED MATERIAL
7.1 All grating, stair treads, floorplate and metal decking shall be galvanized.
7.2 All steel surfaces shall be prepared in accordance with SSPC-SP8 "Pickling" or
SSPC-SP10 "Near -White Metal Blast Cleaning" immediately prior to galvanizing:
7.3 All galvanizing shall be hot -dipped in accordance with ASTM A 123 and ASTM
A385 modified as follows:
7.4 Galvanizing shall be done after completion of all cutting, tapping, drilling, forming,
punching and welding operations performed in the fabrication shop, but before any
assembly by bolting. Bolts, nuts and washers for attachment of galvanized
material shall be mechanically galvanized in accordance with ASTM B695 after all
threads have been rolled or cut. Flat sheets shall be galvanized in accordance with
ASTM A525. Contact surfaces of bolted connections shall be lightly scored by
hand wire brush or blasting after galvanizing and prior to assembly.
7.5 Steel assemblies fabricated by welding, which are to be hot -dip galvanized after
fabrication, shall be subject to the safeguards against warpage and distortion
during hot -dip galvanizing that are recommended in ASTM A384.
7.6 After galvanizing, steel shall be checked and straightened to as true an
alignment as is practical to attain, from any warpage,. bending, twisting or
distorting from the original without any injury to the galvanizing.
7.7 Material rejected by reason of defective coating shall have coating completely
removed in acid bath before re -dipping. If any defective material is found upon
receipt of material at destination, the Fabricator shall replace this material free of
charge FOB destination. Such replaced material shall be subject to inspection.
7.8 The Fabricator shall be responsible that all galvanized material is straight, marked,
and packed for shipment in accordance with this Specification.
• 7.9 All pieces shall be legibly stamped before galvanizing with piece marks shown on
the erection drawings, with the marking not less than one (1) inch high placed in
the same relative location on all pieces. The marking shall be plainly visible after
galvanizing.
(isU1UN1C\COiSlES\WLyCiVVJh\l:U�-U1l:llU(; '
•
40
U
SPECIFICATION FOR Project No. 77052.001
ftVHMM Engineers & SUPPLY AND FABRICATION OF Spec. No. C05.01 T
Constructors STRUCTURAL AND MISCELLANEOUS STEEL Page 17 of 21
8. INSPECTION
8.1 Materials supplied and work performed under this Specification may, at the
Engineer's option, be inspected in the shop and will be inspected in the field. The
Fabricator shall provide facilities for shop inspection, if requested by the Engineer,
at no additional cost.
8.2 The Engineer's Inspector shall be allowed access to all work performed by the
Fabricator which shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
* Identification of materials
* Certification of welders
* Verification of suitability of equipment
* Qualification or prequalification of welding procedures
* Visual inspection of work before, during and after fabrication
* Performance of individual welders
* Performance of nondestructive testing
8.3 Material or work not meeting the requirements specified herein, will be rejected
and shall be replaced at the Fabricator's expense. Where substandard welds
occur or improper materials or procedures are noted, nondestructive examination
shall be performed to determine the presence and extent of weld defects. The
cost of the nondestructive examinations and weld repairs shall be borne by the
Fabricator.
8.4 The Fabricator shall be responsible for all errors in detailing and fabrication and for
correct fitting and attachment of structural members.
8.5 All shop welding shall be 100% visually inspected by the Fabricator and
documented on inspection reports. The standard for visual acceptance shall be in
accordance with AWS D1.1. If, based on this standard, the weld is rejected, the
entire weld shall be gouged out for a distance equal to the length of the crack plus
two inches at each end of the crack, then rewelded, following accepted welding
procedures, at the Fabricator's expense. Such rewelding is subject to reinspection.
8.6 The cost of visual . weld inspection and non-destructive testing is to be a part of
the Fabricator's fabrication expense. If AWS qualified inspectors are not a part of
the Fabricator's Quality Control Program, an independent testing lab, employing
AWS QC1 certified Inspectors, shall be retained by Fabricator at the Fabricator's
expense. The Fabricator's inspectors shall not be involved in production work
while acting as an inspector.
8.7 All full penetration welds shall be 100% ultrasonically tested per tension weld
criteria of AWS D1.1, Section 6, Part C, using an ASNT-TC-1 A Level II Certified
nondestructive testing technician. Where shown on the Drawings, fillet and partial
penetration welds shall be magnetic particle inspected. Also, a minimum of 10%
of the remaining welds shall be selected for testing at the discretion of the
Engineer's Inspector. Where magnetic particle testing is impossible due to
construction configuration or inaccessibility, dye penetrant inspection may be used
with prior written approval of the Engineer's -inspector. Inspection shall be
performed in accordance with AWS D1.1.
(i: \kiOMEkE6SZ N %WLDtiOUSENC0S-U 3'1'.1)()(;
C�
•
SPECIFICATION FOR Project No.
ftyHMM Engineers & SUPPLY AND FABRICATION OF Spec. No. C05.01 T
Constructors STRUCTURAL AND MISCELLANEOUS STEEL Page 18 of 21
8.8 Reports of weld test results for the non-destructive examination program shall be
submitted to the Engineer's inspector for review after testing is completed.
8.9 Material test reports and certificates of conformance to the specification
requirements for all material to be incorporated in the work shall be made available
for inspection at the Fabricator's shop.
8.10 The Manufacturer shall be responsible for verification of each lot of Direct Tension
Indicators in accordance with the requirements of ASTM F959.
a. Direct tension indicators shall not be assembled to bolt/nut assemblies until
verification of each lot has been confirmed and are in conformance to the
specification.
8.11 The Subcontractor shall be responsible for procuring from the bolt
manufacturer or for performing Rotational Capacity Tests for assembled
galvanized high-strength bolts, nuts and washers as specified in ASTM A325
and ASTM A563 Supplementary Requirement S1.
a. Bolts, nuts and washer assemblies shall not be shipped to the job site until
the results of this test have been approved by the Engineer's Inspector.
9. AUTHORITY TO REJECT
The Engineer's Inspector shall have authority to reject all materials and workmanship not
conforming to the Drawings and/or specifications. Any defective material found during
the progress of the work shall be promptly replaced or corrected by the Fabricator to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
10. LIABILITY FOR DEFECTIVE MATERIAL
If the Engineer's Inspector, through oversight or otherwise, has accepted material or work
which is defective or contrary to these Specifications or design Drawings, this material,
no matter in what stage of completion, may be rejected by the Engineer.
The Engineer shall be notified before placing of mill orders and starting of fabrication.
11. PACKAGING AND SHIPPING
11.1 High-strength bolts, nuts, washers and load indicator washers shall be shipped to
the job site in sealed containers from the manufacturer. Different bolt diameters
and lengths shall be packaged separately. Containers shall be clearly marked to
show the heat or lot number and ASTM designation of the contained material.
11.2 Common bolts of one length and diameter, and one type, loose nuts of each size,
0 1 and flat and beveled hardened washers of each size shall be packaged separately.
G:\HOM U828\WL.DGOOSE\C05-O1T.DOC
•
•
0
SPECIFICATION FOR Project No.
RayKieoe Engineers & SUPPLY AND FABRICATION OF Spec. No. _ C05.01 T I
Constructors STRUCTURAL AND MISCELLANEOUS STEEL Page 19 of 21
11.3 Pins, small parts and small packages of bolts, flat and beveled hardened washers
and nuts shall be shipped in boxes, crates, kegs, or barrels, but the gross weight
of any package shall not exceed 300 pounds.
11.4 Particular attention must be paid to protecting bolts and nuts from moisture and
dirt.
11.5 A list and description of the contained material shall be plainly marked on n the
outside of each shipping container.
12. DOCUMENTATION
12.1 Documentation identifying the Fabricator as an AISC Certified Fabricator for
Category II - Complex Steel Building Structures shall be submitted to the Engineer
prior to the start of fabrication.
12.2 Welding Procedure Specifications and Certification of all welders, tackers and
inspectors that may be involved in the work shall be submitted to the Engineer
prior to the start of fabrication.
12.3 Shop and erection drawings, prepared by the Fabricator, shall be submitted to the
Engineer for review in accordance with the following:
12.3.1 Review drawings will be examined by the Engineer for general
arrangement, dimensions and suitability and returned . to the Fabricator
marked either "Reviewed/No Comment," "Reviewed/See Comments," or
"Revise per Comments and Resubmit for Review." Review by the
Engineer of the shop and erection drawings shall not be construed as a
complete check, but will indicate only that the general method of
construction and detailing is satisfactory. Review of such drawings shall
not relieve the Fabricator of the responsibility for any error which may
exist, and Fabricator shall be responsible for all dimensions, detail design,
and satisfactory fabrication of all work. Material shall not be fabricated or
delivered to the jobsite before Engineer's review of shop and erection
drawings has been completed and indicated revisions, if any, are made.
12.3.2 Drawings shall include all shop and erection details including cuts, copes,
connections, holes, bolts, and welds in structural steel. Drawings shall
show size, length, type and required nondestructive testing of all welds.
12.3.3 Where material is marked "HOLD" on the engineering Drawings, that
material shall not be detailed until the "HOLD" is removed by the
Engineer.
12.3.4 Prior to preparation of shop drawings, the Fabricator shall submit to the
Engineer for approval an erection and detailing sequence plan.
12.3.5 Before commencing detailing, the Fabricator shall submit for approval the
piece -mark system which shall comply, with the requirement of paragraph
G:\HOMEE6828\WLDG00SEkCO5-OIT.DOC
•
•
.7
SPECIFICATION FOR Project No.
ftVH NM Engineers & SUPPLY AND FABRICATION OF Spec. No.
Constructors STRUCTURAL AND MISCELLANEOUS STEEL Page 20 of 21
titled "Painting" which he proposes to use. To be approved by the
Engineer, the system must indicate the location of the piece within the
structure either in the piece -mark or with appropriate notation on the
detail sheet. The ' piece -mark shall also identify the sheet on which the
piece is detailed.
12 .3.6 A material list shall be included on each shop drawing. This list shall use
the same categories and units used in the (purchase document) for
payment purposes. The categories and quantities shall be subject to
confirmation by the .Engineer.
12.4 Material test reports and certificates of conformance to the specification
requirements shall be submitted to the Engineer for review in accordance with the
following:
12.4.1 Material test reports for structural steel shapes, plates and bars, structural
pipe, structural tubing, crane rail, etc. which have been ordered by the
Fabricator for use in the work shall be submitted to the Engineer for
review prior to fabrication.
12.4.2 Material test reports for miscellaneous stock structural material which the
Fabricator intends to use in the work shall be submitted to the Engineer
for review upon award of the contract.
12.4.3 Material test reports for all shop and field bolts, nuts, washers and load
indicator washers which the Fabricator furnishes for the work shall be
submitted to the Engineer for review prior to incorporation in the work or
shipment to the jobsite.
a. Material test reports of high strength bolts shall be in complete
conformance to the requirements of ASTM A325 and shall, as a
minimum, include the following:
" Manufacturer
" Chemical composition
* Hardness
* Tensile strength/proof load
b. Material test reports for nuts shall be in complete conformance
to the requirements of ASTM A563 and shall, as a minimum,
include the following:
LW .l h711:4,�!2Zt]1"ilW URk.1.1
* Manufacturer
" Chemical composition
* Hardness
* Tensile strength/proof load
•
C,
U
SPECIFICATION FOR Project No. 77052.001
Rayf wn Engineers & SUPPLY AND FABRICATION OF Spec. No. C05.01 T
Constructors STRUCTURAL AND MISCELLANEOUS STEEL Page 21 of 21
C. Material test reports for washers shall be . in complete
conformance to the requirements of ASTM F436 and shall, as a
minimum, include the following:
* Manufacturer
* Chemical composition
* Hardness
d. Material test reports for Direct Tension Indicators shall be in
complete conformance to the requirements of ASTM F959 and
shall, as a minimum, include the following:
* Manufacturer
* Bolt tension
* Average gap opening
e. Material test reports for common bolts, nuts and washers shall
be in complete conformance to the requirements of ASTM A307
and shall, as a minimum, include the following:
G: \HOME\E6828\WL.D000SE\C05-OLT.DOC
* Manufacturer
* Grade and chemical composition
* Hardness
* Tensile strength
* ASTM designation and grade of nut
* ASTM designation and grade of washer
•
.•
u
0
•
C7
Raytheon Engineers &
Constructors
CLIENT: Wild Goose Storage JOB/INQUIRY NO.: 77052.001
FACILITY: Wild Goose Gas Storage SPEC NO.: C05 -.03T
LOCATION: Butte County, California
SPECIFICATION
For
ERECTION OF STRUCTURAL AND MISCELLANEOUS STEEL
This title page is a record of all revisions of the specification. Each time the specification is changed,
only the new or revised pages are issued. For convenience, the nature of each revision is briefly noted
below.
REV. NO.
DATE
BY
CHECKED
APPROVAL
PAGES
NATURE OF REVISIONS
A
0
10/28/97
02/11/98
RVO
RVO
VV
All
For Client Review
Approved for Construction
Rev.
No.
LEAD LEAD
PROC MECH
LEAD LEAD LEAD LEAD LEAD LEAD
PIPE CIVIL STRUC ARCH ELEC I&C QA PEM PM CDE
CON
SUP
A
--
--
-- -- VV -- -- -- JRW 4EY -- R YA--
—
O--
--
-- -- Gi -- -- -- --
--
Distribution:
Per Project Distribution Matrix
•
•
•
SPECIFICATION FOR Project No: 77052.001
HayflWM Engineers & ERECTION OF Spec. No. C05.03T
Constructors STRUCTURAL & MISCELLANEOUS STEEL Page. i
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION
PAGE
1.
SCOPE..............................................................................................................
1
2.
WORK AND ITEMS FURNISHED BY CONTRACTOR .............................................
2
3.
APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS.............................................................................
2
4.
MATERIALS......................................................................................................
4
5.
RECEIVING AND STORAGE................................................................................
5
6.
STRUCTURAL STEEL ERECTION- GENERAL.......................................................
6
7.
BOLTED CONNECTIONS....................................................................................
7
8.
WELDED CONNECTIONS....................................................................................
8
9.
CRANE RAIL AND MONORAIL ERECTION............................................................
8
10.
MISCELLANEOUS STEEL ERECTION....................................................................
9
11.
FIELD TOUCHUP PAINTING...............................................................................
10
12.
ERRORS............................................................................................................
10
13.
SUBMITTALS....................................................................................................
11
14.
CLEANUP..........................................................................................................
11
15.
INSPECTION....................................................................................................
12
U:\NUMt\hbUZtf\W LUGU05t\Wb-03 T
•
C7
SPECIFICATION FOR Project No: 77052.001
RayKWM Engineers & ERECTION OF Spec. No. C05 -03T
Constructors STRUCTURAL & MISCELLANEOUS STEEL Page 1 of 12
1. SCOPE
1.1 This Specification governs the erection of structural and miscellaneous steel. Erection
includes furnishing labor, materials and equipment necessary to receive, unload, store,
remove from storage and erect steel in accordance with this Specification.
1.2 Structural and miscellaneous steel shall be fabricated and delivered by the Fabricator to
the Project site.
1.3 Structural and miscellaneous steel, grating, and associated materials shall be received,
unloaded, stored, protected, removed from storage, transported to the point of erection
and erected. Such items consist of, but are not limited to, the following:
1.3.1 Columns, beams, girders, trusses, girts, purlins, bracing, column base and
bearing plates, steel framing and accessory steel
1.3.2 Structural steel door, window and opening frames and lintels where indicated as
part of the work of this Contract.
1.3.3 All steel stairs, including stringers, treads, nosings, landings, bracing and struts.
1.3.4 Handrails and kick plates.
1.3.5 Metal ladders, safety cages, and gates.
1.3.6 Metal and/or fiberglass grating.
1.3.7 Crane rail, including joint bars, clamps, and stops.
1.3.8 Raised pattern floor plate.
1.3.9 Equipment supports and hangers.
1.3.10 Pipe and cable -tray support beams.
1.3.11 High strength and common bolted connections, including field bolts and shims.
1.3.12 Fabric reinforced neoprene or other proprietary bearing pads, bushings, etc.,
required in conjunction with the structural steel erection.
1.4 Column base plates and beam bearing plates shall be grouted as shown on the drawings
and in accordance with Project Specification B05.04T.
1.5 Subcontractor shall furnish the following:
1.5.1 Any high strength or common bolt fasteners (including washers, nuts, bolts,
Direct Tension Indicators). in excess of the 2% extra furnished by the Fabricator
that are required to complete the erection shall be furnished by the
G: \NUMt\t662ti\W LUGUU5LW0b-03T
•
•
•
SPECIFICATION FOR Project No. 77052.001
RaYffMM Engineers & ERECTION OF Spec. No. C05 -03T
. Constructors STRUCTURAL & MISCELLANEOUS STEEL Page 2 of 12
Subcontractor, at his expense, and shall conform to the requirements. of this
Specification.
1.5.2 Welding electrodes and supplies as required to complete field erection.
1.5.3 Weldable studs to complete assembly of members
1.5.4 Paint for repairing damaged/abraded ferrous surfaces
1.5.5 Labor, material and equipment required to grout all base plates.
1.5.6 Rigging tools, slings, shackles, etc., as required, to erect structural and
miscellaneous steel.
1.5.7 Non -shrink grout as per Project Specification B05.04T.
2. WORK AND ITEMS FURNISHED BY CONTRACTOR,
2.1 The Contractor will furnish the following materials, services and equipment:
2.1.1 Permanent survey monuments for horizontal and vertical control at locations
shown on the Drawings. The Subcontractor shall transfer working lines and
grades necessary for his operations.
2.1.2 Space for the Subcontractor's temporary buildings, storage of materials and
parking near the main plant area, as designated and approved by the Contractor.
2.1.3 Foundations, including anchor bolts and other embedments, in place by others.
2.2 The Fabricator shall prepare. shop and erection drawings. The Engineer's design
Drawings and the shop and erection drawings shall be furnished to the Subcontractor.
Work shall be performed in accordance with these drawings and this Specification. .
3. APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS
The latest editions of the following specifications, codes and standards, including revisions
and supplements in effect on May 1, 1997, forma part of this Specification in their entirety,
except as modified by this Specification.
3.1 American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC)
Manual of Steel Construction, ASD
Specification for Structural Steel Buildings
Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges
3.2 Research Council on Structural Connections.
Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts.
G: \HOME\E6828\ W LD G DOSE\C05-03T
•
•
SPECIFICATION FOR Project No: 77052.001
ftVffmm Engineers & ERECTION OF Spec. No. C05 -03T
Constructors STRUCTURAL & MISCELLANEOUS STEEL Page. 3 of 12
3.3 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
A36 Specification for Structural Steel.
A53 Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot -Dipped, Zinc -Coated Welded and
Seamless.
A90 Test Method for Weight of Coating on Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) Iron or Steel
Articles.
A108 Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold -Finished, Standard Quality.
A123 Specification for Zinc (Hot -Galvanized) Coatings on Products Fabricated from
Rolled, Pressed, and Forged' Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars and Strip.
A143 Practice for Safeguarding Against Embrittlement of Hot -Dip Galvanized
Structural Steel Products and Procedure for Detecting Embrittlement.
A153 Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware.
A307 Specification for Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners.
A325 Specification for High -Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints.
A384 Practice for Safeguarding Against Warpage and Distortion During Hot -Dip
Galvanizing of Steel Assemblies.
A385 Practice for Providing High -Quality Zinc Coatings (Hot -Dip).
A 446 Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot Dip
Process, Structural (Physical) Quality
A500 Specification for Cold -Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural
Tubing in Rounds and Shades.
A525 Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated
(Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process.
A563 Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts.
A569 Specification for Steel, Carbon , (0.15 Maximum Percent) Hot -Rolled Sheet
and Strip, Commercial Quality.
8695 Specification for Coating of Zinc Mechanically Deposited on Iron and +Steel.
E165 Practice for Liquid Penetrant Inspection Method.
E709 Practice for Magnetic Particle Examination.
G:\H0ME\E6828\W LDGOOSE\C05-03T
•
•
•
SPECIFICATION FOR Project No. 77052.001
ftVHW 1 Engineers & ERECTION OF Spec. No. C05 -03T
Constructors STRUCTURAL & MISCELLANEOUS STEEL Page. 4 of 12
F436 Specification for Hardened Steel Washers.
F959 Specification for Compressible -Washer -Type Direct Tension Indicators for
Use with Structural Fasteners.
3.4 American Welding Society (AWS)
D1.1 Structural Welding Code
3.5 Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC)
PA1 Shop, Field and Maintenance Painting
SP2 Hand Tool Cleaning
SP3 Power Tool Cleaning
SP7 Brush -Off Blast Cleaning
3.6 Crane Manufacturer's Association of America (CMAA)
CMAA Specification #70 and #74 - Specification for Electric Overhead Traveling
Cranes.
3.7 Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)
Title 29, Part 1910, Occupational Safety and Health Standards
Title 29, Part 1926, Construction Safety and Health Regulations.
3.8 Project Specifications
Grouting Specification for Equipment and Structural Support, Specification No.
B05.04T.
3.9 Should a conflict be found between the listed codes and standard and this
Specification and/or Project Drawings, the conflict shall be submitted to the Engineer
for resolution prior to proceeding with the affected work.
4. MATERIALS
4.1 The Subcontractor shall furnish the following materials
4.1.1 Welding electrodes for carbon steel materials shall have a 70,000 psi
minimum tensile strength and comply with Table 4.1, AWS D1.1.
4.1.2 Grout shall conform to the requirements of Grouting Specification for
Equipment and Structural Support, specification No. B05.04T and as
specified on the Drawings.
G:\HOME\E6828\WLDGOOSE\CO5-03T
0
•
•
RaWleen Engineers &
Constructors
SPECIFICATION FOR Project No.
ERECTION OF Spec. No. C05 -03T
STRUCTURAL & MISCELLANEOUS STEEL Page 5 of 12
4.2 Should the Subcontractor be required to furnish various materials, they shall conform
to the latest editions of the- specified codes, standards and regulations, as indicated,
and as specified herein.
4.2.1 Structural steel shapes and plates shall conform to ASTM A36.
4.2.2 Steel pipe for handrail shall conform to ASTM A53, Grade B.
4.2.3 High-strength bolts shall conform to ASTM A325, Type 1
4.2.4 Common bolts shall conform to ASTM A307, Grade A with heavy hex nuts
as required.
4.2.5 Nuts for A325 bolts shall conform to ASTM A563,. Grade DH.
4.2.6 Washers shall conform to ASTM F436.
4.2.7 Direct Tension Indicators shall be as manufactured by J&M Turner, Inc., or
Engineer approved equal, and shall conform to ASTM F959.
4.2.8 Weldable studs, 7/8 inch diameter and smaller, shall conform to ASTM
A108 and be "Nelson Studs" as manufactured by Nelson Stud Welding
Company, or Engineer approved equal.
4.2.9 Paint for touch-up of prime paint shall be the same as the shop applied
primer applied by the Fabricator
4.2.10 Paint for touch-up of galvanized steel shall be "Galvanox Type 1 " as
manufactured by Subox Division of Carboline Company or an Engineer
approved substitute.
5. RECEIVING AND STORAGE
The Subcontractor shall furnish labor, equipment and materials to unload and place in storage
the deliveries of structural steel and miscellaneous steel.
5.1 A visual inspection of delivered materials shall be performed by the Subcontractor
prior to unloading. Any damage shall be brought to the attention of and
acknowledged by the Fabricator's delivery agent prior to unloading and the Contractor
shall be advised of the damage in writing.
5.2 Bills of Lading shall be checked as materials are unloaded. Shortages shall be
acknowledged by the Fabricator's delivery agent's initials on the Bill of Lading and the
Contractor advised in writing. No claims will be allowed the Subcontractor for material
shortages or damages unless the Subcontractor so notifies the Contractor, in writing,
within two weeks after receipt of the materials.
GAH0ME\E6828\W LDGOOSE\C05-03T
•
•
is
RayHKWn Engineers &
Constructors
SPECIFICATION FOR Project No:
ERECTION OF Spec. No. C05 -03T
STRUCTURAL & MISCELLANEOUS STEEL Page 6. of 12
5.3 The materials shall be handled and stored in a manner that will: preclude physical
damage, reduce coating damage, water -holding pockets and surface contamination.
5.4 The inventory control shall include, in addition to the materials, the storage. location of
the material.
5.5 Unloading operations shall be performed with minimum delay. Any cost of demurrage
resulting from the Subcontractor's neglect to unload materials promptly shall be the
expense of the Subcontractor.
6. . STRUCTURAL STEEL ERECTION - GENERAL
The Subcontractor shall furnish labor, equipment and materials, including erection bolts,
welding electrodes, drift. pins, etc., for removal from storage and erecting of structural and
miscellaneous steel. Erection shall comply with the following and the requirements of the
applicable publications unless otherwise specified or noted on the Drawings.
6.1 Erection shall be in accordance with "Approved for Construction" Drawings and
Fabricator's "Certified for Construction" shop and erection drawings and the AISC
"Manual of Steel Construction," including the "Specification for Structural Steel
Buildings," and the "Code of Standard Practice," unless otherwise specified or noted
on the approved Drawings.
6.2 Splicing of compression members shall be done after the abutting surfaces have been
brought into contact. Bearing surfaces shall be cleaned with burrs removed prior to
assembly.
6.3. No connections or splices shall be made in the field except where shown on the
approved drawings or as otherwise approved by the Engineer.
6.4 Base and bearing plates shall be supported and aligned on steel wedges and shims.
After the supported members have been properly positioned and the anchor nuts
tightened, the entire area under the plate will be grouted in accordance with "Grouting
Specification for Equipment and Structural Support", Specification No. B05.04T.
Wedges and shims shall be cut-off flush with edges of the column base or bearing
plates where required'to achieve a neat appearance.
6.5 The Subcontractor shall furnish and install all temporary bracing and/or guying
required to enable the members and structure to resist seismic, wind, dead load, or
other loads imposed on the incomplete structure including such bracing as may be
shown on the design or erection drawings.
6.6 No bolting, other than temporary or for fit -up, or welding shall be performed until as
much of the structure as will be stiffened thereby has been properly aligned and
plumbed to comply with the tolerances of AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel
Buildings and Bridges.
6.7 The Work shall be securely bolted or welded to support all dead, live, wind or erection
loads prior to removal of temporary bracing or guys.
G: %M V Mh%hb62tl\ W LUG UUSt\GOb-03I
•
•
is
RaVKMWn Engineers &
Constructors
7. BOLTED CONNECTIONS
SPECIFICATION FOR Project No.
ERECTION OF Spec. No. C05 -03T
STRUCTURAL & MISCELLANEOUS STEEL Page 7 of 12
7.1 Unless welded connections *are shown on approved drawings or otherwise approved
by the Engineer, all field connections shall be bolted.
7.2 Field connections for secondary members, such as stairs, ladders, handrails and girts,
may be bearing -type connections made with "common or regular bolts" conforming to
ASTM A307. "Common or regular bolts" shall be tightened to a "snug -tight"
condition. "Snug -tight" shall be defined as the full effort of a man using an ordinary
"spud" wrench.
7.3 Field connections. for primary connections shall be bearing type connections. All high-
strength bolts shall have one plain hardened washer under the turned element (nut or
bolt head).A hardened beveled washer shall be used where the outer face of the
bolted parts has a slope greater than 1:20.
7.3.1 Bearing connections: High strength bolts shall be installed in a standard
sized hole and shall be tensioned to the full pre -tension requirements of the
"Specifications for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts."
7.3.2 Direct Tension Indicators shall be used under the non -turning part of the
connection.
7.3.3 Prior to tightening bolts, all plies of the connection shall be drawn into firm
contact. Tightening of bolts shall progress from the most rigid part of the
connection to its free edges.
7.3.4 Provided that the above procedure has been followed, the control of
tightening of high-strength bolts shall be as follows:
The clamping force shall have caused the protrusions of the Direct Tension
Indicators to partially flatten and thus reduce the gap between the Direct
Tension Indicators and the surface of the bolt -nut assembly to the prescribed
measurement as established by the Manufacturer.
7.4 If a connection is shown on the drawings to be slip -critical, bolts shall be installed as
follows:
7.4.1 Slip -critical connections are designed for a class "A" surface condition. High
strength bolts shall be installed in standard or over -sized holes, and shall be
tensioned to the full pre -tension requirements of the "Specifications for
Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts."
7.4.2 Direct Tension Indicators shall be used under the non -turning part of the
connection..
7.4.3 Hardened washer shall be used under the turned part of the connection.
G AH O ME\E6828\W LDGOOSE\C05-03T
C]
•
SPECIFICATION FOR Project No: 77052.001
-ftYHMM Engineers & ERECTION OF Spec. No. C05 -03T
Constructors STRUCTURAL & MISCELLANEOUS STEEL Page 8 . of 12
7.4.4 Prior to tightening bolts, all plies of the connection shall be drawn into firm
contact. Tightening of bolts shall progress from the most rigid part of the
connection to its free edges.
7.4.5 Provided that the above procedure has been followed, the control of
tightening of high-strength bolts shall be as follows:
The clamping force shall have caused the protrusions of the Direct Tension
Indicators to partially flatten and thus reduce the gap. between the Direct
Tension Indicators and the surface of the bolt -nut assembly to the prescribed
measurement as established by the Manufacturer.
7.5 The installation of all high-strength bolts shall be supervised and inspected by an
inspector retained by the Contractor. Inspection shall be as specified in Paragraph 16,
"Inspection." In the event bolting operations or in-place bolts do not meet
specifications, corrections shall be made by the Subcontractor as directed by the
Engineer.
7.6 Drift pins may be used to bring parts into alignment, but shall not be used in a manner
which will distort or damage the structural steel. Gas cutting shall not be used to
enlarge holes. Suitable reaming devices shall be used if minor enlargement of holes is
necessary.
WELDED CONNECTIONS
8.1 Field welding shall not be permitted unless shown on the approved drawings, or
directed in writing by the Engineer.
8.2 Where welding or tacking is required, it shall be performed by welders or tackers who
are qualified in accordance with the requirements of AWS "Structural Welding Code"
D1.1 and have passed such qualification tests within the six (6) months prior to start
of erection work.
8.3 Prior to use of any welder or tacker on the work, the Subcontractor shall submit
legible reproductions of the qualification test report(s) for each welder or tacker for
each class of work to be done in accordance with the governing code(s). Two (2)
copies of each welder qualification report shall be delivered. to the Contractor.
8.4 Welding shall be performed in accordance with the approved drawings, the AWS
"Structural Welding Code" D1.1 and the requirements set forth in the AISC
"Specification for Structural Steel Buildings."
9. CRANE RAIL AND MONORAIL ERECTION
Crane rails shall be installed straight, parallel and level at the elevations shown on the
• Drawings. Tolerances shall be as set forth in CMAA Specification No. 70 and No. 74. Vertical
and horizontal variations shall not exceed plus or minus (±) one-eighth (1/8) inch.
•
•
•
SPECIFICATION FOR Project No:
ftWh em Engineers & ERECTION OF Spec. No. C05 -03T
Constructors STRUCTURAL & MISCELLANEOUS STEEL Page - 9 of 12
10. MISCELLANEOUS STEEL ERECTION
10.1 Holes for pipes passing through the grating, which are not provided in the fabricator's
shop, shall be cut and banded in the field in accordance with field measurements of
the pipes in place. Field cut openings 10 inches in diameter or 12 inches in diagonal
or larger shall be banded with 5-1/4 by 1/4 inch plate with 4 inch projection above the
top of grating. Smaller openings shall be banded with 2-1/4' by 3/16 inch bar with 1
inch projection above the top of grating. All field cut grating shall be cleaned and
have any damaged galvanizing repaired by using "Galvanox Type 1 ", including
banding.
10.2 Holes for pipes shall clear the pipe, or pipe insulation, by not less than one (1) inch or
more than 1-1 /2 inches, except that the arrangement shall allow for the displacement
of pipes due to their expansion or contraction without contact between the grating
and pipe or pipe insulation.
10.3 Grating panels shall be anchored to supporting members as shown on the approved
drawings. Anchors shall consist of 1/4 inch welded stud bolts with hexnut and steel
clip, furnished by the steel fabricator, or other proprietary anchorage devices as
approved by the Engineer.
10.4 Grating panels shall be attached with a minimum of four clips. Extra clips shall be
installed as required to provide a smooth walking surface without vertical offsets
exceeding 1/8 inch at adjacent panels.
10.5 Removable floor plate shall be attached to supporting steel with 1/2 inch diameter
countersunk flat head, zinc plated, thread rolling tapping screws conforming to SAE
J81. The screws shall be spaced not more than 2 feet 6 inches on centers, with a
minimum of four bolts per panel unless otherwise shown on approved drawings. All
other floor plate shall be plug welded to supporting steel with 1/2 inch diameter plug
welds at 2 feet spacing with a minimum of four welds per panel. All plug -welded
floor plate shall be cleaned and have any damaged galvanizing repaired by using
"Galvanox Type 1."
10.6 Adjacent floor plate panels or floor plate panels adjacent to other types of walking
surfaces shall be installed in such a manner as to ensure that no more than 1/8 inch
difference in height shall exist between the adjoining surfaces. This may be
accomplished by straightening the floor plate panels and/or by adding additional bolts
(in the case of removable floor plate) or welds.
10.7 Handrail and posts shall be installed in accordance with approved drawings.
G: \H O ME\E6t32ti\ W LU G 005E\C05-03T
•
•
•
SPECIFICATION FOR Project No: 77052.001
Rayl'IMM Engineers & ERECTION OF Spec. No. C05 -03T
Constructors STRUCTURAL & MISCELLANEOUS STEEL Page 10 of 12
11. FIELD TOUCHUP PAINTING
11.1 The Subcontractor shall perform field touch-up painting for the erected steel as
follows:
11.1.1 Scarred or abraded shop primed surfaces.
11.1.2 Areas left unprimed by the Fabricator for field welding operations.
11.1.3 Shop applied primer damaged by field welding.
11.1.4 Field installed bolted connections for exterior steel. Painting of bolted
connections made in the field shall not commence until after the bolts have
been tightened, inspected and approved by the Contractor's inspector.
11.1.5 Galvanized surfaces that have been abraded, field cut, or damaged by field
welding.
1.1.2 Ferrous surfaces specified above shall be prepared in accordance with SSPC-SP3 "file:
3 "Power Tool Cleaning."
11.3 The Subcontractor shall communicate with the Fabricator to ensure that the touch-up
primer is the same paint as the shop primer.
11.4 Application and curing of paint shall be in strict accordance with the Manufacturer's
instructions and SSPC-PA1. A minimum of one coat of primer shall be applied to the
prepared surfaces.
11.5 Prepared areas of galvanized materials shall be coated with a minimum of two coats
of "Galvanox Type 1 " as, manufactured by the Subox Division of the Carboline
Chemical Company. Galvanox shall be applied in accordance with the Manufacturer's
recommendations.
12. ERRORS
12.1 Errors in detailing and/or fabrication or deformation caused by improper handling,
which prevent proper assembly, shall be reported immediately to the Contractor. All
field corrections or modifications to main members such as rigid frames, bracing,
beams, girders, and columns shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
Corrections or modifications to secondary members shall be coordinated with the
Engineer prior to being made by the Subcontractor.
12.1.1 In general, corrective actions will be one of the following:
a. The Fabricator will make the corrections if such corrections will not
adversely affect the Project schedule.
G AHO ME\E6828\W LDGOOSE\C05-03T
is
.7
•
SPECIFICATION FOR Project No.
ftVHvem Engineers & ERECTION OF, Spec. No. C05 -03T
Constructors STRUCTURAL & MISCELLANEOUS STEEL Page. 11 of 12
b. The Subcontractor shall make the corrections after consulting with the
Fabricator.
12.1.2 Use of gas cutting for correction of errors shall be permitted only when
approved by the Engineer.
12.2 Work that is not in conformance to this Specification or damage to materials resulting
from actions of the Subcontractor in the performance of the Work shall be corrected,
at the expense of the Subcontractor as directed by the Engineer. The Subcontractor
shall notify the Contractor in writing of such damage or non-conformance.
13. SUBMITTALS
13.1 In addition to the inspection reports and welder's qualification reports to be submitted
to the Contractor by the Subcontractor, two copies of the following documentation
shall also be submitted to the Contractor as soon as possible and prior to erection or
use of materials delivered by the Fabricator.
13.1.1 Material Received Reports
13.1.2 Overage - Shortage - Damage Reports
13.1.3 Fabrication Error Reports
13.1.4 Fabricator's Certification and Material Test Reports, submitted with each
delivery
13.2 Prior to final inspections and acceptance by the Contractor or his representative, the
Subcontractor shall submit to the Contractor four copies of a certificate of
conformance to this Specification.
14. CLEANUP
14.1 Upon completion of erection and prior to the Contractor's final acceptance of the
Work or any portion of the Work, the Subcontractor shall remove all falsework, debris,
rubbish and unused materials furnished by the Subcontractor from his Work areas and
the Project or from the Work area if acceptance is for a portion of the Work.
Disposal of the above shall be at the Subcontractor's expense.
14.2 The Subcontractor shall leave his Work areas neat and clean and subject to approval
of the Contractor so that subsequent construction can proceed.
14.3 The Subcontractor shall, in addition to the above, dispose of unused material
furnished by the Contractor as directed by the Contractor. Such material is not to be
removed from the Project site unless directed by the Contractor.
G:\HOME\E6828\WLDGOOSE\CO5-03T
•
•
•
SPECIFICATION FOR Project No: 77052.001
itayHWM Engineers & ERECTION OF Spec. No. C05 -03T
Constructors STRUCTURAL & MISCELLANEOUS STEEL Page 12 of 12
15. INSPECTION
15.1 Throughout all periods of erection, the Contractor or his representatives may inspect
portions or components of the erected structures. The Subcontractor shall provide
access for him, and shall provide cooperation and assistance as may be requested.
15.2 The installation of high-strength bolts will be supervised and inspected by an inspector
retained by the Contractor. The Subcontractor shall provide required labor, safe
access and work space for the proper testing and inspection of all bolted connections.
15.3 Inspection of bearing type high-strength bolted connections will be made by visually
inspecting the connection to insure that the plies of the connection are in firm contact
and that the protrusions of each Direct Tension Indicator have been flattened to the
proper extent.
15.4 Inspection of slip -critical high-strength bolted connections, if required, will be made by
checking the average gap of each Direct Tension Indicator of the assembly with a
feeler gage. The feeler gage will be used as a "No -Go" inspection tool. If the gage
does not enter the gap, but a gap is evident, the installation will be considered
satisfactory.
15.5 All field welding shall be 100 % visually inspected by the Subcontractor and
documented on inspection reports. The standard for.visual acceptance shall be in
accordance with AWS D1.1. If, based on this standard, the weld is rejected, the
entire weld shall be gouged out for a distance equal to the length of the crack plus
two inches at each end of the crack, then rewelded, following accepted welding
procedures, at the Subcontractor's expense. Such rewelding is subject to
reinspection.
15.6 The cost of visual weld inspection and non-destructive testing is to be a part of the
Subcontractor's expense. If AWS qualified inspectors are not a part of the
Subcontractor's Quality Control Program, an independent testing lab, employing AWS
QC1 certified inspectors, shall be retained by Subcontractor at the Subcontractor's
expense. The Subcontractor's inspectors shall not be involved in production work
while acting as an inspector.
15.7 All full penetration field welds shall be 100 % ultrasonically tested per tension weld
criteria of AWS D1.1, Section 6, Part C, using an ASNT-TC-1 A Level II Certified
nondestructive testing technician. Where shown on the Drawings, fillet and partial
penetration field welds shall be magnetic particle inspected. Also, a minimum of 10%
of the remaining field welds shall be selected for testing at the discretion of the
Engineer's Inspector. Where magnetic particle testing is impossible due to
construction configuration or inaccessibility, dye penetrant inspection may be used
with prior written approval of the Engineer's Inspector. Inspection shall be performed
in accordance with AWS D1.1.
15.8 Reports of weld test results for the non-destructive examination program shall be
submitted to the Engineer's Inspector for review after testing is completed.
G:\HOME\E6828\WLDGOOSE\CO5-03T
0 .
..
J
u
�J
•
•
Raytheon Engineers &
0 Constructors
a
�7-
CLIENT: Wild Goose Storage JOB/INQUIRY NO.: 77052.001
FACILITY: Wild Goose Gas Storage SPEC NO.: B05.04T
LOCATION: Butte County, California
GROUTING SPECIFICATION
For
EQUIPMENT AND STRUCTURAL SUPPORT
This title page is a record of all revisions of the specification. Each time the specification is changed, only the new
or revised pages are issued. For convenience, the nature of each revision is briefly noted below.
REV. NO.
DATE
BY
CHECKED
APPROVAL
PAGES
NATURE OF REVISIONS
A
.0
10/16/97
1012?1g7
RVO
VV
All
All
For Client Review
Approved for Construction
Rev.
No.
LEAD
PROC
LEAD
MECH
LEAD
PIPE
LEAD LEAD LEAD
CIVIL STRUC ARCH
LEAD
ELEC
LEAD
I&C
QA
PEM PM
CDE
CON
SUP
A
--
RWM
EGD
-- VV --
--
--
JR
JE --
RVO
--
0
--
EG0
-- --
--
--
a --
--
Distribution:
Per Project Distribution Matrix
•
•
GROUTING SPECIFICATION Project No.
RayKIL4m Engineers & FOR Spec. No.
Constructors EQUIPMENT AND STRUCTURAL SUPPORT Page :
77052.001
B05.04T
i
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION
Page
1.
SCOPE...............................................................................................
1
2.
CODES AND STANDARDS..................................................................
1
3.
MATERIALS.......................................................................................
2
4.
EPDXY GROUT........................................................................:..........
2
5.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, HANDLING AND SUBMITTALS ...........................
3
6.
PROPORTIONING AND MIXING............................................................
3
7.
USE AND LOCATION..........................................................................
5
8.
PREPARATION FOR INSTALLATION.....................................................
5
9.
PLACING - NONSHRINK AND DRY -PACK GROUT ..................................
7
10.
PLACING - EPDXY GROUT..................................................................
8
11.
FINISHING, CURING AND PROTECTING ................................................
8
12.
SAMPLING AND TESTING....................................................................10
•
•
is
GROUTING SPECIFICATION Project No. 77052.001
ftVHMM Engineers & FOR Spec. No. B05.04T
Constructors EQUIPMENT AND STRUCTURAL SUPPORT Page. 1 of 10
1. SCOPE
This Specification shall govern the furnishing, storing and installing of grout. The work
may include but not be limited to the following:
Grouting steel column base plates, equipment bases and sleeved anchor bolts.
Grouting anchor bolts, reinforcing bars and dowels into existing concrete.
2. CODES AND STANDARDS
The latest editions of the following codes, specifications, standards and publications with
applicable supplements and revisions thereto in effect on May 1, 1997 form a part of this
Specification by reference as if published in full content.
2.1. American Society for Testing and Materials Standards (ASTM)
C31 Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field
C109 Test for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using
2 -inch or 50 -mm cube specimens)
C150 Specification for Portland Cement
C191 Time of Setting of Hydraulic Cement
C404 Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Grout
C827 Early Volume Change of Cementitious Materials
C881 Specification For Epoxy -Resin -Base Bonding Systems for Concrete
C882 Standard Test Method for Bond Strength of Epoxy -Resin Systems Used
with Concrete
C1090 Test Method for Measuring Changes in Height of Cylindrical Specimens
from Hydraulic Cement Grout
C1107 Packaged Dry, Hydraulic -Cement Grout (nonshrink)
2.2. American Concrete Institute Design Standards (ACI)
ACI 347 Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork
•
•
•
Rayff>teM Engineers &
Constructors
3. MATERIALS
3.1. Cement
GROUTING SPECIFICATION Project No. 7.7052.001
FOR Spec. No. B05.04T
EQUIPMENT AND STRUCTURAL SUPPORT Page. 2 of 10
Cement shall be an approved brand of Portland cement conforming to ASTM
C150, and shall be Type V, low alkali. Alkali content shall not exceed 0.60
percent as measured by the percent of sodium oxide plus 0.658 times the
percent of potassium oxide. Only one brand of cement shall be used throughout
the work.
3.2. Aggregate
Fine aggregate for use in sand -cement dry -pack grout shall conform to the
requirements of ASTM C404 and shall be natural fine aggregate, size No. 2. Size
No. 1 having a fineness modulus between 2.6 and 3.0 may be used when
approved by the Owner.
3.3. Water
Water shall be clean and potable.
3.4. Nonshrink Grout
3.4.1. Nonshrink grout shall be a commercially available factory -premixed material
which is composed primarily of portland cement and natural mineral
aggregates. Grout mix that contains corrosive iron, aluminum, expansive
cement, gypsum or gas forming agents will not be acceptable. The grout
shall be nonshrink when tested in accordance with ASTM C827 and ASTM
C1090 and shall conform to ASTM C1107, Grade C. It shall have an initial
setting time of not less than 45 minutes when tested in accordance with
ASTM C191. The manufacturers recommendations for mixing and placing
must be printed on the outside of each bag. The grout must not require
vertical confinement or capping.
3.4.2. Nonshrink grout shall show
plastic or hardened state,
hardened state.
4. EPDXY GROUT
no vertical shrinkage (0.0%) in either the
and a maximum expansion of 0.3% in the
4.1. Epoxy grout shall be a two -component, 100 percent solids, 100 percent reactive,
moisture insensitive epoxy -resin system. Grout shall conform to ASTM C881
standard for Type IV, Grade 3, epoxy resin adhesives. Epoxy grout shall be
"Sikadur 31, Hi -Mod Gel" for vertical and overhead application and "Sikadur 32,
Hi -Mod for horizontal application, both as manufactured by Sika Chemical
Corporation, or Engineer approved equal.
•
•
0
GROUTING SPECIFICATION Project No. 77052.001
Rai Hmm Engineers & FOR Spec. No. 1305.04T
Constructors EQUIPMENT AND STRUCTURAL SUPPORT Page. 3 of 10
5. DELIVERY, STORAGE, HANDLING AND SUBMITTALS
5.1. Materials shall be delivered in the original packaging, clearly labeled with the
manufacturer's name, kind and name of product, batch number, date and place of
manufacture and instructions of use.
5.2. Nonshrink cement -based grout and epoxy grout aggregate shall be delivered in
sound dry bags and epoxy grout liquid components in sealed containers. Grout
shall be stored in a dry, weatherproof area and within the temperature range
recommended by the .manufacturer.
5.3. Any material which becomes damp or otherwise defective shall be immediately
removed from the site and disposed of at no expense to Owner.
6. PROPORTIONING AND MIXING
6.1. Nonshrink Grout
6.1.1. Grout shall be prepared in strict accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations. Mixing shall be with a mechanical mortar mixer. Hand
mixing will not be permitted. Grout shall be mixed as near as possible to
the location being grouted.
6.1.2. The grout components shall be conditioned for 24 hours prior to mixing to
the temperature specified by the grout manufacturer to produce the best
results.
6.1.3. Water shall be accurately measured or weighed and shall be added slowly
to assure efficient mixing and to obtain the desired consistency. Mixing
shall be continued for a minimum of 5 minutes after adding the water, or
longer if necessary to obtain uniform consistency throughout the batch.
For locations where the grout must be flowed into place, additional water
may be used in batching, but not in excess of the maximum amount
recommended by the manufacturer. Mixing water having a temperature
above 80°F shall not be used.
6.1.4. Grout batches shall be limited to quantities that can be placed in
15 minutes. Retempering shall not be allowed. Grout that has stiffened
due to delay in placing shall be discarded.
6.1.5. The cured grout shall develop a minimum compressive strength of 3000 psi
at 7 days, and 5000 psi at 28 days. Specimens shall be molded, cured and
tested in accordance with ASTM C109.
•
•
GROUTING SPECIFICATION Project No. 77052:001
ftVHMM Engineers & FOR Spec. No. B05.04T
Constructors EQUIPMENT AND STRUCTURAL SUPPORT' Page. 4 of 10
6.2. Sand -Cement Dry -Pack Grout
6.2.1. Unless otherwise specified by 'the equipment manufacturer,, his field
erection supervisor, or by the Engineer, dry -pack grout shall consist of two
parts sand to one part Portland cement. The surface -dry sand and cement
shall be thoroughly mixed for at least three minutes in a mechanical mortar
mixer having a capacity of not more than 2 cubic feet. The dry -mixed
material shall then be placed in a mixing box having sufficient area to hold
the material in a loose thickness of not more than 4 inches. Water shall be
added slowly to bring the mix to a uniformly dark color. The wetted grout
shall be mixed manually for not less than 5 minutes. Small amounts of
water shall be added until the consistency described below is attained.
6.2.2. Dry -pack grout shall contain only enough water so that a sample squeezed
in the hand will form a cast which will retain its shape when the hand is
opened. When broken, the cast shall break clean with no powdering or
crumbling. If water can be squeezed from the sample or, if during the test,
the palm of the hand becomes more than slightly moist, the mix shall be
considered too wet for use.. Likewise, the mix shall be considered too wet
for use if it becomes more than slightly rubbery as it is being 'compacted.
At the proper consistency, the mix when solidly packed shall be just below
the point of being rubbery.
6.2.3. Grout batches shall be limited to quantities that can be used within 20
minutes. Grout shall not be retempered. Grout which has attained its
initial set, or which, has contained its mixing water for more than 30
minutes, shall not be used.
6.2.4. Test samples of grout shall be two-inch cubes. Grout shall develop
compressive strengths of 3000 psi at 7 days and 5000 psi at 28 days.
Samples shall be compacted similar to field compaction and cured in
accordance with Section 7.3 of ASTM C31. Compressive testing shall be
in accordance with ASTM C109.
6.3. Evoxy Grout
6.3.1. Proportioning and mixing of epoxy grout shall be in strict accordance with
the manufacturer's instructions.
6.3.2. Grout shall develop, a minimum compressive strength of 5000 psi at 24 hr.
and 10,000 psi at 28 days.
6.3.3. Grout shall meet the test requirements of ASTM C881 and C882. `
rI
is
•
. GROUTING SPECIFICATION Project No. 77052.001
ftVHlem Engineers & FOR Spec. No. 1305.04T
Constructors EQUIPMENT AND STRUCTURAL SUPPORT Page. 5 of 10
7. USE AND LOCATION
7.1. Unless modified by equipment manufacturer's recommendations, grouting for sole
plates, jacking plates and other similar devices for equipment shall be
accomplished using nonshrink grout.
7.2. Grouting of machinery, pumps, compressors and other equipment having dynamic
operating forces shall be in strict compliance with the equipment manufacturer's
recommendations. If the equipment manufacturer's recommendations are not
available, such machinery and equipment shall be grouted with nonshrink grout.
7.3. Grouting for tanks and vessels may be flowable nonshrink or dry -pack grout as
approved by the Engineer.
7.4. Column base plates having shear lugs, and column base plates to which access is
limited, shall be grouted with nonshrink grout. Where accessible and without
shear lugs, column base plates may be grouted with dry -pack grout.
7.5. Epoxy grout shall be used for anchoring reinforcing bars, dowels and anchor bolts
into existing concrete.
7.6. The Contractor shall obtain the Engineer's approval for specific grout applications
other than above.
8. PREPARATION FOR INSTALLATION
8.1. Preoaration of Surfaces
8.1.1. Concrete Surfaces
a. All concrete surfaces which will be in contact with grout for
column base plates and equipment bases, shall be chipped as
necessary to remove all laitance, unsound concrete, oil or grease
stained concrete, and shall be roughened to provide for good
bonding. The 'resulting concrete surface shall be free of dust or
loose particles with the aggregate exposed.
b. Concrete surfaces prepared as in (a) above which will be in contact
with grout, other than epoxy grout, shall be saturated with water
and kept constantly wet by means of water -soaked burlap, fog
spray, or other approved means, for a period of not less than 24
hours prior to placement of grout. During placement 'of grout, the
wetted concrete surfaces which will be in contact with grout shall
be kept wet, but free from excess water.
•
•
•
GROUTING SPECIFICATION Project No. 77052.001
ftVH M Engineers & FOR I Spec. No. B05.04T
Constructors EQUIPMENT AND STRUCTURAL SUPPORT Page. 6 of 10
C. When recommended by the grout manufacturer, concrete surfaces
shall be warmed or cooled to temperatures specified for best
results.
8.1.2. Metal Surfaces
a. Metal surfaces which will be in contact with nonshrink or dry -pack
grout shall be cleaned of oil, grease, dust and loose material and
shall be at temperatures specified.
b. Reinforcing bars, dowels and anchor bolts, which are to be epoxy
grouted, shall be sandblasted to white metal and shall be clean, dry
and at temperatures specified.
8.1.3. Holes in Concrete
Holes drilled in hardened concrete for epoxy grouting of anchor bolts,
reinforcing bars and dowels shall be drilled with a rotary impact drill to a
diameter 1/8 inch greater than the item to be installed in the hole. The
hole shall be cleaned with water to remove concrete dust and then dried.
Do not use compressed air to dry the hole unless it is oil -free air. The hole
shall be clean and dry prior to introduction of the epoxy.
8.1.4. Annular Space at Anchor Bolt Sleeve
Cast in place anchor bolts will often be provided with pipe sleeves to
facilitate some adjustment of the bolt. The sleeve shall be carefully
cleaned of all debris, dried and protected from the entry of any foreign
material until the equipment or base plate is in place. The pipe sleeve shall
be grouted prior to grouting the equipment or base plate.
8.1.5. Forms
a. Forms, for flowable grout shall conform to the grout manufacturer's
recommendations. The method of forming shall permit rapid and
complete filling of the space to be grouted, and shall keep the grout
in full contact with the underside of the base plate until the grout
has hardened. Forms shall be strong, tight, and braced -such that
they will not leak or buckle under the weight of the flowable grout.
On the side where grout is to be placed, at least 6 inches shall be
allowed for the head of grout; the form shall be slanted at a 45
degree angle and the grout shall be placed directly on the slanted
face. On all other sides, the Contractor shall provide not less than 2
inches for the head of grout. Forms shall be caulked to prevent
leakage and loss of head. Forms shall be treated with an approved
wax or oil before grout placement to prevent bonding to the grout.
•
•
. GROUTING SPECIFICATION Project No. 77052:001
ftWham Engineers & FOR Spec. No. I305.04T
Constructors EQUIPMENT AND STRUCTURAL SUPPORT Page. 7 of 10
b. Forms for dry -pack grout shall be sturdy, strong, and shall be
installed in accordance with ACI 347.. Forms shall be firmly
anchored to resist displacement while ramming the grout.
9. PLACING - NONSHRINK AND DRY -PACK GROUT
9.1. General
Unless otherwise permitted by the grout manufacturer and approved by the
Engineer, grout shall not be placed when the temperature at the foundation, base
plates, equipment or grout is below 40°F or above 90°F. When necessary,
temperatures shall be established and maintained by use of heated enclosures or
by the use of sunshades, fans, water sprinkling, water soaked burlap or other
Engineer approved methods. In no event shall grout be placed at a higher or
lower temperature than the grout manufacturer recommends.
Grout shall not be placed until the item to be grouted is in final position and
fastened. Items of equipment and columns shall have been brought to proper
elevation and alignment, leveled or plumbed as applicable, and anchor bolts
tightened.
9.2. Nonshrink Grouting
9.2.1. Grout shall be poured from one side only to avoid entrapping air. Provisions
shall be made in advance to relieve entrapped air from beneath foundation
plates.
9.2.2. Grout shall be placed quickly and continuously to avoid undesirable effects
of overworking, which results in segregation, bleeding and disturbing initial
set.
9.2.3. Doubled pieces of flexible steel strapping shall be used for rodding the
grout beneath the base plate. The strapping shall be moved slowly back
and forth to help flow the grout into place and to assure that air
entrapment is minimized.
9.2.4. Unless permitted by the manufacturer grout shall not be vibrated. Adjacent
operating machinery, if any, shall be shut down until the grout takes its
initial set.
9.2.5. As placing progresses and the space becomes filled with grout, measures
shall be taken to keep the grout in full contact with the underside of the
base plate until the grout has hardened. A 6 -inch head shall be maintained
in the form by the use of additional grout or by Weighting the grout.
•
C7
LJ
RaVHWM Engineers &
Constructors
GROUTING SPECIFICATION Project No. 77052.001
FOR Spec. No. B05.04T
EQUIPMENT AND STRUCTURAL SUPPORT Page 8 of 10
9.2.6. For large base plates, the grout may be placed using standpipes or a grout
pump through center holes. Continuous flow of the grout under this
pressure grouting method is imperative; and air relief holes shall be
provided at the high point of each section. Prior to commencing the
grouting, the Contractor shall obtain from the Engineer written approval of
the grouting procedure.
9.3. Dry -Pack Grouting
9.3.1. Bonding Coat
Immediately before commencing dry -packing, all free water shall be
removed and accessible grouting surfaces of the concrete foundation shall
be brush coated with a slurry of Portland cement. The dry -packing shall
then be accomplished before the brush coat dries.
9.3.2. Packing
Packing under base plates shall be done by backing up one side of the open
space and placing the mortar from the other side. The dry -pack grout shall
be placed by hand. Each addition shall be rammed into place using suitable
hardwood rams and hammer. When the space between the base plate and
foundation has been filled, the backing block shall be removed and the face
of the grout rammed from the opposite side. Caution shall be exercised to
avoid trying to ram too large a quantity of grout into place at one time,
resulting'in a porous pack.
10. PLACING - EPDXY GROUT
Application of epoxy, grout shall be in strict conformance to the manufacturer's
recommendations. Surfaces to be exposed to the epoxy shall be clean, dry and sound
before application.
11. FINISHING, CURING AND PROTECTING
11.1. Edge Finish
11.1.1. Nonshrink grout
Nonshrink grout shall be finished in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations. Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer or shown
on the drawings, excess grout shall be removed and cut back to
terminate with a 45 degree chamfer.
•
•
GROUTING SPECIFICATION Project No. 77052:001
RayliWM Engineers & . FOR Spec. No. B05.04T
Constructors EQUIPMENT AND STRUCTURAL SUPPORT Page 9 of 10
11.1.2. Dry -Pack Grout ,
After the grout has taken some set, but before dry spots appear, the
grout shall have loose and excess grout trimmed away, and' a fresh
dry -pack grout worked into the surfaces and along edges. The grout
shall form a slope of approximately 45 'degrees such that the top of the
slope is at the bottom edge of the base plate or equipment foundation.
11.1.3. Epoxy Grout
Areas shall be cleaned of excess grout and troweled or ground to a
smooth finish to match the surrounding concrete.
11.2. Curing and Protection
During the curing period, grouted equipment shall not be operated nor shall
grouted base plates of structural steel be subjected to lateral forces.
1 1.2.1. Nonshrink Grout
.Grout - shall be cured in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations. Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, the grout
shall be cured for a minimum of seven days at temperatures of 50°F to
80°F. ,
11.2.2. -Dry -Pack Grout
After finishing and before dry spots appear, dry -pack grout shall be cured
by ponded water or wet burlap and maintained at temperatures of 50°F
to 80°F for at least seven days.
11.2.3. Epoxy Grout
Epoxy grout shall be cured in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
0
•
0
GROUTING SPECIFICATION Project No. 77052:001
RaVflwm Engineers & FOR Spec. No. BO .04T
Constructors EQUIPMENT AND STRUCTURAL SUPPORT Page - 10 of 10
12. SAMPLING AND TESTING
12.1. Testing Agency
12.1.1. Throughout periods of grouting, the sampling and testing necessary to
verify suitability of materials and the grout mixture, and adequacy of the
in-place grout, will be determined by the Owner's testing laboratory.
12.1.2. The Contractor shall permit the Owner's testing personnel unrestricted
access to delivered or stored materials and to batching and mixing
facilities. The Contractor shall provide such cooperation and assistance
as may be required.
12.1.3. The Owner's sampling and testing representatives will report test results
together with their recommendations for acceptance or rejection, and
their recommendations for improvement or corrective measures to the
Engineer.
12.2. Sampling and Testing Methods
12.2.1. The Owner's testing representatives will recommend to the Engineer for
his approval, the kinds of tests and the frequency of sampling and testing
required. for adequate quality control of the grouting.
12.2.2. As a minimum, the following test shall be conducted for nonshrink grout.
12.2.3. Compressive strength shall be tested according to ASTM C109.
12.2.4. Plastic shrinkage shall be tested according'to'ASTM C827.
12.2.5. Hardened shrinkage and expansion shall be tested according to ASTM
C 1090.
12.2.6. Initial setting time shall be tested according to ASTM C191.1.
i
•
E
C.
Raytheon Engineers &
Constructors
CLIENT: Wild Goose Storage
FACILITY: Wild Goose Gas Storage
LOCATION: Butte County, California
JOB/INQUIRY NO.: 77052.001
SPEC NO.: B08.01T
SPECIFICATION
For
SAMPLING, TESTING AND CONSTRUCTION CONTROL
OF CONCRETE, EARTHWORK AND STRUCTURAL STEEL
This title page is a record of all revisions of the specification. Each time the specification is
changed, only the new or revised pages are issued. For convenience, the nature of each
revision is briefly noted below.
REV. NO.
DATE
BY
CHECKED
APPROVAL
PAGES
NATURE OF REVISIONS
A
0
10/29/97
11113197
VV
RVO
All
All
For Client Review
Approved for Construction
Rev.
No.
LEAD
PROC
LEAD
MECH
LEAD
PIPE
LEAD
CIVIL
LEAD
STRUC
LEAD
ARCH
LEAD
ELEC
LEAD
I&C
0A
•PEM
PM
CDE
CON
SUP
A
--
EGD
--
VV
--
--
--
JR
JEY
JEY
RVO
--
0
--
--
--
--
--
--
Distribution:
Per Project Distribution Matrix
•
•
•
Rayfheon Engineers & SPECIFICATION FOR SAMPLING, Project No. 77052.001
Constructors TESTING AND CONSTRUCTION CONTROL OF Spec. No. B08.01 T
CONCRETE, EARTHWORK & STRUCTURAL STEEL Page i
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION
PAGE
1. SCOPE .............. :..................................... ................................................... 1
2. REFERENCES AND STANDARDS................................................................. 3
3. TESTING AND INSPECTION - CONCRETE ..................................................... 3
4. TESTING AND INSPECTION - EARTHWORK ................................................. 7
5. TESTING AND INSPECTION - STRUCTURAL STEEL ....................................... 8
6. DOCUMENTATION...................................................................................... 11
:U1UM.t\tOiSitS\WLD000JtWUZS-UI LUUC
•
C7
6ayftoe En&eerS & SPECIFICATION FOR SAMPLING, TESTING Project No. 77052.001
AND CONSTRUCTION CONTROL OF Spec. No. B08.01T
Constructors CONCRETE, EARTHWORK & STRUCTURAL STEEL Page 1 of 10
1. SCOPE
The intent of this Specification is to describe the engineering services and work required to
perform sampling, testing and inspection of concrete materials, mix designs, concrete,
earthwork materials and earthwork and to perform inspection and testing for structural steel
erection.
1.1 Description of the Work
The Testing Subcontractor awarded the work shall serve as the sampling, testing, and
inspection agent for the Owner and will be under the direct supervision of the
Construction Manager, performing all sampling, testing and inspection as herein
specified and as required by the Engineer or. the Construction Manager to maintain
quality control of work performed by others in construction of the Project. As part of
accomplishing the foregoing functions, the Testing Subcontractor shall:
1.1.1 Provide and maintain laboratory and office facilities adequate for meeting
the testing needs of the Project, including peak periods of construction.
1.1.2 Provide and maintain during actual periods of sampling and testing, in the
Testing Subcontractor's home office or jobsite field laboratory, a
professional engineer registered in the State of California to supervise all
technicians or personnel performing sampling, testing and inspection.
1.1.3 Provide at the jobsite, during the actual period of sampling and testing,
sufficient properly qualified and suitably equipped personnel to accomplish,
without delays in construction, all necessary sampling, field testing and
inspection.
1.1.4 Assume full responsibility for taking, caring for, storing and transporting
samples and test cylinders.
1.1.5 Determine suitability of the concrete mix designs submitted by the
Contractors and, as directed by the Construction Manager.
1.1.6 Perform the following:
a. Sampling and testing of concrete aggregates, fibrous reinforcement,
cement, admixtures and curing agents as necessary to determine
compliance of materials with specification requirements.
b. Slump testing of concrete as discharged from transport vehicles.
C. Determining unit weight of concrete as discharged from transport
vehicles.
d. Monitoring temperature of delivered concrete during 'hot and cold
weather in accordance with ACI 305 and ACI 306.
G:\IiOME\E6828\YaDGOOSE\BO8-OIT.DOC
is
Rayffieon En&eers & SPECIFICATION FOR SAMPLING, TESTING Project No. 77052.001
Constructors AND CONSTRUCTION CONTROL OF Spec. No. B08.01T
CONCRETE, EARTHWORK & STRUCTURAL STEEL Page 2 of 10
e. Determining air content of concrete as discharged from. transport
vehicles.
f. Making, curing and strength testing of concrete test cylinders.
g. Making curing and strength testing of grout test samples.
h. Gradation analysis and classification of soil samples.
i. Moisture -Density Relationship tests to determine optimum density and
moisture content of soils and/or sands and gravels.
j. Determine in-place density and moisture content of compacted soils.
k. Verification testing of direct tension indicators.
I. Measure tension in tightened high strength bolts (A325) by means of a
Skidmore -Wilhelm device.
M. Verification testing of high strength bolt/nut assemblies.
n. Inspection of high strength bolts, nuts,and washers as specified herein.
o. Inspect installed high strength bolts and direct tension indicators.
1.1.7 Recommend to the Construction Manager applicable measures, methods,
etc., which are necessary to correct deficient work of other Contractors.
1.1.8 Submit reports as specified herein.
1.1.9 Furnish all labor, tools, equipment and supplies for accomplishing the
foregoing.
1.2 Engineering Drawings and'Soecifications
1.2.1 The Construction Manager will furnish engineering drawings and
specifications to the Testing Subcontractor awarded the work hereunder.
These documents will be furnished at various intervals throughout the
performance of the work of this service agreement.
1.2.2 These documents, which define the construction work to be performed by
others at the project site, shall be used by the Testing Subcontractor only
as reference material.
G: \x0MEXE6828\YaDG0QShW08-01 r.uvc
•
C7
•
Raytheon Engineers& SAMPLING TESTING AND Project No. 76839.003
Constructors CONSTRUCTION CONTROL OF Spec. No. B08.01 T
CONCRETE, EARTHWORK & STRUCTURAL STEEL Page 3 of 12
1.2.2. These documents, which define the construction work to be. performed by
others at the project site, shall be used by the Testing Subcontractor only
as reference material.
2. REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
2.1. The following Codes and Standards, of the issues in effect on September 1,
1997, form a part of this Specification to the extent indicated by the references
thereto:
American Concrete Institute (ACI)
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
Research Council on Structural Connections (RCSC)
American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC)
2.2. Should a conflict be found to exist between any applicable portion of the
referenced codes and standards and these Specifications, the conflict shall be
submitted to the Construction Manager for resolution before proceeding with the
affected work.
3. TESTING AND INSPECTION - CONCRETE
3.1. Testing Materials for Concrete Work
3.1.1. Materials shall be inspected, sampled and tested by the Testing
Subcontractor in accordance with the requirements of the specification
under which each material is furnished. Applicable test methods and
frequency of sampling and testing shall be compatible with and include
the following:
* Test shall be run only when directed in writing by the Construction Manager.
* * The complete test may be run once at the start of the Project and/or if there is a
change in the source of aggregate. The complete test will not be run if the aggregate
source has been tested and certified by the supplier. Visual inspection, sieve analysis
and material finer than No. 200 tests will be conducted at least once a month or more
frequently as directed by the Construction Manager.
GAH0ME\E6828\LL&E\B08-01 T.DOC
Frequency of
Applicable
Sampling and
Results
Material
Test Method
Testin
Required
Cement
ASTM C150
Compliance w/spec
Concrete Aggregates
ASTM C33
* *
Compliance w/spec
Membrane -Forming
ASTM C309
*
Compliance w/spec
Curing Compounds
Air Entraining
ASTM C260
Compliance w/spec
Admixtures
Water Reducing
ASTM C494
Compliance w/spec
Admixture
Type A
* Test shall be run only when directed in writing by the Construction Manager.
* * The complete test may be run once at the start of the Project and/or if there is a
change in the source of aggregate. The complete test will not be run if the aggregate
source has been tested and certified by the supplier. Visual inspection, sieve analysis
and material finer than No. 200 tests will be conducted at least once a month or more
frequently as directed by the Construction Manager.
GAH0ME\E6828\LL&E\B08-01 T.DOC
•
C7
•
BayHMn En&eerS & SPECIFICATION FOR SAMPLING, TESTING Project No. 77052.001
Constructors AND CONSTRUCTION CONTROL OF Spec. No. B08.01T
CONCRETE, EARTHWORK & STRUCTURAL STEEL Page 4 of 10
3.1.2 The Construction Manager reserves the right to direct the Testing
Subcontractor to sample and test at a greater frequency than that specified.
3.2 Concrete Inspection, Sampling and Testing
The Testing Subcontractor shall perform the inspection, sampling and testing of
concrete as specified herein. Each technician performing such inspection shall serve as
the Construction Manager's representative and shall certify on the delivery ticket, or
other report, the acceptance or rejection of each load of concrete. Rejected concrete
shall not be placed in the work.
3.2.1 Visual Inspection
Each batch of concrete shall be visually inspected at point of discharge from the
transport vehicle. The delivery ticket for each batch shall be checked to insure
that the concrete being delivered is the proper class for the intended use as
required by the drawings and specifications.
3.2.2 Slump Test.
The first batch of each class of concrete produced each day and at least every
50 cubic yards delivered thereafter shall be sampled and tested in accordance
with ASTM C143 "Test for Slump of Portland Cement Concrete."
3.2.3 Entrained Air Content of Concrete
The first batch of each class of concrete produced each day and at least every
50 cubic yards delivered thereafter shall be tested in accordance with ASTM
C231 "Test for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure
Method."
3.2.4 Temperature
The temperature of all concrete sampled shall be determined and recorded.
3.3 Reiection of Concrete
3.3.1 Any concrete which does not meet the requirement of its Class as set forth
in its specification when tested as specified in Paragraph 3.B.(1), 3.B.(2),
3.B.(3), or 3.B.(4), above shall be rejected.
3.3.2 Any concrete which has not been discharged from the delivery vehicle
within 1-1/2 hours after batching shall be rejected except during periods of
hot weather as defined by ACI 305, the time limit shall be 45 minutes or
commencement of initial set, whichever occurs first.
3.3.3 The Testing Subcontractor shall immediately notify the Construction
Manager when any concrete is rejected.
G:\HOME\E6828\Va.DGOOSE\B08-01 T. DOC
•
•
LJ
RaVibeoe En&eers & SPECIFICATION FOR SAMPLING, TESTING Project No. 77052.001
Constructors AND CONSTRUCTION CONTROL OF Spec. No. B08.01T
CONCRETE, EARTHWORK & STRUCTURAL STEEL Page 5 of 10
3.4 Strength Tests During the Work
3.4.1 The Testing Subcontractor shall perform strength tests of the concrete
following ASTM C172, ASTM C31 and ASTM C39. Slump, air content,
temperature and unit weight shall be determined for each sample of
concrete which is to be used for a strength test.
3.4.2 A strength test shall consist of the average of two cylinders from the
same sample tested at the same age. A set of cylinders for strength
testing shall consist of 5 cylinders with one cylinder being designated as a
spare to be used in place of a defective cylinder at either the seven or the
twenty-eight day test.
3.4.3 Strength tests of cylinders aged 7 days and 28 days shall be recorded
throughout the duration of the work for each day concrete is poured for
the following quantities of each class of concrete placed.
Placement
Less than 25 cu yd per day
Less than 150 cu yd per day
For each additional 150 cu yd
or fraction thereof
For each 5000 sq ft of surface
area of slabs or walls
No. of Tests
Construction Manager may waive test
requirement
One set of cylinders for testing at 7 and
28 days
One set of cylinders for
testing at 7 and 28 days
One set of cylinders for
testing at 7 and 28 days
Minimum number of strength tests shall be as per ACI 318 Paragraphs 5.6.1.2
and 5.6.1.3.
3.4.4 Additional tests may be requested by the Construction Manager to verify
adequacy of curing and protection of concrete or to verify strength of
concrete to permit early stripping of forms. As a minimum, for each 500
cu. yards of each class of concrete placed in a day, two cylinders shall be
molded and cured under field conditions for testing at 7 days and 28 days.
3.4.5 The Testing Subcontractor shall notify the Construction Manager
immediately by telephone or in person and submit written recommendations
for corrective action within 24 hours when a strength test indicates any of
the following:
r • \HnMF.\FhA2R\WI .nC;nnSF\ROA_Ol T
C�
•
is
Bayftmn En&eers & SPECIFICATION FOR SAMPLING, TESTING Project No. 77052.001
AND CONSTRUCTION CONTROL OF Spec. No. B08.01T
Constructors CONCRETE, EARTHWORK & STRUCTURAL STEEL Page 6 of 10
a. The 28 -day strength of any test is less than the specified strength (f,').
b. The strength of cylinders tested to verify curing and protection
methods is less than 85% of companion laboratory cured cylinders.
3.4.6 Since seven day strength tests give an indication of the twenty-eight day
strength the Testing Subcontractor shall notify the Construction Manager
immediately by phone or in person when seven day strength tests fall below
the°following percentage of the specified 28 -day strengths:
Cement Type Percent
3.5 Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores
Where the results of the strength tests of the test specimens indicate that the
concrete as placed does not meet specified strength requirements, or where, in the
opinion of the Construction Manager, there is other evidence that the quality of the
concrete is below specification requirements, the Construction Manager may direct the
Testing Subcontractor to obtain and test drilled cores in accordance with ASTM C42.
Results of tests on drilled cores shall be entered in and shall become a part of Testing
Subcontractor's weekly test reports subrnitted to the Construction Manager.
3.6 . Grouting Inspection, Sampling and Testing
The Testing Subcontractor shall perform the inspection, sampling and testing of grout
placement as specified herein to verify the suitability of materials, grout mixture and
adequacy of the in-place grout.
3.6.1 The Testing Subcontractor shall recommend to the Construction Manager
for his approval, the kinds of tests and the frequency of sampling and
testing required for adequate quality control of the grouting. As a minimum
the following tests shall be conducted for nonshrink grout:
a. Compressive strength shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C109.
b. Plastic shrinkage shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C827.
C. Hardened shrinkage shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C1090. .
d. Initial setting time shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C191.
GAHOME\E6828\WLDGOOSE\B08-01T. DOC
70
II
60
III
80
IV
50
V
60
3.5 Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores
Where the results of the strength tests of the test specimens indicate that the
concrete as placed does not meet specified strength requirements, or where, in the
opinion of the Construction Manager, there is other evidence that the quality of the
concrete is below specification requirements, the Construction Manager may direct the
Testing Subcontractor to obtain and test drilled cores in accordance with ASTM C42.
Results of tests on drilled cores shall be entered in and shall become a part of Testing
Subcontractor's weekly test reports subrnitted to the Construction Manager.
3.6 . Grouting Inspection, Sampling and Testing
The Testing Subcontractor shall perform the inspection, sampling and testing of grout
placement as specified herein to verify the suitability of materials, grout mixture and
adequacy of the in-place grout.
3.6.1 The Testing Subcontractor shall recommend to the Construction Manager
for his approval, the kinds of tests and the frequency of sampling and
testing required for adequate quality control of the grouting. As a minimum
the following tests shall be conducted for nonshrink grout:
a. Compressive strength shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C109.
b. Plastic shrinkage shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C827.
C. Hardened shrinkage shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C1090. .
d. Initial setting time shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C191.
GAHOME\E6828\WLDGOOSE\B08-01T. DOC
C�
•
�ayfheon En&eerS & SPECIFICATION FOR SAMPLING, TESTING Project No. 77052.001
Constructors AND CONSTRUCTION CONTROL OF Spec. No. B08.01T
CONCRETE, EARTHWORK & STRUCTURAL STEEL Page 7 of 10
3.6.2 The Testing Subcontractor shall report test results, recommendations for
acceptance of rejection and recommendations for improvement or
corrective measures to the Construction Manager.
4. TESTING AND INSPECTION - EARTHWORK
4.1 Soils Sampling and Testing
Testing to Determine Suitability of Earthwork Materials
The Testing Subcontractor shall, as directed by the Construction Manager, determine
the suitability of earthwork materials to be furnished and used on the Project site.
These tests, performed in sufficient quantity and frequency to determine that
suitability is being met or maintained, shall include, but not necessarily be limited to:
determination of liquid -limit and plasticity index in accordance with ASTM C117 and
ASTM C136, and abrasion and soundness according to ASTM C131, ASTM C535
and ASTM C88. Moisture -density relations shall be determined in accordance with
ASTM D698, ASTM D1557, ASTM D4253 or ASTM D4254 as required. Definitions
of suitable materials shall be as specified in the project Soil Report, project
specifications and shown on the engineering drawings which will be furnished to the
Testing Subcontractor for the work of this sampling and testing service agreement.
4.2 Inspection to Determine Suitability of Exposed Soil Strata for Its Intended Use
The Testing Subcontractor shall inspect all excavations for structures and pipe
and all subgrade preparation to determine that the proper soils strata has been
exposed and that the material exposed is satisfactory for its intended use as
shown on the drawings. When any non-conformance is observed it shall be
reported to the Construction Manager. The frequency and location of such
inspections shall be included in the weekly reports submitted by the Testing
Subcontractor to the Construction Manager.
4.3 Construction Control Testing and Inspection
4.3.1 During periods of the earthwork operation when material is being placed in
a structural fill, backfill sub -base or any other area where a compaction
requirement is shown on the drawing, or stated in the specification, the
Testing Subcontractor shall perform in place density tests on the material
that has been placed. The frequency of testing shall be as directed by the
Construction Manager but sufficient tests shall be taken to insure that the
equipment being used, and the procedures being employed, result in the
required compaction. As a minimum, density tests shall be performed
every 200 sq. yards of each layer of compacted fill placed for each major
foundation.
4.3.2 The Testing Subcontractor shall observe and' inspect the fill material to
insure compliance with the specification.
tj:u UrAh% bZISNWw(jL)USPUsoe-ot1A)VU
•
.7
Rayfton En&eerS & SPECIFICATION FOR SAMPLING, TESTING Project No. 77052.001
Constructors CONCRETE,
CONSTRUCTION CONTROL OF Spec. No. B08.01 T
CONCRETE, EARTHWORK & STRUCTURAL STEEL Page 8 of 10
4.3.3 The Testing Subcontractor shall observe the fill placement procedure to
insure that there is no deviation from the established procedure which is
known to produce the desired results.
4.3.4 Field (in-place) density test of compacted materials shall be performed in
accordance with ASTM D 1556, ASTM D2167 or ASTM D 2922 (nuclear
method).
5. TESTING AND INSPECTION - STRUCTURAL STEEL
5.1 Testing of Direct Tension Indicators
The Testing Subcontractor shall be responsible for field testing each lot of Direct
Tension Indicators (Load Indicator Washers) that will be used in the installation of
high strength bolts for field connections of the structural steel.
5.1.1 The Testing Subcontractor shall test three (3) washers from each lot for
each bolt diameter in a Skidmore -Wilhelm device to ascertain that the load
indicator washer, when installed in the same manner as they will be
installed in the structure, will result in a bolt tension 5% greater than the
required proof load of the bolt when the gap has been closed to the
measurement specified by the manufacturer of the load indicating washer.
5.1.2 Impact wrenches shall be set to tighten the bolt and flatten the protrusions
on the load indicator washer to the specified measurement in ten seconds
or less after the wrench begins to impact.
5.2 Inspection of High Strength Bolts and Nuts
The Testing Subcontractor shall inspect each .shipment of high strength bolt, nut
and washer assemblies.
5.2.1 The Testing Subcontractor shall ascertain that all certification and test.
documentation as required by the project specifications has accompanied
the shipment and that the documents are applicable and traceable to the
particular shipment.
5.2.2 The Testing Subcontractor shall ascertain that all high strength bolts have.
been properly packaged for shipment and that the bolts and nuts are
lubricated in accordance with the specification requirements.
5.2.3 The Testing Subcontractor shall be prepared to perform rotational capacity
tests on bolt assemblies, as required by ASTM A325, if required for field
verification.
U; MVWLMcvocol"iuvvvaz�vo-v, 1.uvi
s•
Raytheon En&eerS & SPECIFICATION FOR SAMPLING, TESTING Project No. 77052.001
Constructors AND CONSTRUCTION CONTROL OF • Spec. No. B08.01 T
CONCRETE, EARTHWORK & STRUCTURAL STEEL Page 9 of 10
5.3 Inspection of High Strength Bolted Steel Connections
5.3.1 General
The Testing Subcontractor shall inspect the work of the steel erector to insure
that proper "bolt up" procedures are followed at all. times. Installation and
tightening procedures shall comply with the requirements of .the RCSC
specification and the AISC.
5.3.2 Connections with Fully Pre -Tensioned Bolts
a. All plies of each connection are to be brought into snug contact prior
to final tightening of the bolts.
b. Tightening of the bolts shall begin at .the most rigid part of the
connection and work outward until all bolts are tightened. On large
connections the bolts should only be tightened to approximately
50% of the final tension and the tightening cycle should be repeated.
to obtain the final tension load in the bolt.
C. Direct tension indicators are to be installed in strict conformance to
the manufacturer's recommendations.
d. The Testing Subcontractor shall visually inspect 100% of the high
strength bolts in each connection to insure that the protrusions on
the direct tension indicators have been flattened to the proper
extent.
5.4 Testing of High Strength Bolted Steel Connections
5.4.1 Bearing Connections with Fully Pre -Tensioned Bolts
No testing -is required.
5.4.2 Slip -Critical Connections. with Fully Pre -Tensioned Bolts -
a. Testing Subcontractor shall measure the average gap of the installed
direct tension indicator in at least 10% of the bolts, but not less than
two (2) bolts, in each connection. When the bolt is properly tightened,
the resulting average gap shall be the gap specified by the manufacturer
of the direct tension indicator or less.
b. The feeler gauge shall be used as a "go" or "no-go" tool. If the gauge
• does not enter the gap, the installation will be considered satisfactory.
u:unvmc%cvaca%wi.vvvvarmua-w 1.uvi1
r_7
� J
•
•
6aYHMR En&eers & SPECIFICATION FOR SAMPLING, TESTING Project No. 77052.001
Constructors AND CONSTRUCTION CONTROL OF Spec. No. B08.01T
CONCRETE, EARTHWORK. & STRUCTURAL STEEL Page- 10 of 10
6. DOCUMENTATION
6.1 Test Inspection Reports
6.1.1 Reports of all tests and/or inspections performed under this Specification,
both field and laboratory, shall be furnished to the Construction Manager
on a scheduled basis. Except where the results of any individual test,
group of tests or the results of an inspection must be immediately made
known to the Construction Manager (e.g., failure of concrete compressive
strengths), submittal of test and inspection reports shall be on a weekly
basis. Each submittal shall, as a minimum, cover all tests and inspections
performed or completed during the previous seven (7) calendar days. The
original report shall be signed and sealed by a professional engineer
registered in the State of California .
6.1.2 The submittal of test and/or inspection, reports shall be accompanied by
detailed recommendations of the Testing Subcontractor for correcting any
deficiencies reflected in the weekly report. The report shall also include
detailed descriptions of any work by others which is or was rejected due to
inspection or testing by the Testing Subcontractor and reason for the
Testing Subcontractor's rejection of such work, with recommendations
made to Construction Manager for correction of such rejected work.
6.2 Submittal of Data
The Testing Subcontractor shall submit to the Construction Manager all test and
inspection reports which have been prepared in performance of the work specified
herein. Reports may be in Testing Subcontractor's own format, but will be subject to
approval of the Construction Manager. Reports shall be entirely legible and suitable
for "Xerox" type reproduction by the Construction Manager. Submittal of reports
shall be as follows:
Two '(2) copies to Construction Manager.
One (1) copy to appropriate Subcontractor (supplying or performing the work
tested).
6.3 Test Records
Throughout the performance .of the work, the Testing Subcontractor, unless
otherwise directed by the Construction Manager, shall maintain at the jobsite. one (1)
complete set of all reports, data and records of testing performed hereunder. The
Testing Subcontractor shall allow the Construction Manager unrestricted access to
these records.
v: uivmnlnooco % W i.u%Jvvatusvo-v i i . uvi,
S
LINH/
I_ '
Raylt!14116n Engineers &
Constructors
CLIENT:
Wild Goose Storage JOB/INQUIRY NO,-,: 77052.001
FACILITY:
Wild Goose Natural Gas Storage SPEC.NO.: F00.G1
Butte County, California
7 1998
too�
PROJECT SPECIFICATION
FOR
r PF-LH6LN POWERS
ASSOCIATES
ELECTRICAL DESIGN CRITERIA
1-0
0
This title page is a record of all revisions of the specification. Each time the specificaNn is changed; only
the new or revised
pages are issued. For convenience, the nature of each revision, is bi%fly noted i�i`yv--
REV. NO.
DATE --I
BY
CHECKED
APPROVAL
PAGES
NATURE:OF-REV0t •.:%.
A
3/28/97
PK
KKL
KKL
All
For: :Approv I
al.
0
01/15/98
For.-DetailedDesign
P"Pf'0P1i•VT.717"h
DEC 0 2 1998
LIN
HART PE: tJOWERS
AsSOCIATES
Rev. LEAD
LEAD LEAD
LEAD LEAD
LEAD LEAD LEAD,`
No. PROC
MECH PIPE
CIVIL STRILIC
ARCH ELEC I&C OA PEM PM COE
A G
RDM EGD
FJVP
CS JRW JEY KKL'..
0
01
Distribution:
USS//
00
Per Project Distribution Matrix
C-13 Al.
E15 66
Up.
CTRIG
i'L,
II.
.
- 4
0
•
BsyMmm Engineers &
Constructors
SECTION
PROJECT ELECTRICAL
DESIGN CRITERIA
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Job/Inquiry_ No.
Spec No I
e i
PAGE
1. SCOPE.................................................................................................... 1
2. CODES AND STANDARDS............................................................ I........... 1
3. DESIGN PHILOSOPHY............................................................................ 1
4. ELECTRICAL POWER SERVICES.............................................................. 3
4.1 Power Line............................................................................... 3
4.2 Main Substation......................................................................... 3
4.3 Power System Description and Characteristics ............................. 3
5. POWER DISTRIBUTION......................................................................... 4
6. WIRING METHODS............................................................................... 5
6.1 Wire and Cable for Power Systems ............................................ 5
6.2 Cable Trays............................................................................. 6
6.3 Underground Conduits.............................................................. 6
6.4 Aboveground Conduits.............................................................. 7
6.5 Armored Cable Installations........................................................ 8
6.6 Control Stations, Switches, and Indicators ................................... 8
6.7 Junction and Pull Boxes............................................................ 9
7. GROUNDING......................................................................................... 9
7.1 Power System Grounding.......................................................... 9
7.2 Equipment Grounding............................................................... 10
7.3 Static and Lightning Protection ................................................... 10
7.4 Instrumentation and Control System Grounding .......................... 11
8. MOTORS............................................................................................ 11
9. CLASSIFIED AREAS............................................................................. 12
10. LIGHTING........................................................................................... 12
10.1 Normal Lighting (Remote Facility) ..................................... :......... 12
10.2 Emergency Lighting (Remote Facility) ........................................ 13
10.3 Lighting Intensities and Design .................................................. 13
10.4 Lighting Equipment and Receptacles .......................................... 14
11. COMMUNICATION............................................................................... 14
11.1 Telephone System................................................................... 14
11.2 Control................................................................................... 14
12. CATHODIC PROTECTION...................................................................... 14
•
•
C�
BaV11m In Engineers &
Constructors
1. SCOPE
PROJECT ELECTRICAL
DESIGN CRITERIA
Job/Inquiry No., 77052.001
Spec No F00.01
Page 1 of 14
The Electrical Design Criteria describes criteria, design philosophy, equipment,
materials, and interfaces, that will be employed on the Wild Goose Gas (WGSI)
Injection, Storage and Retrieval project.
2. CODES AND STANDARDS
2.1 The electrical design and engineering will conform to the following codes:
a. NFPA 70-1996 National Electrical Code (NEC)
b. 1995 California Electrical Code plus the 1996 Errata
2.2 Applicable provisions of the following Standards and Publications will also be
considered in order to comply with the latest recommended practices (the
revision/edition in effect on 3/1/97 will apply):
a. IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers Publications
b. API American Petroleum Institute Publications
C. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
d. OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Act
e. NACE National Association of Corrosion Engineers
f. ANSI American National Standards Institute
g. ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association
h. IES Illumination Engineering Society
i. NFPA National Fire Protection Association
2.3 All Local, Municipal and State Codes and Regulations for this type of work
will also govern.
2.4 The above codes and standards are intended as minimum requirements. only.
They will in no way inhibit the design to standards which are higher than
these minimums.
2.5 When certain provisions of separate codes seem contradictory or may work
undue hardship, each such occurrence will be resolved in writing between
the Owner and the Engineer.
3. DESIGN PHILOSOPHY
3.1 Electrical specifications, symbols, abbreviations and installation details will
be the RE&C standards for Gas Injection, Storage and Retrieval facilities,
modified with applicable installation details supplied by Wild Goose Storage,
Inc. (WGSI). Specifications will include:
- Electrical Specification for Packaged Mechanical Equipment.
- 480 Volt Motor Control Centers.
- Cathodic Protection Systems.
- Uninterruptible Power Supply System (UPS).
FAHOMM6828MU)GOOSEW00-01 ROMOC
.7
is
is
Job/Inquiry No.. 77052.001
BAyM�OD Engineers & PROJECT ELECTRICAL Spec No F00.01
Constructors DESIGN CRITERIA Page 2 of 14
- Electrical Construction Underground (Duet Banks; (Underground Gendtk
Cables and Grounding).
- Electrical Installation Construction Requirements - Aboveground.
- Power Distribution Center.
- Standby Variable Frequency Drives.
Electrical Standard Detail Sheets will include:
- Wiring and Schematic Diagram Symbols.
- One Lines Legend and Symbols.
- Plan Drawing Legend and Symbols.
- Area Classification Details.
- Underground Details and General Notes.
- Grounding Details and General Notes.
- Lighting Details and General Notes.
- Cable Tray Details and General Notes.
- Conduit/Cable Details and General Notes.
3.2 Electrical Subcontracts/packages will include Power Distribution Center
(PDC)/Electrical and Instrumentation/Control building, Standby Genefetw,
Cathodic Protection and Fire Protection systems.
3.3 PDC(S) will be supplied as complete packages, including the prefabricated
building, doors, windows, HVAC, all electrical and control equipment,
programmable logic controllers (PLC's), Emergency Shutdown system (ESD)
panel, 1:1126=s; standby generator, instrument air compressors, transformers,
panelboards, raceways, wiring, lighting, receptacles, fire protection, gas
detection, grounding, lightning protection, busways, and electrical
connections. All the above equipment will be pre -purchased., preassembled,
delivered to the PDC manufacturer and pre-installed in the buildings at the
PDC manufacturer's facilities. (Note: The main plant PLC and ESD panel and
associated terminal cabinets may be supplied by separate vendors, other
than the PDC vendor, shipped to the PDC vendor for installation in the PDC
and to be shipped to the job site as one package/module.)
3.4 Safety systems will include fire and gas detection systems, site -wide audible
and visible alarm notification systems, off-site alarm notification to an
approved location and site -wide manual and automatic emergency shutdown
(ESD) systems.
3.5 Electrical design will be based on using remote PLC 1/0 racks/cabinets and
distributed control from compatible PLC's which are skid -mounted in control
panels supplied by as part of mechanical equipment packages. These will be
tied together using a Fedundant data highway leep system. -For the Remote
Facility, redundant data highway cables will be installed, but not connected.
The data highway connection between the Remote Facility PLC and the Well
Pad PLC will be redundant, using redundant fiber optic cables. -,A-single -bF
F:UiOMEXE6828\W LDGOOS E\F00-01 RO.DOC
0.
•
•
Job/Inquiry No., 77052.001
68yfheain Engineers & PROJECT ELECTRICAL Spec No F00.01
Constructors DESIGN CRITERIA Page 3 of 14
3.6 Additional Modularization: To reduce the overall work at the jobsite,
wherever possible, cable tray will be pre-installed on piperack modules off
site and joined/spliced to the tray on other modules at the jobsite.
4. ELECTRICAL POWER SERVICE
4.1 Power Line
Pacific Gas And Electric (PG&E) will provide power tapped from a 12 KV, 3
phase, 3 wire line from their existing system. This will be maintained by
PG&E.
4.2 Main Substetten Transformer/Panel
PG&E will design, build and maintain the main substetierg transformer/panel
The major equipment provided will include:
Transformer(s)
480 volt AC, 3 phase secondary
panel
Facility metering equipment
All materials and equipment necessary fef the substatien will be provided by
PG&E, including: Grounding, relaying, lightning arresters, disconnect
switches, metering, metering and relaying current and voltage transformers,
control and ether miscellaneous power., eenefete feundetiens, gFevel,
e rents.
4.3 Power System Description and Characteristics
4.3.1 3 Phase symmetrical short circuit levels at the transformer secondary
480 VAC terminals:
Maximum: HOLD _A@ 480VAC
Minimum: HOLD —A@ 480VAC
4.3.2 Voltage Regulation
Normal voltage fluctuations
Maximum voltage fluctuations
4.3.3 Plant voltage dips
+/-5%
May exceed 5%. under light load
conditions.
Voltage dips caused by events in the plant such as motor starting, as
seen at the 12 kv level, will not exceed 10%.
4.3.4 Metering
• 1
Metering will be installed on the secondary side of the substation
transformer(s) by PG&E.
F:\HOME\E6828\W LDGOOS E\F00-01 RO. DOC
a
C7
is
40
RAyH1e011 Engineers & PROJECT ELECTRICAL
Constructors DESIGN CRITERIA
4.3.5 Reclosing on Utility System
Job/Inquiry No.. 77052.001
Spec No F00.01
Page 4 of 14
The reclosing sequence and timing will be coordinated with the plant
equipment and PG&E's equipment protection.
5. POWER DISTRIBUTION
5.1 12 KV/480V Main Substation Transformer Panel
Designed, installed, owned, operated and maintained by PG&E.
5.2 480v Motor Control Center (MCC)
A 480 volt MCC will take power from the PG&E 480 volt-$itehgew panel.
This MCC will be designed and constructed to NEMA standards and will
include a main circuit breaker and incoming
protection.. The
protection will include long time, short time and ground fault overcurrent,
under/over 'voltage and phase balance. 480V motor control will be
centralized onto this center.
5.3 Lighting and Power Panels
Lighting and Power panels equipped with molded case circuit breakers will
be provided as required to feed lighting, instruments, programmable logic
controllers (PLC's), and other UPS loads and other small loads.
5.4 Dry -Type Transformers
480-120/208V, 3 phase dry -type transformers will feed 120/208V panels. as
required. Except, single phase, 480-120/240 control power transformers and
panelboards may be used to feed control and UPS loads.
5.5 Uninterruptible Power System (UPS)
A small UPS will be provided for essential 120 VAC loads. These UPS will
include rectifiers, inverter, static switch, and battery bank.
5.6 UPS power will be provided for the following critical loads:
- ESD System.
- PLC Power supplies, monitors, printers & 1/0 (including PLC's supplied
as part of mechanical vendor packages). Nete-Eaeh FneehenieaT
peekage will be supplied with twe 120 VAG ekewits. ene W126 peweF
F:UiOME\E6828\WLDGOOSE\F00-01 RO.DOC
C.
Ra 11mm Engineers &
Constructors
6. WIRING METHODS
PROJECT ELECTRICAL
DESIGN CRITERIA
6.1 Wire and Cable for Power Systems
Job/Inquiry No. 77052.001
Spec No F00.01
Page 5 of 14
6.1 .1 Low voltage power and control cables will be multi -conductor Type
THHN XHHW rated T -G Type MC (VW -1), 600V, 90°C, with
aluminum sheath or interlocked armor and weather/sunlight resistant
jacket. Power cables will include a grounding conductor.
6.1.2 Single -conductor wire used in low voltage lighting circuits, except
fixture wire, will be Type THHN, 600V (750/900C). The 75°C rating
will be used for ampacity selections.
6.1.3 The minimum size conductors allowed will be No. 12 AWG for power
and lighting wiring and No. 14 AWG for controls.
6.1.4 Instrument Wire and Cable
a. Cable will have individually shielded, twisted, individually
numbered pairs (with additional overall shields on Multiple pair
cables). Cables installed outside the electrical building (PDC)
will be armored, type PLTC, with flame retardant PVC jacket.
b. Cables will contain only signals of a similar type and voltage
level.
For example, there must be separate multi -conductor cables for
4-20 ma DC, AC digital, DC digital, and pulse signal circuits.
6.1.5 Splices or taps will be avoided in power or control wiring. In general,
wire or cable will be installed In a single continuous piece .from
termination point to termination point.
6.1.6 Wire nuts will not be used, except for lighting and receptacle circuits.
6.1.7 The green and white wires furnished in a multi -conductor cable, color
coded according to ICEA Method 1, will be used only in accordance
with the National Electrical Code (i.e., for AC circuits, as a ground or
neutral only respectively).
6.1.8 High temperature wire, National Electrical Code Type SF -2 or equal,
will be used for fixture wiring, if required by fixture design.
6.1.9 All electrical circuits will have wires clearly identified with permanent
type heat -shrinkable wire markers or clear heat -shrink sleeves over
E -Z Code wire markers at every termination point. Where it is
determined that heat -shrinkable wire markers are not practical, Brady
"Clip -Sleeve" or equal will be used.
FMOMBE6820MU)GOOSET00-01 ROAOC
.7
•
Job/Inquiry No:. 77052.001
�iVNImm Engineers & PROJECT ELECTRICAL Spec No F00.01
Constructors DESIGN CRITERIA Page 6 of 14
6.1.10 No power wiring will be mixed in the same conduit or
multi -conductor cable with control, instrumentation, or alarm wiring.
6.1.11 All wire and cable will employ stranded, copper conductors except
thermocouple extension wire.
6.2 Cable Trays
6.2.1 Ladder -type trays will be installed indoors and outdoors in unclassified
or Class I, Division 2 areas for plant -wide distribution of power,
controls, and instrumentation cables.
6.2.2 The trays will be the ladder type, aluminum or hot dipped galvanized
steel, heavy duty, long span, rated NEMA 20C; with 6 inch channel
sides, 9 inch rung spacing and bolted connection plates.
a. Trays will be adequately supported at 20'-0" maximum intervals
and provided with expansion fittings and guides as required.
b. Tray covers will be used as necessary for physical protection of
cables and in all locations up to 8-0" above grade or accessible
platforms.
c. Tray will have a working load capacity of 100 lbs. per linear I
foot.
6.2.3 Cable separation will be in accordance with code requirements.
6.2.4 The tray system will segregate cables according to service as follows:
a. Multi -conductor Control cables and 600 volt power cables
sizes less than #4/0.
C. 600 volt power cables #4/0 and above.
e. Instrument cables.
f. Plant Safety System (ESD)
6.2.5 A divider may be installed in a tray to provide the segregation noted
above.
6.3 Underground Conduits (if used)
6.3.1 High impact PVC conduit, Type EB for concrete encasement, or Type
DB for direct burial, will be used for underground installation.
6.3.2 Minimum size conduit installed underground will be 2" nominal.
F-IHOMEXE6828\WLD000SE\F00-01 RO.DOC
r�
a
•
Job/Inquiry No. 77052.001
My1:lheM Engineers & PROJECT ELECTRICAL Spec No F00.01
Constructors DESIGN CRITERIA Page 7 of 14
6.3.3 The concrete envelope encasing the PVC conduits will be rebar
reinforced under roadways.
6.3.4 All PVC conduit runs will be encased in red -dyed concrete (3 -inch
minimum cover thickness).
6.3.5 Conduits of multiple duct system will be separated a minimum of 2
inches for 2 -inch conduits, and 3 inches for 3 -inch and •larger size
conduit.
6.3.6 Conduit will not be installed within 18 inches of underground hot lines
or within 6 inches of insulated aboveground hot lines. A line will be
considered as a "hot" line when operating at a temperature of 225°F
or more.
6.4 Aboveground Conduits
6.4.1 Aboveground conduit runs installed outdoors or in Classified/
hazardous areas will use rigid galvanized steel (RGS) conduit (3/4 inch
or larger, except final runs to individual instruments may use 1/2
inch). .
6.4.2 Metallic conduit will be hot -dipped rigid galvanized steel (RGS) except
electrical metallic tubing (EMT) conduit may be installed in non-
hazardous, dry, non -corrosive locations behind finished walls and
ceilings in offices and similar buildings.
6.4.3 All RGS conduit connections will be threaded, and there will be no
conduit in the final installation that is crushed, deformed or otherwise
damaged.
a. RGS joints will be made up wrench tight with at least five full
threads engaged.
b. Threads will be coated with Crouse -Hinds STL compound.
6.4.4 Conduits serving equipment subject to vibration will terminate in
flexible connections.
a. Flexible connections will be Crouse -Hinds EC series or equal in
Division 1 areas and Anaconda Type UA "Sealtite" or equal in
Division 2 and non -hazardous areas.
b. "Sealtite" flexible conduit will be provided with a bonding jumper
when required by the NEC.
• 6.4.5 Conduit fittings will be hot -dipped galvanized malleable iron or ferrous
alloy as manufactured by Crouse -Hinds, Appleton, or equal.
F.IHOME\E6828\WLD000SE\F00-01 RO.DOC
�J
Job/Inquiry No., 77052.001
Ray -mow -ml Engineers & PROJECT ELECTRICAL Spec No F00.01
Constructors DESIGN CRITERIA Page 8 of 14
6.4.6 Conduit (other than EMT) entrance into sheet metal or other
non-threadable bulkheads will be made with watertight hubs. EMT
entrances will be made with raintight compression -type fittings.
6.4.7 Breathers and drains will be provided at high and low points of the
conduit system to prevent the accumulation of condensed water.
Breathers and drains will also be provided in junction boxes,
panelboards. and in equipment enclosures subject to accumulation of
condensed water.
6.4.8 Seals and drains will be installed in the conduit systems as required
by the National Electrical Code.
a. Sealing fittings will be accessible during and after installation.
b. No splices or taps are allowed in seals.
6.5 Armored Cable Installations
6.5.1 Underground Armored Cable installations will be installed flat, packed
in sand on bottom and top. Cable banks will be covered with wooden
planks.
6.5.2 Cables will .be terminated with suitable armored cable termination
fittings/connectors and bonded to all enclosures.
6.5.3 Seals will be installed in the cables as required by the NEC.
a. Sealing fittings will be accessible during and after installation.
b. No splices or taps will be allowed in seals.
6.6 Control Stations, Switches, and Indicators
6.6.1 Control voltage for all control stations, switches, and indicators for
motor control will be 129 VAG 24 VDC, single phase, unless
otherwise approved.
6.6.2 "Hand -Off -Auto" control stations will be furnished at all motor
locations except as noted in the next paragraph.
6.6.3 If motors are not equipped with automatic devices to start or to stop
the motors, the control station at the motor location will be "Start -
Stop" instead of "Hand -Off -Automatic" operation.
6.6.4 Conductors to the control stations may be run in the same conduit or
• cable as low voltage power leads if power conductors are no larger
than No. 4 AWG. For larger power conductors and leads abeve 609
welts, the control wiring will be run in separate conduit or cable.
F:\HOME\E6828\W LDGOOSE\F00-01 RO.DOC
•
•
•
Job/Inquiry No. 77052.001
88Engineers & PROJECT ELECTRICAL Spec No F00.01
Constructors DESIGN CRITERIA Page 9 of 14
6.6.5 Push-button color designations will be as follows:
a) Red will represent "Stop" or "Close".
b) Green will represent "Start" or "Open".
6.6.6 MCC motor starters will have three (3) indicating lights mounted on
the starter door: A green "Running" light, a red "Stop" light and an
amber "Overload or Not -In -Auto" light.
6.7 Junction & Pull Boxes
6.7.1 To reduce the total number of terminations required at the jobsite, the
general use of intermediate junction/terminal boxes will be minimized
(except for skid -mounted boxes on mechanical vendor package skids).
Cables will be "home run" from the end devices/vendor packages,
directly to the PDC/MCC building.
6.7.2 Enclosures will be constructed and rated as noted below:
a. Enclosures installed indoors in non -classified, non -process
areas will be NEMA 1 or NEMA 12.
b. Enclosures required by NEC Article *500 to be approved for
Class I locations will be NEMA 7 and 4.
C. Enclosures in outdoor locations and in indoor process areas.
that are not required by NEC Article 500 to be approved for
Classified locations will be NEMA 4.
d. Terminal boxes will be oversized with continuous (piano type)
hinges. Quick -latches, or screw-type covers/doors are
unacceptable. Doors will either be lever operated, or will have
only two (2) clips.
6.7.3 In general, terminal enclosures and junction boxes will be fitted with
tubular screw -clamp type terminal blocks.
7. GROUNDING
7.1 Power System Grounding
Power System will be solidly grounded.
F:XHOMENE6828\WLD000SETOO-01 RO.DOC
•
Job/Inquiry No.. 77052.001
ftyN1em Engineers & PROJECT ELECTRICAL Spec No F00.01
Constructors DESIGN CRITERIA Page 10 of 14
7.2 Equipment Grounding
7.2.1 All non-current carrying metal parts of electrical equipment and
buildings, and metallic structures, vessels, and other equipment will
be grounded to 5 ohms or less in accordance with NEC Article 250.
7.2.2 Buildings or structures having metallic frames or siding will be
grounded at a minimum of two locations. These locations will be at
opposite extremities of the structure.
7.2.3 A ground loop consisting of 3/4" diameter, 10' minimum length
copper -clad ground rods and minimum #4/0 AWG ground cable will
be installed. The ground cable will interconnect all ground rods in the
plant, and it will be tapped for equipment grounds with minimum #2/0
AWG ground cable.
7.2.4 Where necessary, to obtain an acceptably low ground resistance,
additional ground rods similar to the above and spaced a minimum of
six feet apart will be driven and connected in parallel with #4/0 AWG
ground cable.
7.2.5 Underground splices will be made with compression -type connectors.
7.2.6 Engine blocks of internal combustion engines, structures, vessels,
and, in general, all conducting parts that may become energized by
accidental electrical contact, or that may be electrostatically charged,
will be grounded.
7.2.7 Compressors, tall (higher than 150 feet above grade) vertical vessels,
towers, stacks, and buildings will be connected -to the plant grounding
loop.
7.2.8 Truck filling stations and refueling facilities will be equipped with a
static discharge grounding reel. The reel, fill pipes or filling hoses, the
siding rails, and lines supplying the loading rack or refueling facility
will be grounded.
7.2.9 Isolated pieces of equipment which cannot be economically
connected to the ground loop may be grounded by individual ground
rod(s).
7.2.10Power cables will be purchased with an integral grounding conductor
to maintain electrical continuity from the switchgear and motor
control center ground buses to the equipment being served.
• In addition, frames of motors 50 HP and larger and the enclosures of
all electrical apparatus will be connected to the plant ground network
by a #2/0 AWG green insulated conductor.
F:UiOME%E6828%W LDGOOSETOO-01 RO.DOC
i
•
•
Job/Inquiry No. 77052.001
Bay1lmm Engineers & PROJECT ELECTRICAL Spec No F00.01
Constructors DESIGN CRITERIA Page 11 of 14
7.2.1 1 Grounding conductors will be stranded copper cable, sized per NEC
Article 250-95.
7.3 Static and Lightning Protection
7.3.1 Static and lightning protective systems generally will be designed in
accordance with the latest editions of the following (the
revision/edition in effect on 3/1/97 will apply):
a._ IEEE Standard 142, Recommended Practice for Grounding of
Industrial and Commercial Power Systems.
b. NFPA 780, Lightning Protection Code.
7.3.2 Grounding, bonding, and other appropriate means will be used to
prevent shocks, spikes, and interference noise due to static
electricity.
7.3.3 Grounding, bonding, shielding, and surge arresters will be provided as
required .to minimize lightning damage to buildings, structures and
equipment.
7.4 Instrumentation and Control System Grounding
7.4.1 A ground bus or pad will be provided for cable shields and instrument
case grounding in each enclosure or rack containing instrumentation
equipment. This ground will be "single .point" grounded (connected)
to the plant ground grid with insulated cable.
7.4.2 The programmable logic controller (PLC) grounding system will be
separated and isolated until tied to the plant ground grid (i.e., single
point grounded).
8. MOTORS
8.1 Voltage
Motors will generally be applied at the following voltages.
Motors 1/2 to 200 HP
Motors below 1/2 HP
8.2 Design
VOLTAGE PHASE
460 V 3
120 V 1
• 8.2.1 460 VAC induction motors will be TEFC, mill and chemical type.
Insulation class will be Type F with a Class B temperature rise. 460
VAC .induction motors in Class I, Division 1 locations will be
"Explosion -Proof ".
F:\HOME\E6828\WLDGOOSE\FOD-OIRO.DOC
•
is
Job/Inquiry No. 77052.001
Ba Hmm Engineers & PROJECT ELECTRICAL Spec No F00.01
Constructors DESIGN CRITERIA Page 12 of 14
8.2.2 120 V motors will be TEFC or TENV. 120 V motors in Classified
locations will be "Explosion -Proof".
9. CLASSIFIED AREAS
9.1 Classification of areas will follow the guidelines contained in API
Recommended Practice 500 (RP500).
9.2 Electrical installation in classified areas will meet the requirements of the
NEC, article 500.
9.3. Generally, classified areas will be Class 1, Group D (mainly Methane, with
trace quantities of Methyl Mercaptan odorant and Hydrogen Sulfide). Group
C locations will be limited to the immediate vicinity of odorant injection
systems. Division 1 and 2 designations will follow applicable API guidelines.
Compressor buildings will include mechanical ventilation, using explosion -
proof fan motors and controls to allow a Class I, Division 2 area
classification in the buildings. Gas detection will be installed above the
compressors to alarm at 20 % LFL (Lower Flammable Limit) and shut down
all electrical devices in the area that are not suitable for the area
classification at 40% LFL.
9.4 Electrical enclosures installed in Class I, Division 2 locations, including
control panels, will be designed, constructed 'and rated for the area
classification without the use of NFPA 496 Type Z purging (i.e. all
components will be required to be individually approved/rated for the area
classification and be designed and tested as "non-incendive"
circuits/devices).
10. LIGHTING
10.1 Normal Lighting (Remote Facility)
10.1.1 The use of overall area lighting will be minimized. In general,
outdoor lighting will be local, low mounting height, task lighting
-(pointed down) in lieu of floodlights, to make the least nighttime
visible impact on surrounding areas. Lights will be wired in banks
so they can be selectively turned on/off in groups:
10.1.2 Lighting of towers and tall vessels is not required except where
gauges or instruments are installed that require attention or aircraft
warning lights when required by FAA regulations.
10.1.3 Generally, lighting is not required in the following areas unless
• otherwise specified:
a. Tank fields.
b. Auxiliary or low traffic volume roads.
F: W OME\E6828\W LDG OOS E\F00.01 RO. DOC
•
U
Job/Inquiry No.. 77052.001
68yfImm Engineers & PROJECT ELECTRICAL Spec No F00.01
Constructors DESIGN CRITERIA Page 13 of 14
10.1.4 Lighting for outdoor operating areas will be controlled by magnetic
lighting contactors that are equipped with a local "OFF -MANUAL -
AUTO" switch. The "AUTO" feature will be controlled by a
photocell.`
10.2 Emergency Lighting (Remote Facility)
Emergency illumination will be from self-contained, battery powered
emergency .lighting units, self illuminated, non -electrical exit signs in
accordance with code requirements.
10.3 Lighting Intensities and Design
Lighting intensities will not be less than the following maintained levels:
Foot -Candles
Location Work Surface
Compressor and Metering Buildings
30
Control Room
50
General Yard Level
2
Offices, General
70
Operating Area
10
Panel Fronts
30
Storage and warehouse areas
10
Electrical PDC/MCC Buildings
30
Walkways, Aisles, Stairways, Doorway
20
Workshops, General
70
10.3.1 Lighting fixtures in Division 1 areas will be explosion proof. Lighting
fixtures in Division 2 areas will be vapor -tight, approved for Class I,
Division 2 locations.
10.3.2 High intensity discharge (HID) lamps will be used for outdoor
lighting.
a. Lamps will be high pressure sodium (HPS).
b. Normal lighting in the Office, Control Room, Electrical
PDC/MCC Building and similar spaces will use high grade
fluorescent fixtures.
10.3.3 Gauge glasses, pressure gauges, thermometers, control pilots, and
recording or indicating instruments will be so lit that they may be
read from normal operating positions without the use of a flashlight
or other portable lighting device.
F:IHOME\E6828\W LDGOOSE\F00-01 RO.DOC
•
•
U
Job/Inquiry No.. 77052.001
BaOA Engineers & PROJECT ELECTRICAL Spec No F00.O1
Constructors DESIGN CRITERIA Page 14 of 14
10.3.4 Convenience receptacles will be provided throughout the plant at
locations required for maintenance work, with spacing such that a
100 foot cord will reach all working areas.
10.4 Lighting Equipment & Receptacles
10.4.1 Lighting transformers will be standard, outdoor or indoor, dry -type.
Voltage ratings will be either 480-208Y/1 20V, 3-phase, 4 -wire or
480-48OY/277V, 3 -phase -4 -wire solidly grounded neutral.
10.4.2 Lighting panelboards will be for 208Y/1 20 Volt, 3 phase, 4 wire, or
277 Volt, 3 phase, 4 wire, with thermal -magnetic circuit breakers.
11. COMMUNICATION
11.1 Telephone System
The telephone system will be provided by Pacific Bell, designed to match and
be compatible with the Plant Control System. The number of data grade
lines and individual regular phone lines will be determined later. (WGSI
prefers to have 2 to 4 data grade lines and 8 to 10 individually numbered
regular phone lines coming into the facility. The data lines would be for
alarms, auto -dialing, etc.)
11.2 Control
Control communications along the pipelines and for remote control and
monitoring of the Well pad from the Remote Facilty control room will be via
fiber optic cables installed in the same trenches as the pipelines.
12. CATHODIC PROTECTION
Cathodic protection will be provided for buried site piping at the Remote Facility,
well pad, and for the pipeline between the Remote Facility and the Well Pad. The
design, installation and testing of the cathodic protection system(s) will be
subcontracted to a company that specializes in cathodic protection. Insulated
flanges will be used to isolate the underground piping from the aboveground piping.
Underground pipe will have a factory applied protective coating, with field welds
and connections similarly coated and wrapped. The choice between the alternates
of impressed current or sacrificial anode cathodic protection systems will be
determined at a later date, but will be based on subcontractor recommendations.
F:U10MEXE6828%W LDGOOS EIF00.01 RO.DOC
:7
2
v
•
C7
.RavMeon Engineers &
Constructors
CLIENT: Wild Goose Storage JOB/INQUIRY NO.: 77052.001
FACILITY: Wild Goose Natural Gas Storage SPEC NO.: F00.04
LOCATION: Butte County, California
Qo��� PROJECT SPECIFICATION
Lo'Q�pEESS1pN�
� CO FOR
ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
L—A.� E15666
Q FOR
Exp
PACKAGED MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT �
CTE?!C
This title page is a record of all revisions of the specification. Each time the f� c,fc n is
changed, only the new or revised pages are issued. For convenience, the nature of each
revision is briefly noted below.
REV. NO.
DATE
BY
CHECKED
APPROVAL
PAGES
NATURE OF REVISIONS
A
4/10/97
PK
GFC
KKL
All
For Approval
0
7/21/97
�j/
KK..
C� �'
_
All
Issued For Construction with
WGSI comments included
Rev.
No. 1PROC
LEAD
LEAD
MECH
LEAD
PIPE
LEAD
CIVIL
LEAD
STRUC
LEAD
ARCH
LEAD
ELEC
LEAD
I&C
GA
PEM
PM CDE
CON
SUP
A
GDG
RWM
--
PK
WS
JBW
rJEY
OEY VL
Distribution:
Per Project Distribution Matrix
•
rl
RaVHteen Engineers &
Constructors
ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
FOR PACKAGED
MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Project No. 77052.
Spec. No. F00.0
Page i
SECTION
I PAGE
1.
SCOPE OF WORK......................................................................................
1
2.
CODES AND STANDARDS..........................................................................
1
3.
POWER SOURCES......................................................................................
1
4.
CIRCUIT SEGREGATION........................................................0...................
1
5.
ENCLOSURES:.............................................................................................
2
6.
MOTOR STARTERS/LOCAL CONTROL...............................................0......
.3
7.
WIRING............................................:.............................................................
3
8.
CONDUIT SYSTEMS. .............................................. 0 ..................... 0 ..............
5
9.
GROUNDING AND BONDING............................................0..............0..........
5
10.
NAMEPLATES................:...................................................................0.........
6
11.
TESTING..:.............................................................................0.....................
6
12.
SUPPLEMENTS .... ..................... .......... .......................................................
6
13.
PREFERRED ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL LIST.....11 .........
6
ATTACHMENTS: (2 Pages)
G: %HO ME\E6616\W LULi V V at \ruvuw. u u k-
•
•
•
RaVHseeft Engineers &
Constructors
1. SCOPE OF WORK
ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
FOR PACKAGED
MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT.
Project No. 77052.001
Spec. No. F00.04
Page 1 of 8
This specification outlines the requirements for electrical devices, circuits, and systems
supplied with packaged mechanical equipment.
2. CODES AND STANDARDS
All electrical material and equipment shall be new and the complete unit shall be
designed, constructed, installed and tested in accordance with the provisions of ANSI,
IEEE, NEMA, UL, FM, and NEC in effect on April 1, 1997. All equipment shall be
guaranteed to be .free of defects in materials and workmanship. (Exception: the UL or
FM label is waived for categories of equipment where listing criterion has not been
established.)
Electrical Equipment supplied for installation in Hazardous Areas, as stated in the
Mechanical Equipment Data Sheet, shall meet the requirements specified in the NEC for
Hazardous Area Installation.
3. POWER SOURCES
In general, one single feeder will be furnished to supply all power loads on the skid
except 480V motor and heater power circuits shall be wired direct to motor terminal
boxes by others. Manufacturer's standard design is preferred, however, in general, a
120 volts, single phase feeder will be provided for heater loads of 1800 watts and less,
and a 480 volts, 3-phase, 3 -wire feeder will be provided for loads larger than 1800
watts. Where voltages other than 480V, 3-phase or 120V, single phase, are required,
rectification and/or transformation and distribution equipment shall be supplied and
installed on skid.
3.1 Nominal ratings of power sources available to supply the packaged equipment
are as follows:
(1) 480 volts, 3-phase, 3 -wire, 60 Hertz (25,000 amps sym. interrupting)
voltage variation ± 10% with momentary dips to 80% occasionally.
Frequency fluctuation will normally be ± 1.66%.
(2) 120 volts, 1 -phase, 2 -wire, 60 Hertz unregulated (10,000 amp sym.
interrupting, minimum).
3.2 Control circuits shall be 120 volts AC, 60 Hertz, grounded neutral, unless
specified otherwise.
4. CIRCUIT SEGREGATION
4.1 480V Motor and Heater Circuits
Power feeders for 480V motors and heaters will be wired directly by others, to
the motor or heater terminal box.
G:\HOME\E6828\WLDGOOSE\FO004.DOC
C
•
U
ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
ftVMeon Engineers & FOR PACKAGED
Constructors MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT.
4.2 Power. Control and Instrument _Circuits
Project No. 77052.001
Spec. No. F00.04
Page 2 of 8
All devices except 480V motor and heater circuits requiring external connections
shall be routed to terminals in a skid mounted Junction terminal box or Control
panel. Separate terminal boxes shall be provided for the following:
(1) A 480V or 120V power feeder will be wired to the skid, Control panel.
480V power and 120V control wires shall be terminated on separate
terminal blocks.
(2) Thermocouple circuits, shall be wired to a separate Thermocouple
Terminal Box. Shields shall be wired to separate terminal points adjacent
to circuit conductors.
(3) DC Analog, RTD's, DC Control, signal or measurement circuits may
occupy the same Instrumentation Terminal Box, but shall be terminated on
separate terminal blocks. Shields shall be wired to separate terminal
points adjacent to circuit conductors.
NOTE: To satisfy the above separation requirements, common boxes with
full steel isolation barriers, or "Box -in -Box" designs may be acceptable,
but must be reviewed by the Engineer on a case-by-case basis before
acceptance.
4.3 Variable speed motor feeders must be segregated from other power, control or
instrument circuits.
5. ENCLOSURES
5.1 Enclosures for electrical equipment shall be suitable for the environment in which
they will be located as stated in the Mechanical Equipment Data Sheet
environmental condition section and shall be as follows:
(1) NEMA Type 1 or 12; Indoors - Unclassified Locations
(2) NEMA Type 4; Outdoor - Unclassified Locations, Washdown Areas and
Class 1, Division 2, Group D (without arcing contacts or fuses),
(3) NEMA Type 7/4 indoor and outdoor for Class I, Division 1, Group D
Locations and Class I, Division 2, Group D (with arcing contacts or fuses),
(4) Acceptable: Installations in' Class I, Division 2 locations which incorporate
approved sealed contact and/or "non-incendive" devices installed in NEMA
4 enclosures. ("Non-incendive" systems and components and sealed
contact devices must be approved and tested for use in Class I, Division 2
locations by a recognized testing laboratory.)
G:\HOME\E6828\WLDGOOSE\FO004.DOC
C,
is
is
RaVMeen Engineers &
Constructors
ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
FOR PACKAGED
MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
Project No. 77052.001
Spec. No. F00.04
Page 3 of 8
Purged enclosures, if specifically approved by the Engineer (Raytheon)
shall have a "Type Z" purge as defined in NFPA 496.
5.2 Conduit and cable entries into enclosures shall be bottom only.
1
5.3 Heat or arc producing devices, such as lights, lamps, heaters, resistors, motors,
solenoids, transformers, rectifiers, resistance devices, etc., installed in classified
locations shall be contained within enclosures which comply with NEC Articles
501-3, 501-6, 501-7, 501-8 and 501-9. The lowest auto -ignition temperature
(AIT) of the flammable gases and vapors that could be in the area is 280°C.
5.4 Terminal boxes shall be oversized with continuous (piano type) hinges. Quick -
latches, or screw-type covers/doors are unacceptable. Doors shall either be lever
operated, or shall have only two (2) clips.
6. MOTOR STARTERS/LOCAL CONTROL
6.1 480V motor starters will be furnished by others in a remotely located Motor
Control Center unless specified otherwise. 120V starters shall be furnished by
the Seller. All motor starters shall be NEMA rated unless specifically accepted by
the Engineer (Raytheon).
6.2 Where motors are controlled with automatic devices, control stations suitable for
"Hand -Off -Automatic" operation shall be provided. Otherwise "Start -Stop"
control stations shall be furnished at the motor location.
6.3 Motor starter control power shall originate at starter Control Power Transformer
(CPT) (by others). Dry contact control (start/stop) including push buttons shall be
interconnected and wired to terminal blocks for Owner's use 'or wired to
Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) inputs.
6.4 All switches and contacts shall be rated minimum 5 amperes at 120 VAC.
6.5 All alarms'and shutdown circuits shall be fail-safe.
7. WIRING
7.1 Wire and Cable Types
(1) Skid wiring external to control panels.
(a) All wire and cable shall be stranded copper with 600 volt insulation
and #12 AWG minimum for power and #14 AWG minimum for
control.
G:\HOME\E6828\WLDGOOSE\FO004.DOC
V
lh
•
.7
Rayfheon Engineers &
Constructors
10
ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
FOR PACKAGED'
MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
Project No. 77052.001
Spec. No. F00.04
Page 4 of 8
Wiring to analog instrument devices and RTD's shall be twisted
pairs or triads and shielded.
(c) _Electronic instrument wire shall be a twisted pair, or triad, #16
AWG 7 -strand copper conductor with #18 AWG tinned_ copper
drain wire and 100% shield.
(d) Individual pair thermocouple extension wire shall be a twisted pair
#16 solid alloy conductor with 100% overall shield and 35 mil PVC
jacket. The extension wire shall be of material compatible with the
thermocouple and color coded per ANSI standards.
(2) Wiring shall not be spliced in conduits, fittings or condulets. Wiring may
only be spliced in junction boxes or on terminal strips.
(3) Wiring shall include 20% spare wires.
7.2 Circuit/Wire Identification
Each circuit and/or wire shall be identified by the Seller at each end and in all
junction, terminal and pull boxes with the proper identifying number. Identifying
labels shall be firmly attached to the cable or wires. Labels shall be heat -
shrinkable, thermally printed. "Stickies", handwritten labels or slip-on labels are
unacceptable.
7.3 Terminal Box and Control Panel Wiring Details
(1) Terminals within the enclosures shall be channel -mounted screw down
tubular clamp type terminal blocks. Splicing of any circuit conductors is
not permitted.
(2) A maximum of two (2) conductors per terminal point shall be permitted.
Each terminal point shall permit minimum termination of two (2) #12AWG
conductors unless specifically accepted by the Engineer.
(3) - A minimum of 20% spare terminals shall be provided in all terminal boxes
and control panels.
(4) Thermocouple alloy terminal blocks shall be furnished for Thermocouple
circuits.
(5) Cable shield wires shall be insulated at terminations with heat shrinkable
tubing.
• 1(6) Outdoor terminal boxes and panelboards shall be equipped with drains and
breathers.
G:\HOME\E6828\WLDGOOSE\F0004. DOC
C7
•
RaVHteon Engineers &
Constructors
8. CONDUIT SYSTEMS
ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
FOR PACKAGED
MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT.
Project No. 77052.001
Spec. No. F00.04
Page 5 of 8
8.1 Conduit sizes and sizing of condulet bodies and boxes shall be as required by the
NEC. Conduit fittings, unless otherwise noted, shall be Crouse -Hinds Form 8,
with cast covers and solid neoprene gaskets.
8.2 Power wiring shall not be mixed with control or instrument wiring. Power
circuits shall be run in separate conduits.
8.3 All conduit shall be rigid galvanized steel. Where vibration is present, or flexibility
is required for adjustment or maintenance, and at all motors, conduit connections
shall be made with liquidtight, flexible metal conduit and shall meet the
requirements of the NEC.
8.4 Water proof hubs shall be furnished for all conduit penetrations into NEMA 4
enclosures.
8.5 Conduit and cable seals shall be installed as required by and in accordance with
the NEC. See SKE-00413, Electrical Conduit Details, for instrument installation in
hazardous areas. All seals shall be at least one trade size larger than the
incoming conduit size to ensure they are filled to less than 25% of the incoming
conduit cross-sectional area, per Article 501-5 (C) (6) (revised for the 1996
NEC).
8.6 Drains shall be installed in all outdoor vertical conduit runs. Horizontal conduit
connections to enclosures shall be arranged for drainage away from the
enclosure to a conduit low point drain.
8.7 The minimum conduit size shall be 3/4 inch.
8.8 To facilitate equipment removal for maintenance or replacement, an explosion -
proof conduit union shall be installed between each conduit seal and the
equipment enclosure. Conduit connections to instrument enclosures shall, in
addition, have an explosion -proof splice box (GUAT) with ECD drain installed
between the conduit seal and the union.. For devices with pigtails, splices may
be made in the GUAT (so the device can be removed without breaking the seal).
9. GROUNDING AND BONDING
9.1 Electrical circuits, exposed non-current carrying metal parts of electrical
equipment and metal structures shall be grounded in accordance with provisions
of the National Electrical Code.
9.2 Green insulated wire shall be used only for the grounding conductor, and for no
other purpose. All grounding cables and wires shall be insulated.
• 9.3 A ground lug shall be provided in the motor terminal box with a threaded stud
connector for grounding the motor bases.
G:\HOME\E6828\WLDGOOSE\FO004.DOC
•
•
Rayfheen Engineers &
Constructors
ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
FOR PACKAGED
MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
Project No. 77052.001
Spec. No. F00.04
Page 6 of 8
9.4 A suitable lug or terminal for #2/0 AWG ground wire shall be bonded to the skid
ground pad at diametrically opposite corners of the skid for use in connecting to
the grounding grid upon field installation. The ground pad shall be according to
the ground pad detail sketch SKE-004A attached.
9.5 All conduit, cable shields, and electrical enclosures shall be bonded to provide a
continuous connection between the respective items. The shields for analog and
other low level instrument cables shall be grounded at the main panel only. All
shields on circuits that are routed and terminated remotely to a central (off -skid)
location shall be terminated in the skid junction box, but not grounded.
The frames or cases of all electrical components, as well as motors, vessels,
tanks, and structural parts shall be bonded to the ground on the skid if they are
not attached to the skid by fusion welding.
10. NAMEPLATES
Nameplates shall be Lamicoid type with white letters on a red background.
11. TESTING
Seller shall perform continuity test on all electrical circuits to verify all devices are
installed and connected in accordance with drawings and/or specifications. In addition,
all power and control wiring in raceways shall be. meggered before terminating.
Certification of all continuity tests and megger tests performed for each package shall
be provided for record.
12. SUPPLEMENTS
The attached supplement forms a part of this specification:
(1) SKE-004A, Electrical Ground Pad Detail for Vendor Supplied Equipment
(2) SKE-00413, Electrical Conduit Details
13. PREFERRED ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL LIST
Electrical items required for the package shall be selected from the following list unless
directed otherwise by the Engineer. This list is presented to identify equipment of high
quality and availability, and is intended to be used as a guide for other devices either not
listed or, which must be substituted.
Circuit Breakers Cutler -Hammer, G.E. or Square D
• (See Section 3.1 for Interrupting
Ratings)
G
•
•
•
Rayfheen Engineers &
Constructors
Control Fuses
ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
FOR PACKAGED'
MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
Enclosures (See Section 5.0)
Control Devices
Push Buttons, Non -hazardous:
Hazardous:
Control Stations:
ESD Stations:
120 Volt Manual Motor Starters:
Project No. 77052.001
Spec. No. I F00.04
Page 7 of 8
For all applications
(Sussman) (Self -indicating)
Control panel, operators panel
(Hoffman or Wiegmann)
Junction boxes - NEMA 4, continuous
hinge, clamp cover (Hoffman or
Wiegmann)
Junction boxes NEMA 7/4 (Appleton,
Killark, Crouse Hinds, Curlee)
Allen-Bradley, Crouse -Hinds
Crouse -Hinds
Crouse -Hinds Type -EDS
Maintained contact mushroom head
pushbutton, lock -in, with ring guard
Hazardous: Crouse -Hinds Type EDS
All Others Crouse -Hinds Type MC
480 Volt Manual Motor Starters: Crouse -Hinds Type EMN
Relays, Non -time Delay A.C./D.C.: Industrial control type -
and Time Delay Allen-Bradley Bulletin 700 Type P.
(Pneumatic timers or bulletin 700 -PS
for Solid -State Timers)
120 -Volt Receptacles -
Hazardous Locations:
120 -Volt Receptacles -
Non -Hazardous Locations
Panelboards
(Non -hazardous)
0:\HOME\E68281W LDGOOSE\Fo00a. Doc
A.C./D.C.: Hermetically sealed
contact type - Al.len-Bradley Type R.
Crouse -Hinds Type ENR (20 amp)
Indoor - 20 Amp
Outdoor - 20 amp weatherproof with
top hinged cover
G.E, Cutler -Hammer,
Square D
3
•
•
ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS Project No. 77052.001
R Vffl1 on Engineers & FOR PACKAGED Spec. No. F00.04
Constructors MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT. Page 8 of 8
Panelboards Crouse -Hinds Type D2PB
Class I, Div. 2 (120/208 volts)
Conduit, Rigid
Conduit, Flexible
Conduit Fittings, Condulets
Flexible Conduit Fittings
Conduit Seals
Transformers - Dry Type
Heater Wiring for High
Temperature Application
Wire Markers
Rigid galvanized steel (RGS).
Sealtite flexible conduit.
Crouse -Hinds Form 8, with cast covers
and solid neoprene gaskets.
Appleton, Type STB, with insulated
bushings and external grounding lugs.
Drain Type: Crouse -Hinds, Type EYD
Non -Drain: Crouse -Hinds, Type EYS
Cutler -Hammer Type EPT, 3 phase or
approved equal.
Rockbestos Firezone 101.
(Vendor to verify application
temperature does not exceed rating of
cable.)
Heat shrinkable, thermally printed.
Portable Cord Heavy duty type "SO"
(Extra -hard usage, approved for portable cord.
Class I, Division 2 Areas.)
Terminal Blocks
Ground Lugs
Weidmuller SAK Series
Mechanical Type (Burndy).
J
NOTES:
1. THE SURFACE SHALL NOT BE PAINTED.
DRILL & TAP (2)3/6"-16.
1" THICK
2. THE GROUND PAD SHALL BE MOUNTED FLAT ON SURFACE WITH A
CONTINUOUS WELD AROUND THE 41/2" X 2" AREA.
3. (2) GROUND PADS ARE REQUIRED FOR .EACH TANK OR EQUIPMENT '
SKID• ON TANKS THE PADS SHALL BE LOCATED 180 DEG. FROM
EACH OTHER. ON EQUIPMENT SKIDS THE PADS SHALL BE
LOCATcD ON OPPOSITE CORNERS.
ELECTRICAL
GROUND PAD DETAIL
FOR VENDOR SUPPLIED EQUIPMENT
SCALE- WILD GOOSE NATURAL GAS STORAGE FACILITY
N. T. S. BUTTE COUNTY, CALIFORNIA
DWG. NO. I SKE-004A
ORDER NO. 77052.001 IqEv 0
Z 7 1
114' LIOUIOTIGHT CONDUIT '
WITH LTS75 CONNECTORS
AND EXTERNAL GROUND WIRE
EYS-316
EYS-316 I•; LIOUtOTIGHT CONDUIT UNY205 t20VAC PWR W/GHO
WITH LTB?S CONNECTORS CONDUIT (TTP 2) D
UNT205 AND EXTERNAL GROUND WIRE SIZE PER PLAN
NOTE 4 —�
CONDUIT
SIZE PER PLAN
REDUCER
REDUCER AS REO'D AS REO'O
NOTE 4
DETAIL 1
CLASS 1. DIV 2
INSTRUMENT/CONDUIT CONNECTION
TO ARCING DEVICE
NOTE 1
NON -ARCING DEVICE
REDUCER AS REO'D
7.4 LIOUIOTIGHT CONDUIT
WITH LT875 COeIECTORS
AND EXTERNAL GROUND WIRE
rCIT
ODUSIZE PER PIAN
DETAIL
CLASS 1- DIV 2
INSTRUMENT/CONDUIT CORECTION TO NON -ARCING
DEVICE NOT DIRECTLY CONNECTED TO PROCESS LINE
CONTAINING FLANUBLE FLUID.
ALSO USE THIS DETAIL FOR INSTALLATIONS IN UNCLASSIFIED AREAS
DETAIL 2
CUSS t. Oly 2
INSTRUMENT/CONOUIT CONNECTION
TO ARCING DEVICE
REQUIRING 120 VAC POWER
GUAT24
EYS-316
M.� LIOUIOTIGHT CONDUIT
UNT20SWITH 0875 CONNECTORS
AND EXTERNAL GROUND WIRE—
RED
IRE —
REDUCER 1
AS aEo'o CONDUtT
.�, SIZE PER PLAN
PROCESS LINE `-`REDUCER AS REO'D
COIS
BREATHER/DRAIN (XPI
NOTE 1
DET_
CLASS 1-01V 2
INSTRUMENT DEVICE (ARCING OR NON -ARCING)/
CONDUIT CONNECTION DIRECTLY CONNECTED TO
PROCESS LINE CONTAINING FLAWABLE FLUID
NOTES:
1. CABLES SHALL BE SEALED IN THE CONDUIT SEALING FITTINGS AFTER REMOVING JACKET
AND ANY OTHER COVERING SO THAT THE SEALING COMPOUND WILL SURROUND
EACH INDIVIDUAL INSULATED CONDUCTOR.
2. PART NMERS SHOWN ARE CROUSE-HIMOS-
3. ALL CONDUIT AND CABLE INSTALLATIONS SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE
1996 EDITION OF THE NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE.
4. ALL CONDUIT AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLED IN CLASSIFIED AREAS
SHALL BE APPROVED FOR USE IN THE HAZARDOUS AREAS AND SHALL BE UL LISTED.
SEALS SHALL BE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED PER ARTICLE 501-5 OF THE NEC 1996 EDITION..
ELECTRICAL
CONDUIT DETAILS
�DNc BurrE coTJM Y, CALIFORNIA
o•a No. $KE -004B
77052.001 i aE„
C
E
'4 Raytheon Engineers &
Constructors
is
.7
CLIENT:. Wild Goose Storage 'PROJECT NO.: 77052.001
FACILITY: Wild Goose Gas Storage SPEC NO.: F04.01
LOCATION: Butte County, California
p� PROJECT SPECIFICATION
�¢�
o� For
480 VOLT MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
Tlis title page is a record of all revisions of the specification. Each time the specification is
changed, only the new or revised pages are issued. For convenience, the nature of each
revision is briefly noted below.
REV. NO.
DATE
BY
I CHECKED
APPROVAL
I PAGES
NATURE OF REVISIONS
P1
10/01/9
PK
JGA
All
Preliminary for bid
7
O
2/02/98
HBC---
i, 1-15
Conform for purchase
15
Replaced with Unit Pricing,
filled out by Vendor.
Qgpf ESS/p��
o
p��,
Qy�OLOCD
Q- E15666 C-
Exp. 3
sf�P
CTRIC����
f OF CAO
Rev. LEAD
LEAD
LEAD
LEAD
LEAD
LEAD
LEAD
LEAD
CON
No. PROC
MECH
PIPE
CIVIL
STRUC
ARCH
ELEC
I&C QA
PEM
PM
COE SUP
P1 --
--
--
--
VV
--
--
WCS JRW
PEY
--
-- --
O--
--
--
--
--
,
--
- --
Distribution:
Per Project Distribution Matrix
g:\home\e6828\w1dgoose\F04.01
•
•
Raytheon Engineers &
Constructors480 VOLT
MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Project No. 77052.001
Specification No. F04.01
Page i
SECTION PAGE
1 SCOPE.................................................................................. 1
2 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS ............................................. 1
3 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION/FABRICATION .......................... 1
4 TESTING AND INSPECTION.................................................... 7
5 PREPARATION FOR SHIPMENT ............................................... 7
6 DOCUMENTATION................................................................ 7
7 SUPPLEMENTS...................................................................... 7
AttachmentA..............:............................................................................ 9
AttachmentB............................................................................................ 12
g:\home\e6828\wldgoose\F04.01
•
•
Raytheon Engineers &
Constructors
1. SCOPE
480 VOLT
MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
Project No. 77052.001
Specification No. F04.01
Page 1 of 15
1.1 The equipment to be furnished and delivered consists of the 480 volt Motor
Control Centers specified herein, complete from incoming line terminals to
outgoing line terminals.
1.2 The equipment to be furnished hereunder shall be new and of first-line quality
which meets or exceeds the requirements of the specification and shall consist
of manufacturer's standard design where possible.
1.3 Manufacturer's names, trade names and model numbers specified herein are
used for facilitating description and establishing a standard of quality and
required design characteristics. All references to manufacturer's trade names
or model numbers shall be assumed to be followed by the words "or approved
equal."
2. REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
2.1 All equipment shall comply with all applicable local codes and regulations.
2.2 All equipment specified herein shall be designed, manufactured and tested in
accordance with the latest applicable standards effective October 1, 1997, and
requirements of the following:
A.
ANSI -
American National Standards Institute
B.
ASTM -
American Society for Testing and Materials
C.
AWS -
American Welding Society
D.
IEEE -
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
E.
NEMA -
National Electrical Manufacturer's Association
F.
NFPA -
National Fire Protection Association
G.
UL -
Underwriters Laboratories
H.
NEC -
National Electrical Code
I.
CEC -
California Electrical Code
2.3 If there is an apparent discrepancy between any of the requirements of this
Specification and the standards and requirement_ s stipulated in Paragraph 2.2
above, or of any applicable statue, ordinance or code, then the most stringent
requirements shall apply. The Buyer shall be apprised of all apparent
discrepancies for resolution.
3. DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION/FABRICATION
3.1 Enclosures
is I 3.1.1 Motor control centers shall be provided with the type of NEMA
enclosures specified on the Ratings & Requirements sheets.
g: \home\e6828\wldgoose\F04.01
•
•
Raytheon Engineers &
Constructors
3.2 Arrangement
480 VOLT
MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
Project No. 77052.001
Specification No. F04.01
Page 2 of 15
Motor control centers shall have all starters and circuit breakers front mounted
or back to back mounted as specified on the Ratings and Requirements Sheets.
Each starter, circuit breaker or blank position shall be designated by a number
and letter indicating location in the motor control center as follows:
3.2.1 The vertical sections shall be numbered sequentially left to right (starting
with "1 ") when viewed from the front.
3.2.2 The starter or circuit breaker positions shall be lettered sequentially top
to bottom starting with "A."
3.2.3 If a starter or circuit breaker occupies more than one position vertically,
it shall be designated by the letter corresponding to the uppermost
position.
3.2.4 If two or more circuit breakers occupy a single position, they shall be
further designated by the letters, "L", "R", "T", or "B" for left, right, top
or bottom.
3.2.5 If a special vendor's designation is required for manufacturing reasons,
the Buyer's designation must also be provided as specified above.
3.3 Structures
3.3.1 Each motor control center shall be of the unitized metal -enclosed type.
Indoor sections shall be approximately 90 inches high and 20. inches
wide, jointed together to form a rigid, free-standing, completely dead-.
front assembly. Sections shall be approximately 20 inches deep unless
otherwise specified. Sections shall be constructed of welded and/or
bolted steel members.
3.3.2 The motor control centers shall be arranged and bused to accommodate
either fixed or removable starters and circuit breakers, depending on
size. The motor control centers shall be arranged so that additional
sections may be readily added to both ends. Guide rails or other means
shall be provided in the section structures for supporting and aligning
starters and circuit breakers during removal or replacement.
3.3.3 Each vertical section shall have a horizontal wiring compartment located
at the top and bottom, and a vertical wiring compartment equipped with
cable -tie supports for position wiring.
Separately hinged doors shall be provided for each vertical wiring
• compartment. Space shall be available for outgoing cables at both the
top and bottom of the sections.
g: \home\e6828\wldgoo se\F04.01
•
•
•
Raytheon Engineers &
Constructors480 VOLT
MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
3.4 Incoming Line Section
Project No. 77052.001
Specification No. F04.01
Page 3 of 15
Copper compression lugs with 2 -hole tongues and long barrels shall be
furnished for terminating the incoming line cables. The terminals shall be
suitable for terminating Class B stranded copper cable. The terminals shall be
positioned so that there shall be a minimum of 13 inches clearance between
the terminals and the incoming power cable entrance surface so that incoming
leads can be quickly positioned and connected.
3.5 Main Horizontal Bus
The main horizontal common power bus shall be manufacturer's standard as
specified on the Ratings and Requirements Sheet. The bus and all bolted
connections shall be accessible from the front of each vertical section after
barrier removal, and barrier shall be isolated from below and from the horizontal
wire trough. The bus shall be braced to withstand fault currents as specified on
the Ratings sheets. The bus shall have a continuous rating as specified.
Unplated bus joints are not acceptable.
3.6 Vertical Bus
Power shall. be distributed to the starter and circuit breaker positions in each
vertical section by means of a three-phase vertical bus of the same material and
plating as the horizontal bus. The bus supports shall be of high dielectric
strength, nonhygroscopic material. Full height barriers shall be provided for
complete isolation of the vertical buses from both the front and rear. The
vertical buses shall also be fully barrier isolated from below.
The vertical buses shall have an adequate continuous current rating for the
section load and shall be braced for the same short circuit as the main
horizontal bus.
3.7 Continuous Ground Bus
A continuous copper ground bus of at least 1/4 -inch by 1 -inch size shall be
provided for each vertical section and in a conveniently accessible location near
the bottom of the vertical structure. The short circuit current rating of the
ground bus shall be at least equal to the main bus. The bottom ground bus
shall be provided with copper compression type lugs for No. 4/0 AWG cable
attachment to the ground grid at two points. Ground bus splice joints shall not
be coincident with bolts which support the bus. Bolted connections to the
ground bus shall be separate from the support and splice joint bolts.
g:\home\e6828\w1dgoose\F04.01
•
•
Bayf lmn Engineers &
Constructors MOTOR VOLT
MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
3.8 Starter and Circuit Breaker Position Doors
Project No. 77052.001
Specification No. F04.01
Page 4 of 15
3.8.1 Each starter and circuit breaker position shall be provided with an
individual front door. Starter and circuit breaker position doors shall be
interlocked mechanically with the disconnecting circuit breaker to
prevent unintentional opening of the door with power ON or
unintentional application of power while the door is open. Means shall
be .provided to release the interlock for the intentional access to the
_interior at any time and for intentional application of power, if desired,
while the door is open. Padlocking arrangements shall permit locking of
the disconnect device in the OFF position with the door closed.
3.8.2 The circuit breaker disconnect devices shall be operable from outside the
enclosure and shall show position of the circuit breaker whether the
position door is closed or open.
3.8.3 The overloads for single -speed starters shall be provided with a single
externally operated manual reset button, mounted on the door of the
position, which is capable of resetting any overload in the position.
Two -speed starters may have two overload reset buttons mounted on
the position door.
3.9 Combination Starters
3.9.1 Combination starters shall be of the full voltage, magnetic, combination
motor circuit protector (MCP) as specified with an individual. control
transformer, and three thermal overload relays. Starters shall be of the
drawout type with positive pressure stabs (including grounding stabs) for
connecting to the vertical bus.
3.9.2 Reversing and two -speed motor starters shall be electrically and
mechanically interlocked to prevent the simultaneous energization of
contactors..
3.9.3 Preferably, thermal overload relays shall be of the ambient temperature
compensated, manually reset, bimetallic or eutectic type, adjustable
between 85 and 115 percent of their nominal trip rating.
3.9.4 Thermal overload relay heater elements shall be sized based upon motor
full load current data. Overload relay heater elements for spare starters
shall be sized based upon the maximum continuous. current rating of the
respective starter.
3.9.5 Motor full load current data will be supplied to the Seller as soon as it
becomes available. All thermal overload relays shall include the installed
heater elements.
g:\home\e6828\wldgoose\F04.01
•
•
•
Rayf am Engineers &
480 VOLT
Constructors
MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
Project No. 77052.001
Specification No. F04.01
Page 5 of 15
3.9.6 An individually fused 480-120 volts control transformer shall be
furnished with each combination starter. The control transformer shall
be sized by the manufacturer to have a minimum of 20 percent capacity
in excess of the continuous voltampere requirements of the holding coil,
indicating lights and any externally located devices such as solenoid
valves, external relays, etc.
3.9.7 AC controls shall be suitable for operation on 120 volts.
3.9.8 At least two (2) N.O. and one (1) N.C. auxiliary switch contacts in
addition to the seal -in -contact shall be furnished on each contactor.
3.9.9 Ground lug shall be furnished in all compartments.
3.10 Circuit Breakers
3.10.1 All circuit breakers shall be of the molded -case type with an interrupting
capability as specified on the Ratings sheets. This interrupting
capability shall apply to the circuit breaker itself and not to a
combination of circuit breaker and starter. Any circuit breakers
proposed which do not meet this requirement must be approved by the
Buyer.
3.10.2 Combination starter circuit breakers shall have magnetic -only tripping
mechanisms as specified on the Ratings sheets and/or as shown on the
wiring diagrams. Thermal -magnetic breakers shall have trip ratings in
accordance with Paragraph 3.10.3 below. Magnetic -only breakers shall
have front adjustable trip ratings in accordance with industry standards
and/or as specified.
3.10.3 Feeder circuit breakers shall have thermal -magnetic tripping
mechanisms. The magnetic trip rating shall be 9 to 14 times the
thermal trip rating for breakers with frame sizes of 100 amperes and
smaller. Larger breakers shall have front adjustable magnetic trip
setting ranges of 5 to 10 times the thermal trip rating.
3.10.4 After opening the position door, the circuit breaker rating shall be visible
without dismantling the breaker operating mechanisms.
3.11 Operators
The general construction of the -push buttons, selector switches and selector
pushbutton operators shall be similar and shall be heavy duty oil tight.
Pushbutton color -coded inserts shall be removable and interchangeable with
other color -coded inserts.
g:\home\e6828\wIdgoosekF04.01
•
•
Raytheon Engineers &
Constructors
3.12 Indicating Lights
480 VOLT
MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
Project No. 77052.001
Specification No. F04.01
Page 6 of 15
Indicating lights shall be push -to -test, transformer type.
3.13 Nameplates
3.13.1 Nameplates shall be provided for each motor control ,center, for the
front of each starter and circuit breaker position, and for each major
device thereon, such as meters, instruments and control switches.
Nameplates shall be manufacturer's standard laminated type with black
letters on a white background.
3.13.2 Nameplate engraving shall be as specified in the Supplements.
3.14 Control Wiring and Terminal Blocks
3.14.1 All control wiring shall be stranded, single -conductor copper, rated 600
volts with Type SIS, MTW or other approved insulation, shall in no case
be smaller than No. 14 AWG and- shall have a maximum operating
temperature of not less than 90 degrees C.
3.14.2 Terminal blocks for control wiring shall have a rating of 600 volts and
be suitable for No. 10 AWG wire and smaller, complete with marking
strips identifying all control wiring.
3.14.3 Terminal blocks shall not be located in the vertical wiring compartment.
3.14.4 Adequate control cable terminating space shall be provided in all starter
and circuit breaker positions.
3.14.5 All wiring shall be in strict accordance with the Seller's wiring diagrams.
3.15 Power Wiring
3.15.1 The- continuous current rating of the power connections between the
vertical bus and circuit breaker shall be equal to or greater than 125
percent of the current rating of the circuit breaker frame size.
3.15.2 Adequate power cable terminating space shall be provided in all starter
and circuit breaker positions.
3.16 Painting
3.16.1 Preferred finish for indoor equipment is light gray and light tan is
• preferred for outdoor equipment. Manufacturer's standard finish is
acceptable. Extra paint shall be supplied for field touch up.
g:\home\e6828\w1dgoose\F04.01
•
Raytheon Engineers &
Constructors
4. TESTING AND INSPECTION
480 VOLT
MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
Project No. 77052.001
Specification No. F04.01
Page 7 of 15
4.1 The motor control centers shall be completely assembled in the factory and
subjected to all routine tests. All breakers and operating parts shall be completely
adjusted for proper operation. All controls shall be operated sufficiently to ensure
proper functioning of the equipment.
4.2 Manufacturer's standard tests shall be performed at the factory according to ANSI
and NEMA standards.
5. PREPARATION FOR SHIPMENT
5.1 Each separately shipped box or crate shall be marked for identification and to
indicate contents to permit orderly field assembly.
5.2 Openings and terminal connections shall be protected by covers or wood guards.
Wherever *applicable, parts shall be factory boxed, crated or otherwise suitably
prepared to prevent shipping and weather damage.
5.3 All loose components and accessories shall be suitably packaged, labeled, and
attached with other shipping units.
6. DOCUMENTATION
Documentation shall be furnished by the Seller in accordance with the attached
Documentation Requirements Form (Form 2300-1).
7. SUPPLEMENTS
7.1 The following supplements are included with and form a part of this specification:
Ratings & Requirements, Attachment A.
PLC Supplement to PDC
Bid Data, Attachment B.
Drawings:
Drawing No. Title
17-10-201 MCC One Line Diagram, Sheet 1
17-10-202 MCC One Line Diagram, Sheet 2
g Ahome\e6828\wldgoose\F04.01
C�
U]
Raylhem Engineers & Project No. 77052.001
Constructors480 VOLT Specification No. F04.01
MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS Page 8 of 15
Sketches:
Sketch No. Title
SK -17-F04.01-1 Standard MCC Schematic - FVNR Starters NEMA Size
1 Thru 3
SK -17-F04.01-2 Standard MCC Wiring - FVNR Starters NEMA Size
1 Thru 3
SK -17-F04.01-3 Standard MCC Schematic - FVNR Starters NEMA Size
1 thru 3, 2 -speed, 1 -winding
SK -PLC -001 WGSI PDC Building PLC Equipment
g:\homeke6828\wIdgoose\F04.01
•
•
•
Raytheon Engineers & Project No. 77052.001
Constructors 480 VOLT Specification No. F04.01
MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS Page 9 of 15
RATINGS AND REQUIREMENTS
Attachment A
1.0 MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS REQUIRED:
Item Nameplate
1 MCC 01
2.0 RATING AND DESIGN PARAMETERS
Rated Voltage, Volts
600
Rated Operating Voltage, Volts
480
Rated Frequency, Hz
60
Phase - Wire
3 - 3
Enclosure --NEMA
[ 1 1 (Standard)
[xl 1 A (Gasketed)
[ ] 311 (Rainproof)
Structure
(] 2 Drip Proof
[ ] 12 Industrial Dust Tight
Nominal Depth [ 1 15" or [x] 20" x 2 = 40" Deep Total
Unit Mounting [I Front Only [x] Back to Back
Main Horizontal Bus
Material
[ ] Aluminum
[ ] Mfr. Standard [x] Copper
Ratings --Amperes (as shown on one -line diagrams)
[ l 600 [ l 1000 [x] 1600
[ l 800 [ l 1200
g Ahome\e6828\wldgoo8e\F04.01
•
•
•
Raytheon Engineers &
Constructors
Vertical Bus
Project No. 77052.001
480 VOLT Specification No. F04.01
MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS Page 10 of 15
Attachment'A
(continued)
Material ,
[x] Copper [ ] Aluminum [x] Mfr. Standard Rating
[.1 300 (Front Mtg. Only) [ ] 600 (Front Mtg. Only)
[ ] 600 (Back to Back Mtg.)
Bus Bracing
Symmetrical Values
[ ] 22,000 Minimum
[ ] 42,000
[ ] Mfr. Standard
[x] 65,000
Combination Starter Type of Overcurrent Disconnecting Means
[x] Circuit Breaker
[ ] Fusible Switch
Molded -case circuit breaker and MCP interrupting capability in rms
symmetrical amperes at 480 volts: 35,000
Type of circuit breaker for combination starters
[ l Thermal -magnetic
[ ] Magnetic -only
[x] MCP
Motor circuit protector adjustable trip range
Standard
NEMA Class of Wiring 1
NEMA Type of Wiring B
g Ahome\e662%wldgooseT04.01
•
•
Raytheon Engineers &
Constructors
Incoming Line
480 VOLT
MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
Attachment A
(continued)
Entry [ ] Top [x] Bottom
No. Per Phase [x] (5) 500MCM
Project No. 77052.001
Specification No. F04.01
Page 11 of 15
Incoming Line Location (Structure No.) 1
Incoming Line Type [ ] Lugs Only
[x] Main Breaker, 1-2000A Frame with adjustable trip,
including long time, short time, high instantaneous and
ground fault trips with interchangeable trip module rated
for continuous operation.
NOTE: Each main circuit breaker shall be Westinghouse Type SPB or Buyer -
approved equal, and shall be UL listed for continuous operation at 100% of its
frame rating.
[ l Bus Duct
[ ] Main Fusible Disconnect
[ ] Close Transition to Loadcenter
Channel Sills [ ] No [x] Yes
Bottom Plates [x] No [ l Yes [ l Gasketed
UL Listing Required [x] No
Special Features
[ ] Yes
FVNR starters and contactors shall have red indicating lights, tagged "OFF",
green lights tagged 'ON" and amber lights tagged,"TRIPPED/NOT IN AUTO".
3.0 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
The equipment shall be designed and constructed to operate successfully at the rated
values under the following environmental conditions:
Location Indoors
Altitude 67.5 ft. (MSL)
Maximum ambient temperature 104° F
g Ahome\e6828\wldgoose\F04.01
is
[7
Raytheon Engineers & Project No. 77052.001
Constructors480 VOLT Specification No. F04.01
MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS Page 12 of 15
BID DATA
Attachment B
NAME OF BIDDER Electrical Power System
In addition to other data and descriptive material furnished with Bidder's Proposal, the
Bidder shall fill in all spaces of the following Bid Data Section. The specifically listed data is
in no way intended to limit the data submitted, and the Bidder is invited to submit all
material that he believes necessary to provide a complete description of his offering.
1.0 COMPONENT INFORMATION
1.1 Control center manufacturer
1.2 Control center type
1.3 Starter manufacturer
1.4 Starter type
1.5 Circuit breaker manufacturer
1.6 Circuit breaker type(s)
1.7 MCP manufacturer
1.8 Terminal block manufacturer/type
1.9 Ground fault equipment manufacturer
g:\home\e6828\w1dgoose\F04.01
Cutler -Hammer
Freedom 2100
Cutler -Hammer
A-200
Cutler -Hammer
HMCP
Cutler -Hammer
C -H / TBA
Cutler -Hammer
•
•
•
Rayf lmn Engineers & Project No. 77052.001
Constructors480 VOLT Specification No. F04.01
MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS Page 13 of 15
BID DATA
Attachment B
(continued)
NAME OF BIDDER Electrical Power System
2.0 BUS INFORMATION
2.1
Continuous current rating of main bus,
Size 1 Combination FVNR
21
amperes
1600A
2.2
Continuous current rating of vertical bus,
Size 3 Combination FVNR
21
-amperes
300A
2.3
Short circuit current rating of main and
Size 5 Combination FVNR
21
vertical bus, rms symmetrical amperes
65 KAIC
2.4
Bus material
Cowper
2.5
Type of bus plating
Tin
3.0 CONTROL TERMINAL BLOCKS
Number of control terminal blocks included in each of the following size starters:
3.1
Size 1 Combination FVNR
21
3.2
Size 2 Combination FVNR
21
3.3
Size 3 Combination FVNR
21
3.4
Size 4 Combination. FVNR
21
3.5
Size 5 Combination FVNR
21
3.6
Size 1 Combination FVR
28
3.7
Size 2 Combination FVR
28
3.8
Size 3 Combination FVR
28
3.9
Size 4 Combination FVR
28
3.10
Size 5 Combination FVR
28
g Ahome\e6828\wldgoose\F04.01
El
is
RaVlhew Engineers & Project No. 77052.001
Constructors480 VOLT Specification No. F04.01
MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS Page 14 of 15
BID DATA
Attachment B
(continued)
NAME OF BIDDER
5.0 CONTROL WIRE
5.1 Type
5.2 Size, AWG
Electrical Power System
SIS
#14
6.0 Bidder shall submit front view elevation arrangement drawing for each Motor Control
Center with the proposal.
U:\homeke6828\w1dgoose\FG4.01
r 1
U
•
•
Raytheon Engineers & Project No. 77052.001
Constructors480 VOLT Specification No. F04.01
MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS Page 15 of 15
Unit Pricing moved to the Commercial Section.
g:\home\e6828\wIdqoose\FG4.01
0
•
Barbeon Engineers &
Constructors
Cktf Wild Goose Storage JOB/INQUIRY NO.: 77052.001
FACILITY: Wild Goose Gas Storage SPEC NO.: F28.01
~OC Okf Butte County, California
'ysz PROJECT SPECIFICATION
U
�`r`�
For
Q r FIELD TERMINATION ENCLOSURES (FTE)
This cover sheet is a record of all revisions of the specification. Each time the specification is changed, only
the new or revised pages are issued. For convenience, the nature of each revision is briefly noted below.
REV. NO.
DATE
BY
CHECKED
APPROVAL
PAGES
NATURE OF REVISIONS
P1
11/17/97
HBC
DEL
All
Preliminary for Bid
0
2/2/98
HBC,
1,1-4
Conform for Purchase
Q�OVESS/0,y
LOp�Tgl
a E15 66 m
Eq. of
�r9 -TRIC \
I�OF Cat1F
Rev.
RE
RE
RE
RE.
RE
RE
RE
RE
No.
PROC
MECH
PIPE
CIVIL
STRUC
ARCH
ELEC
I&C
QA
PEM
'PM
CDS
CS
Client
Pi
--
--
--
--
-=
--
--
--
J R W
AEY
--
--
0
--
--
--
--
--
ufS
--
--
Y
Distribution:
Per Project Distribution Matrix
•
•
•
6aVffwm Engineers & SPECIFICATION FOR Project Number 77052.001
Constructors FIELD TERMINATION Spec. No. F28.01
ENCLOSURES Page i
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION
PAGE
1.
SCOPE..............................................................................:........
1
2.
REFERENCES AND STANDARDS ..................................................
1
3.
DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION....................................................
1
4.
PAINT ........... :...........................................................................
2
5.
NAMEPLATES............................................................................
2
6.
ELECTRICAL..............................................................................
2
7.
TERMINAL STRIPS......................................................................
3
8.
INSPECTION AND TEST...............................................................
3
9.
SHIPMENT.................................................................................
3
10.
VENDOR DOCUMENTATION........................................................
4
G:%HOME%E6828%WLDGOOSE%F28.Ot .DOC
Ra 11mm Engineers &
Constructors
•
1. SCOPE
�J
SPECIFICATION FOR
FIELD TERMINATION
ENCLOSURES
Project No. 77052.001
Spec. No. F28-01
Page No. �1 of 4
1.1 This specification will be used to define the general fabrication and checkout
requirements to provide complete panels ready for plant installation and operation.
1.2 Fabrication will be in accordance with the Engineer's drawings.
1.3 The Vendor shall provide all material indicated as supplied by Vendor on
Engineer's drawings. Any deviation or substitutions from the Bill of Material shall
require written approval from the Buyer. The Vendor shall be responsible for
receiving, storing and installing all material supplied by the Owner. All other
material required to complete wiring, tagging and testing the panels shall be
provided by the Vendor whether specifically called out on the drawings or not.
1.4 Unloading, installation and checkout at the plant site will be performed by others.
1.5 Definition of Terms
a. Vendor: Equipment Supplier
b. Owner and Buyer: Wild Goose Storage, Inc.
C. Engineer: Raytheon Engineers & Constructors
2. REFERENCES AND'STANDARDS
2.1 All electrical equipment shall . be new and the complete unit shall be designed,
constructed and tested in accordance with the latest provisions of NEMA, MSHA
and NEC. All equipment shall be guaranteed to be free of defects in materials and
workmanship.
2.2 All electrical material and equipment shall be listed or labeled by Underwriters'
Laboratories, Factory Mutual, or equivalent testing laboratory for the service in
which it is used, and shall bear their label or listing. Material and equipment not
available with such label or listing shall be built in accordance with the latest
published standards of UL, FM or equivalent testing laboratory.
3. DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
3.1 The panel arrangement shall be layed out as an example per the attached
Terminal Cabinet panel sketch (SK -17-F95.01-2). The panel vendor shall be
responsible to ensure that instruments/equipment are accessible for maintenance.
3.2 Lifting lugs or eyes shall be provided to _facilitate panel installation. Lugs or eyes
shall be removable.
• 3.3 All panel cutouts shall be located accurately, correctly sized, made in such a way
that no distortion of the steel surface occurs, and finished in a suitable
workmanlike manner. The locating dimensions of the cutouts shall be within ±
1/32".
G:\HOME\E6828\WLDGOOSE\F28-0i.DOC
•
•
.7
RayfheM Engineers & SPECIFICATION FOR Project No. 77052.001
Constructors FIELD TERMINATION Spec. No. F28-01
ENCLOSURES Page No. '2 of 4
3.4 All devices shall be attached to the internal panels with stainless steel screws.
Adhesives are prohibited except for wireways on surfaces where screws would
penetrate the enclosure.
4. PAINT
4.1 All surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned of all mill scale, grease,, weld splatter,
slag, dirt and. other foreign matter. All burrs shall be removed and all sharp edges
and corners shall be eased.
4.2 All steel surfaces, except those specified to be galvanized, shall be chemically
cleaned as a unit after all welding and fabrication is completed, followed by one
coat of rust -resisting primer and two coats of finish paint.
4.3 Preferred external finish for indoor equipment is light gray, ANSI Z55.1, No. 61.
Vendor's standard finish may be acceptable. However, it must be submitted for
approval.
a. Internal finishes shall be white.
b. Extra paint shall be supplied for field touch-up.
5. NAMEPLATES
Nameplates shall be according to the Engineer's Drawings. Nameplates shall be
engraved lamacoid, black with white core (i.e., white letters). Nameplates shall be
fastened to panels with stainless steel screws. Wiring and terminal blocks shall be
tagged with permanent markers.
6. ELECTRICAL
6.1 All wiring shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the National Electrical
Code and the Engineer's drawings.
6.2 No more than two (2) wires shall be connected at any one terminal on terminal
blocks or equipment.
6.3 All wiring terminating on binding posts shall be terminated with ririg-tongue or
locking fork connectors which firmly grip the conductors and have insulated
compression sleeves to grip wire insulation.
6.4 Wire Color Code
120 VAC
H
Black
N
White
24 VDC
+
Red
-
Black
Instruments
+
White
1-5 VDC, 4-20 mA
-
Black
G:\HOME\E6828\WLDGOOSE\F28-01. DOC
•
•
•
ROTI Engineers & SPECIFICATION FOR Project No. 77052.001
Constructors FIELD TERMINATION. Spec. No. F28-01
ENCLOSURES Page No. 3 of 4
6.5 Wiring from one internal panel device to another internal panel device shall be
wired directly, i.e., without any intermediate terminations, unless otherwise noted
on the drawings. Splicing is prohibited.
6.6 Power wiring internal to the panel shall be stranded copper, minimum No. 14
AWG with 600 volt type SIS or MTW insulation.
6.7 Instrument signal wiring internal to the panel shall be individually shielded twisted
pairs #18 AWG.
6.7.1 Conductors shall be stranded tinned copper.
6.7.2 Primary insulation shall be 15 mils of 90°C PVC.
6.8 Identify both ends of all wiring installed by the panel fabricator with wire numbers
typed on Shrinkmark heat shrink wire labels. Wire numbers shall have the same
designations as the terminal number unless shown otherwise.
6.9 All wire connections shall have a 3" service loop.
7. TERMINAL STRIPS
7.1 Identify all terminals on marker strip. Leave blank the most accessible lugs on the
terminal strips, clear of wiring for field connections. Field terminals for power or
control wires shall accept a minimum of two No. 12 stranded copper wires.
7.2 Field terminals for instrument wires shall accept a minimum of No. 16 AWG.
8. INSPECTION AND TEST
8.1 All Vendor -supplied wiring and devices will be witness -tested in the Vendor's
shop when the panels are 100% complete. Devices and wiring failing to perform
shall be promptly modified, repaired or replaced at the panel fabricator's expense.
8.2 A complete set of red -marked "as -built" drawings shall be provided at the time of
inspection, and will become the Drawings of Record.
9. SHIPMENT
Instruments, relay enclosures, ducts or other heavy items shall be provided with
additional bracing to prevent them from making contact with the panel. Instruments or
other items shall be adequately padded to prevent contact damage to any finished part
of panel or instruments. Items shipped separately inside the panel crating shall be
suitably packed and securely fastened to some supporting base member of the panel.
Shipping stops supplied with the individual instruments shall be checked to determine
that they are properly installed. All shelf mounted instruments shall be shipped
separate from panel in their original shipping cartons.
G:\HOME\E6828\WLDGOOSE\F28-Ol.DOC
•
•
•
RaEngineers & SPECIFICATION FOR Project No. 77052.001
Constructors FIELD TERMINATION. Spec. No. F28-01
ENCLOSURES Page No. 4 of 4
10. VENDOR DOCUMENTATION
10.1 Any drawings, wire lists, or other documentation in addition to that provided by
the Engineer, and required for panel fabrication, are the responsibility of the
panel fabricator. Copies of additional drawings (if required) shall be provided to
the Engineer.
10.2 The fabricator will be responsible for compiling the literature, spare parts lists
and certified drawings for the equipment he purchases. Three (3) copies of this
information shall be submitted to the Engineer.
G:\HOME\E6828\WLDGOOSE\F28-Ol.DOC
•
•
0
Bayfhew Engineers &
. Constructors
CLIENT: Wild Goose Storage JOB/INQUIRY NO.: 77052.001
FACILITY: Wild Goose Gas Storage SPEC NO.: F95.01
LOCATION: Butte County, California
PROJECT SPECIFICATION
For
ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION FOR
POWER DISTRIBUTION CENTER (PDC)
This title page is a record of all revisions of the specification. Each time the specification is
changed, only the new or revised pages are issued. For convenience, the nature of each
revision is briefly noted below.
REV. NO.
DATE
BY
CHECKED
APPROVAL
PAGES
NATURE OF REVISIONS
P1
9/16/97
PK
JGA
i, 1-17
Preliminary for bid
O
2/02/98
HBC
i, 1-15
Conform for Purchase
Rev.
LEAD
LEAD
LEAD
LEAD
LEAD
LEAD
LEAD
LEAD
CON
No.
PROC
MECH
PIPE
CIVIL
STRUC
ARCH
ELEC
I&C
QA
PEM
PM
CDE SUP
P1
--
--
--
--
VV
--
--
WCS
JRW
(JEY
--
-- --
O--
--
--
•-
--
i
--
--
Distribution:
Per Project Distribution Matrix
•
•
[7
Raytheon Engineers &
Constructors
SECTION
POWER DISTRIBUTION
CENTER (PDC)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Job/Inquiry No.
Spec. No. _
Page i
PAGE
1. SCOPE............................................................................................. 1
2. REFERENCES AND STANDARDS......................................................... 1
3. BASIC CONSTRUCTION..................................................................... 2
4. WARNING SIGNS.............................................................................. 9
5. WIRING............................................................................................ 9
6. QUALITY ASSURANCE...................................................................... 10
7. SHIPPING AND HANDLING................................................................. 11
8. DRAWING' AND DATA REQUIREMENTS ............................................... 12
9. SELLER INSTRUCTIONS (ATTACHMENT A) ......................................... 14
g:\home\E6828\wldgoose\F95-01.00C
•
•
Bay&mn Engineers & POWER DISTRIBUTION Job/Inquiry No. 77052.001
Constructors CENTER (PDC) Spec. No. F95.01
Page 1 of 15
1. SCOPE
1.1. This specification describes an insulated, factory -assembled, outdoor power
distribution center (PDC) of heavy duty, fire resistant, noncombustible
construction. PDC shall be an integrated system of mechanical equipment,
power distribution and control apparatus within a weather resistant and
environmentally controlled enclosure. The PDC shall include a Standby
Generator with Automatic Transfer Switch (ATS), MCC's,
DFives , Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) Termination and 1/0
cabinets/racks (the PLC manufacturer will be Allen-Bradley), 24 VDC
battery/charger system, distribution transformers and panelboards, lighting,
grounding, lightning protection, cable tray and raceways as described or
referenced in this specification. PDC shall also include and be shipped with a
dual Instrument Air Compressor System, supplied by others, including two (2)
Instrument air compressors and dual air dryers, but completely wired and
tested by the PDC Seller. As an option, Seller may quote to supply the PLC
equipment and components.
1.2. The PDC shall include complete coordination of engineering, design, drawings,
production, procurement, and testing of all specified items through shipment.
Equipment is to be fabricated, assembled, installed, interwired, and tested in a
factory, under one sole source responsibility, split and shipped to jobsite.
However, where possible, the Seller shall provide shipping split interface
terminals/boxes or connectors. Unloading, storage, handling, installation on
the foundation (provided by others), and retermination of raceways and cabling
(disconnected for shipping) will be ' done by others. However, Seller shall
provide jobsite supervision of the installation by one (1) service engineer for
three (3) days to ensure the safe and successful operation of the equipment
supplied. Instructions for these items to be furnished, if required.
1.3. Provide drawings and specifications as required to obtain necessary building
permits and for construction. All drawings and calculations shall be sealed by
a registered professional engineer of the applicable discipline in the state of
California as required by local or state law. Final record drawings showing as -
fabricated configuration of PDC shall be furnished by the Seller.
2. REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
2.1. The PDC shall be constructed, wired and tested in. accordance with this
specification and applicable portions of the editions of the following standards
and codes in effect on September 21, 1997:
a) National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA)
b) -Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE)
c) American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
d) National Electrical Code (NEC)
e) California Electrical Code (CEC)
f) Occupational Safety and Health Administration Standards (OSHA)
g:\home\E6828\wldgoose\F95-01. DOC
C J
•
C7
Bayf mm Engineers &
Constructors
POWER DISTRIBUTION Job/Inquiry No. 77052.001
CENTER (PDC) Spec. No. F95.01
Page 2 of' 15
g) American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM)
h) National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
i) Uniform Building Code (UBC)
j) American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC)
k) Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. (ICEA)
1) Structural Welding Code (AWS D1.1) '
m) Metal Building Manufacturers Association (MBMA)
n) Applicable Local Codes and Ordinances, including the California Energy
Code.
o) Uniform Fire Code (UFC)
p) Underwriters Laboratories (UL): Components shall be UL listed and
labeled, where available.
2.2. If there is an apparent discrepancy between any of the requirements of this
Specification and the standards and requirements stipulated in Paragraph 2.1
above, or of any applicable statute, ordinance or code, then the most stringent
requirements shall apply. The Buyer shall be apprised of all apparent
discrepancies for his resolution.
2.3. Each PDC shall be designed and constructed in accordance with the following
specifications as applicable:
a) Specification No. 95.01 A, "Scope of Work for Power Distribution -Center"
b) Specification No. F00.04, "Electrical Specifications for Packaged
Mechanical Equipment"
c) Specification No. D59.02, "NEMA Frame Induction Motors"
d) Specification No. F04.01, "480 Volt Motor Control Center Specifications/
Data Sheets
e) Specification No. G52, "Instrumentation and Control Requirements for
Packaged Mechanical Equipment"
3. BASIC CONSTRUCTION
3.1. Environmental Conditions
Each PDC shall be designed and constructed to operate successfully under the
site environmental conditions indicated.
Elevations, Feet 68 Above Sea Level
Ambient Temperature - Maximum 115 Degrees F
Minimum 20 Degrees F
g Ahome\E6828\wldgooee\F95-01. DOC
•
•
•
Rayf w Engineers & POWER DISTRIBUTION Job/Inquiry No. 77052.001
Constructors CENTER (PDC) Spec. No. . F95.01
Page 3 of 15
Relative Humidity, % 900 for design
Seismic The building is located in Uniform Building
Code Seismic Zone 3. The equipment,
support structures and appurtenances shall
be designed in accordance with the
Uniform Building Code, using an importance
factor of 1.0.
Wind Load ASCE 7.88 (formerly ANSI A58.1 '1982)
design wind velocity of 95 mph, using
Exposure C and an importance factor of
1.0.
Snow Load NA
3.2. Design Criteria
3.2.1. Buildings shall be dust -tight and weatherproof and shall not leak due
to wind -driven rain, sleet or snow.
3.2.2. Buildings shall be shipped with only longitudinal shipping splits; i.e.,
double -wide construction with full length shipping units.
3.3. Facilities
Each PDC shall include all lighting, convenience outlets, heating, ventilation,
air conditioning equipment, and power supplies necessary for operation and
maintenance of the equipment.
3.3.1. Location of lighting fixtures shall be coordinated with equipment
arrangement and cable tray and conduit locations to minimize
interferences and provide uniform illumination. Lighting design shall
provide maintained minimum illumination levels of 20 foot candles
horizontally at the floor level, and 50 foot candles vertically five feet
above the floor level.
Fluorescent lighting fixtures inside the PDC shall be surface or
pendant mounted, totally enclosed with an acrylic lens. (diffuser)
enclosure with low noise, UL listed, high -efficiency ballast, and shall
be Holophane Series 7100 or 7400 or Buyer approved equal. A
three-way switch for each system shall be provided at each door for
lighting control.
3.3.2. Exterior lighting shall be provided above each door and shall be
photocell controlled. Fixtures shall be 70 -watt, high pressure
sodium, Division 2, vapor tight and guarded. Fixtures shall be
Holophane Petrolux series or Buyer approved equal.
g: \home\E6828\wldgoose\F95-01. DOC
•
0
•
RayMheon Engineers & POWER DISTRIBUTION Job/Inquiry No. 77052.001
Constructors CENTER (PDC) Spec. No. F95.01
Page 4 of -15
3.3.3. Exit signs shall be provided over each door. Fixtures shall be self -
illuminating, non -electric, with light provided by a hermetically
sealed, tritium activated light tube, Isolite or Buyer approved equal.
3.3.4. Emergency lighting inside the PDC (layout by Seller with Buyer
approval) shall be included and shall consist of rechargeable battery
powered incandescent fixtures with aimable heads. The emergency
lighting shall include batteries (for at least 90 minutes), charging
equipment, automatic transfer, test switch and lamps, and shall be
connected to an isolated and separate 20 -amp, 115 -volt circuit.
Emergency lighting shall illuminate all major electrical equipment.
3.3.5. One interior 20 -amp, 120 -volt, single phase duplex receptacle shall
be installed at each door near the light switch. Additional
receptacles shall be installed as shown on GA sketch.
3.3.6. PDC shall be provided with electric heating, ventilating, air
conditioning (HVAC) equipment. The units shall be wall mounted
and provide a temperature range between 90° F and 50° F.
3.3.7. Power & lighting panelboard(s) shall be provided with the PDC.
Panelboard(s) shall be 120/208 -volt, three-phase, four -wire with
main circuit breakers and buses as shown on the one -line diagrams.
Bolt -on branch circuit breakers shall be provided as required for the
PDC loads with single pole 20 amp circuit breakers provided in all
remaining spaces.
3.3.8. Power & lighting transformer(s) shall be 480-120/208 volt, three-
phase, indoor, with four 2'h % taps, two above normal voltage and
two below. Ratings shall be as shown on the one -line diagrams.
Each transformer shall be supplied power from an individual circuit
breaker from the MCC within the PDC. Transformer(s) shall be
UL -listed with 220°C insulation systems and 115°C temperature
rise.
3.3.9. A grounding system shall be provided, grounding all of the electrical
equipment and the power distribution center frame. It shall connect
to each end of the ground bus in each assembly of equipment. The
grounding conductor shall be green, insulated, stranded copper and
shall be connected to NEMA two hole ground pads at each exterior
end of each PDC section for external connections by others. The
ground conductor shall be sized in accordance with NEC Table 250-
95, and shall not be less than No. 4/0 AWG.
A 4/0 Green insulated cable about 6" above the equipment, routed
around the inside perimeter and connected to the stainless steel
exterior ground pads included in the base will be used in the PDC for
grounding.
g:\home\E6828\wldgoose\F95-01. DOC
•
0
•
Bayf m Engineers & POWER DISTRIBUTION Job/Inquiry No. 77052.001
COIlStrUCtOrS CENTER (PDC) Spec. No. F95.01
Page.5 of 15
Ground bars shall be installed at selected locations within the PDC
for equipment grounding (4 ground bars per PDC section) and
interconnected with the PDC equipment grounding system. Ground
bars shall be '/4 "x 2"x 18", Cadweld #B542A004 or Buyer approved
equal.
Instrument signal grounds shall be interconnected between PLC and
instrumentation and control cabinets and shall be isolated from
cabinet grounds. The instrument signal ground system will be
connected to the ground grid at a single point by others.
An equipment grounding conductor shall be installed in the raceway
for all , 120 VAC circuits; the raceway system shall not be used as
the sole equipment ground.
3.4. Fire Detection/Protection
3.4.1. Fire Alarm and detection is by others.
3.4.2. Space shall be provided inside the PDC near each doorway for
Buyer's installation of a portable fire extinguisher.
3.5. Base
3.5.1. The base shall be structurally rigid for electrical equipment support
and provided with lifting and jacking attachments for lifting and
jacking the PDC during transportation and installation. Installation
of the PDC shall be accomplished by driving between the concrete
pier supports, jacking, removing the transport vehicle, and lowering
into place. The base shall be a welded structural steel assembly
designed to limit deflection to 0.2 inches per 12 feet of span over
the length and width of the building.
3.5.2. The base shall be designed for installation on concrete pier supports
4' above grade. Piers to support PDC shall be located at PDC
suppliers support points. PDC supplier is to provide anchor bolt size
and pattern for tie -down of PDC on piers. Support piers layout will
be made to match PDC support base.
3.5.3. The floor shall be 1/4 -inch steel plate firmly welded (in accordance
with AWS D1.1) to the base. It shall be adequately supported
between structural members and designed for an average live
loading of 250 pounds per square foot in addition to equipment
weight and to minimize vibration. It shall be sufficiently flat (free
from bows and warps) to provide stable support for the equipment
bases as well as a smooth walking surface. There shall be no
visible joints in the floor except at the shipping break.
g:\home\E6626\wldgoose\F95-Ot .DOC
•
0
Raytheon Engineers &
Constructors
POWER DISTRIBUTION Job/Inquiry No. 77052.001
CENTER (PDC) Spec. No. . F95.01
Page 6 of 15
3.5.4. Outgoing connections will exit through the floor or wall. A cutout
with gasketed cover plate shall be provided under each vertical
structure and at other points designated on the attached sketch for
field installed conduit openings. All bolt holes in the floor for
securing cover plates shall be tapped.
Framed openings shall be provided at all cable tray and conduit
penetrations through interior and exterior walls.
3.5.5. Perimeter structural members and floor supports shall be positioned
such that they provide the required strength and rigidity without
blocking access to the conduit/cable entry plates.
3.6. Walls
3.6.1. Outer side walls shall be made from 12 -gauge galvanized steel
(minimum thickness); inner side walls shall be made from 16 -gauge
steel (minimum thickness). Double wall construction is required.
Designated walls shown on the layouts shall be removable for
adding future PDC and/or equipment. Reinforcement for wall
mounted devices shall be steel, provided as required to support the
intended load.
3.6.2. The floor (base), walls, ceiling, doors, and access panels shall be
insulated with an equivalent of 3% inches of foamed -in-place
polyurethane or equivalent insulation having a maximum "U" factor
in accordance with the California Building and Energy Code. No.
16 -gauge sheet metal shall be installed over the insulation to
provide a finished surface. All must comply with the State of
California Energy Code.
3.7. Roof
3.7.1. The roof shall be steel, 12 gauge minimum and shall consist of
formed panels. Panel side flanges shall be formed upward. A rain
guard shall cover the two joining side flanges of adjacent panels and
shall be secured with bolts. Panel width shall not exceed 36
inches. Panels shall be bolted in place. The design of the roof
panel at its juncture with the wall shall be such that any exposed
bolts cannot provide a leakage path into the structure interior.
3.7.2. The roof pitch shall be n --R.. . of "' the manufacturer's
standard of 3/8-inch/foot for moisture runoff. Minimum roof live
load shall be 20 Ib/ft2.
3.7.3. Fascia trim shall be provided.
• 3.7.4. The roof shall not be penetrated for installation of pipe, vents or
conduit.
g:\home\E6828\wldgoose\F95-01.00C
C
0
.7
Bayf con Engineers & POWER DISTRIBUTION Job/Inquiry No. 77052.001
Constructors CENTER (PDC) Spec. No. F95.01
Page 7 of 15
3.8. Ceilin
The ceiling shall consist of 14 gauge minimum formed steel panels. Each
panel shall have the same width as its corresponding roof panel and shall be
welded to that panel during fabrication. It shall be designed to add structural
strength to the roof panel, to retain the insulation, and to provide a smooth
ceiling surface. The ceiling shall be perpendicular to the walls, i.e., it shall not
have the pitch of the roof. ,
3.9. Exterior Doors
3.9.1. Each structure shall have a 36 -inch by 80 -inch personnel door and a
dual equipment door (72) inches wide by (108) inches high.
3.9.2. All doors shall swing a minimum of 105° and shall open outwardly.
3.9.3. Doors shall be 1-3/4 inches thick, flush type, constructed of steel
galvanized sheets, insulated and deadened. The top and bottom.rail
shall be formed with reinforcing channels and shall be mortised and
reinforced for hinges and locks. Doors shall have one inch insulated
half-lites glazed with 1/4 -inch thick tempered safety glass and one-
half inch air space.
Door frames shall be fabricated of 12 -gauge galvanized steel and
shop painted to match the color of the wall panels.
3.9.4. Doors shall be complete with hinges, threshold, closure,
weatherstripping and necessary trim. All doors shall be equipped
with panic hardware. A minimum of three hinges, 4" x 4" and type
304 or 316 stainless steel, shall be installed on each door.
3.9.5. Doors shall be provided with gasketed joints to prevent ingress of
fine sand or dust and the loss of conditioned air. Gaskets shall be
held in metal retainers on channels. A drip shield shall be provided
above each door.
3.9.6. . Locks shall be mortise -type lock set cylinders and master keyed
alike. The keys for any one building shall operate the locks in any
other building. The Seller shall furnish a minimum of two keys for
each lock set.
3.10. Stens and Platforms
Access platforms and stairs, exterior to the PDC Building, shall be furnished by
the Seller. The Seller shall cooperate with the Buyer in the design. Connection
holes, in the PDC base, for tying into the platform steel shall be provided in the
steel by the Seller.
g: \home\E6828\w1dgoose\F95-01. DOC
•
0
•
Raytheon Engineers & POWER DISTRIBUTION Job/Inquiry No. 77052.001
Constructors CENTER (PDC) Spec. No. F95.01
Page 8 of 15
3.11. Battery Area
3.11.1. Battery/Charger system shall be furnished as specified on the
Battery/Charger System data sheets.
3.11.2. Battery Area shall be properly vented per UBC, (e.g. positive fans
and vents, at ceiling level), to eliminate Hydrogen accumulation
problems as appropriate for the type of batteries furnished.
3.12. Mechanical Equipment Room
3.12.1. A Mechanical Equipment room shall be provided as shown on the
layout plan. Ventilation for this room will be from ceiling mounted
ventilation fans.
3.12.2. Framed openings for the passage of Standby Generator diesel fuel
lines and exhaust stack and for the Instrument Air lines from
equipment exterior to the PDC shall be provided by the Seller. The
layout plan depicts the necessary openings.
3.13. Paintin4
3.13.1. Exterior of PDC tebe painted —per—emeer-pt fFeFn SpeeifieR
H10.01, Shep Applied �eetings will be color matched using
Benjamin Moore color. #3465-J1, Case Power White.
3.13.2. Interior of PDC
will be Ameron White
manufacturer's standard paint and color.
3.14. Floor Coverinq
3.14.1. The floor shall be painted with a non-skid enamel. The color shall
be dark gray.
3.14.2. The floor of the battery area shall be painted with acid -resistant
paint. The color shall be dark gray.
3.15. Assembly
3.15.1. All bolts shall be zinc plated steel. All bolts shall employ flat and
lock washers.
3.15.2. Every exterior joint between panel and the floor plate shall be
liberally caulked with a non -hardening, non -aging caulking
compound such as Mortite or its equivalent prior to bolting. After
the bolts are securely tightened the joints shall be dressed to
remove excess caulking.
9:\home\E6828\wldgoose\F95-O1.DOC
•
C7
•
Baomn Engineers & POWER DISTRIBUTION Job/Inquiry No. 77052.001
Constructors CENTER (PDC) Spec. No. F95.01
Page 9 of 15
4. WARNING SIGNS
Each exterior door of the PDC shall have a permanently attached warning sign with
the words "Danger High Voltage" and conforming to National Safety Council
specifications.
5. WIRING
5.1. The interconnecting control cables within the PDC shall be 600 volt, multi -
conductor, tray rated Type XHHW, No. 14 AWG minimum, color coded in
accordance with ICEA Method 1, Option 2. All conductors to be stranded
copper. Single pair shielded cables shall be 600V, Type 1850, No. 16 AWG
Dekoron or engineer Buyer approved equal.
5.2. Interconnecting wiring within the building shall be installed in IMC or RGS
conduit, cable tray or manufactured wireways as applicable.
5.3. Wiring for building facilities shall be in IMC or RGS conduit and segregated
from all other wiring.
5.4. Where tray systems are provided, the trays shall be 6" deep, galvanized steel,
NEMA 20C rated, complete with box connections, risers and other devices
necessary for a continuous system. Ladder type tray shall be furnished with a
maximum of 9 -inch rung spacing." Solid bottom trays shall be provided for
analog instrumentation systems.
5.5. Separate raceways shall be provided for 480 volt power cables, control and
digital instrumentation cables and analog instrumentation cables. 24VDC
power and control and instrument cables shall be segregated from AC cables.
5.6. Additional wiring requirements are described in Specification No. F92.01,
"Electrical Specifications for Packaged Mechanical Equipment".
5.7. PLC 1/0 Wiring.
5.7.1. Wiring from the 480V motor starters to 1/0 racks/cabinets shall be
as follows:
a) 480V MCC starters - 7/C #14 AWG, XHHW, 600V tray cable to
the 1/0 racks/cabinets.
b) 480V MCC starters - 3/C #14 AWG, XHHW, 600V tray cable to
the ESD cabinet.
NOTE: Power or control wiring from the MCC motor starter buckets
to 1/0 racks or VFD's installed within the MCC enclosure may be
single conductor, per the MCC data sheets.
g: \home\E6828\w1dgoose\F95-01. DOC
•
0
Rayf mn Engineers &
Constructors
POWER DISTRIBUTION Job/Inquiry No. 77052.001
CENTER (PDC) Spec. No. F95.01
Page 10 of 15
5.7.2. Interface control wiring shall be provided between the PLC and the
Battery/Charger system alarms, MCC alarms, Standby Generator
alarms and Automatic Transfer Switch alarms, Instrument Air
System alarms, fire alarm panel alarms, and HVAC system alarms.
6. QUALITY ASSURANCE
6.1. General
The manufacturer shall provide a quality assurance program through which the
PDC, accessories, and all equipment are produced, installed, tested, and
otherwise comply with the intent of the specifications, applicable codes,
standards and manufacturer's recommendations.
6.2. PDC Inspection and Test
6.2.1. Equipment shall be subject to inspection and test by the Buyer's
representatives who shall be granted access at reasonable times to
any and all parts of the Seller's plant engaged in the manufacture or
processing of this equipment. The Seller shall notify the Buyer at
least ten working days in advance of the date inspection can be
made. If for any reason the inspection date should be set back, the
Seller shall contact the Buyer immediately. Equipment shall not be
crated until it has been inspected and released for packaging.
6.2.2. Each power distribution center will be visually inspected at the
factory to ensure compliance with the specifications, equipment
requirements, and the Purchase Order.
6.3. Testing
6.3.1. Testing shall be done after assembly of all units of equipment inside
the PDC, using wiring which will form part of the final installation.
6.3.2. When the design uses split sections, the Seller shall fully assemble
the PDC in the factory and test the completely assembled unit to
prove the total integrity of the design.
6.3.3. Testing of the enclosure consists of testing the various systems,
such as 480 VAC systems, 120/208 or 240 VAC systems and 24-
vdc systems, lighting system and the HVAC system (but not limited
to these).
6.3.4. All electrical equipment housed in the PDC shall be tested in
accordance with the applicable equipment specifications.
06.3.5. Testing procedures and results shall be documented in writing to the
Buyer for approval. Detailed testing procedures shall be submitted
to the Buyer for review, a minimum of ten days in advance of any
testing or according to the vendor drawing and data commitment,
8:\home\E6828\w1dgoose\F95-01. DOC
•
•
L_J
Raytheon Engineers &
Constructors
7. SHIPPING AND HANDLING
POWER DISTRIBUTION Job/Inquiry No. 77052.001
CENTER (PDC) Spec. No. F95.01
Page 11 of 15
7.1. Each building section and incorporated equipment shall be shipped as one
completely assembled unit. Any items shipped separately shall be clearly
tagged and the tags shall be shown on the drawings and installation
instructions.
7.2. All throats and openings shall be fitted with covers or plugs and made
weatherproof. Shipping split openings shall be adequately covered, crated,
and braced.
7.3. All equipment on and within the building shall be adequately secured and
protected against damage during loading, transit, and unloading. Shelf
instruments, protective relays, etc., shall be properly identified and returned to
their original cartons.
7.4. Each building shall be marked with its respective tag number, purchase order
and item number in accordance with instructions issued with the Purchase
Order.
7.5. Means for lifting the complete power distribution center shall be provided.
Lifting points shall be clearly marked.
7.6. The bearing surfaces of the lifting means shall. be free from sharp edges.
Facilities for guying the building shall be provided.
7.7. The base shall permit sliding or rolling (using pipe rollers) in the directions of
both center lines of the power distribution center and provisions shall be made
for pulling the building in these directions.
7.8. Jacking facilities shall be located near the extreme ends of the junction of the
base segments. 'The jack ports or lugs shall be so designed that they can be
removed after the unit is in place.
7.9. Additional shipping and handling requirements that appear in the individual
equipment specifications shall be strictly observed.
7.10. The Seller shall be responsible for determining all shipping limitations and
restrictions and obtaining all permits for transportation. The Seller shall
provide a transportation plan for review.
7.11. Shipment shall be via freight company open truck equipped with air ride
suspension.
7.12. One set of all drawings and installation, operation and maintenance manuals
shall be shipped with the PDC. One set of "as -built" (Construction Record)
electrical connection. diagrams shall also be included and suitably marked as
"As -Built Drawings."
g:\home\E6626\wldgoose\F95-01. DOC
•
0
•
Rayftw Engineers & POWER DISTRIBUTION Job/Inquiry No. 77052.001
COIIStrUCtOrS CENTER (PDC) Spec. No. F95.01
Page 12 of 15
8. DRAWING AND DATA REQUIREMENTS
8.1. The Seller shall provide complete scaled drawings for the PDC. Typical
drawings depicting material, equipment, views, dimensions and installations
not specifically applicable to the building are unacceptable.
8.2. Detailed instructions for field handling, installation and assembly of the PDC
shall be provided. ,
8.3. The Seller shall provide a master drawing index for the PDC. The index shall
be a listing of all drawings applicable to the PDC, facilities equipment, and
major electrical equipment installed in or associated with the PDC, e.g., MCC,
Standby Generator, transformers, etc.
8.4. The drawings shall include structural details, physical arrangements,
schematics, single -line diagrams, detailed panelboard schedules with all
building circuit loads filled in; wiring and interconnection diagrams and any
other drawings required for the Buyer to review and approve the components
and equipment being furnished.
8.5. Drawing and documentation requirements for major electrical equipment are
contained in the specific equipment specifications.
8.6. As -built drawings of record shall be provided showing all modifications
performed during factory installation and assembly.
8.7. Complete drawings and instructions shall � be provided for operation,
adjustment, maintenance and repair of the HVAC system.
8.8. Complete structural calculations shall be provided detailing load reactions,
seismic and wind design considerations.
8.9. Foundation plans for each building shall show required means of anchoring the
structure to the foundations, as well as location and size of openings under
each structure for cable/conduit entrance.
8.10. Outline drawings for each building shall show total weight (vertical and lateral)
and overall dimensions as well as location and details of framed openings,
shipping split, jacking positions and lifting ears for each section.
8.11. A detailed bill of material shall be provided.
8.12. Structural drawings for each building shall show details of construction of the
base, wall panels, roof panels, doors, wireways and battery compartments.
8.13. Drawings, data and instruction manuals shall be provided in accordance with
Bidder's Drawing and Data Commitment Form (Inquiry Package only) and
Vendor's Drawing and Data Requirement Form (Purchase Order only).
g:\home\E6828\wldgoose\F95-01. DOC
F--
C7
•
Engineers & POWER DISTRIBUTION Job/Inquiry No. 77052.001
Constructors CENTER (PDC) Spec. No. F95.01
Page 13 of 15
8.14. A complete spare parts recommendation based on the total purchase order is
required within 30 days after receipt of the order. Spare parts
recommendations shall include:
a) A complete spare parts list, including parts location diagrams or drawings.
b) Lists ofro iced spare parts as recommended by the Seller to be on hand
during start-up and first year's operation.
8.15. Technical product data for HVAC, heaters, fixtures, etc., shall be furnished for
Buyer approval.
8.16. Seller to furnish a list of material for the PDC electrical and mechanical
products with the warranties these products will have.
9 Ahome\E6828\wldgoose\F95-01. DOC
E
J
•
Ba0heon Engineers &
Constructors
1. SELLER TO PROVIDE
POWER DISTRIBUTION
CENTER (PDC)
SELLER INSTRUCTIONS
ATTACHMENT A
Job/Inquiry No. 77052.001
Spec. No. F95.01
Page 14 of 15
As part of the quotation, the Seller shall furnish drawings and descriptive material
covering the general design, construction, operation and special features of the
Power Distribution Center and Seller provided equipment and accessories. The
documents shall include at least the following:
1.1. Typical floor plans, cross sections, overall dimensions, and approximate
weights with istalled equipment.
1.2. Outline and foundation requirements.
1.3. Catalog and descriptive literature of all fire protection devices and other
miscellaneous devices.
1.4. A list of equipment shipped separately with field installation requirements.
1.5. All exceptions to specifications.
1.6. Details on alternate designs proposed, complete with typical construction
drawings, bill of material and descriptive literature.
1.7. Any recommended changes in equipment arrangement and dimensions
affording space or cost savings.
1.8. System descriptions and catalog information on all components for the
following equipment:
1.8.1. Motor Control Centers
1.8.2. Battery/Charger System
1.8.3. PLC Termination and 1/0 Cabinets
1.8.4. Standby Generator and ATS
1.8.5. Facility systems, including lighting, HVAC, etc.
2. AVAILABILITY OF PARTS AND SERVICE
is2.1. Location of nearest factories from which replacement parts will be available
for all major equipment supplied.
g Ahome\E6828\wldgooee\F95-01. DOC
0
0
Rapmn Engineers & POWER DISTRIBUTION Job/Inquiry No. 77052.001
Constructors CENTER (PDC) Spec. No. F95.01
Page 15 of 15
2.2. Location of Seller's service headquarters nearest to Butte County, California.
2.3.. Number of qualified service engineers permanently employed at each service
headquarters.
3. FOR ATTACHMENT B, SEE SPECIFICATION F95.01A.
g:\home\E6828\wldgoose\F95-01. DOC
4
0
A
A0
r�
0
R"eon Engineers &
Constructors
CLIENT: Wild Goose Storage JOB/INQUIRY NO.: 77052.001
FACILITY: Wild Goose Gas Storage SPEC NO.: F30.01
LOCATION: Butte County, California
PROJECT SPECIFICATION
For
,y
FIBER OPTIC CABLE ,
Thi over sheet is a record of all revisions of the specification. Each time the specification is changed, only
the'hew or revised pages are issued. For convenience, the nature of each revision is briefly noted below.
REV. NO.
DATE
BY
CHECKED
APPROVAL
PAGES
NATURE OF REVISIONS
P1
11/5/97
HBC
RAS
PK
All
Preliminary for Bid
O
3/09/98
JEY
j
5 & 6
Issued for Construction
�!.
Changed Depth
Added Option for Cable in
PVC Conduit
�OFESS/pyo
QQLO
C
E15666. a,
Zu
Enp, D
CTRIC OAC\\
OF CAIN
Rev.
RE
RE
RE
RE
RE
RE
RE
RE
No.
PROC
MECH
PIPE
CIVIL
STRUC
ARCH
ELEC
I&C
QA
PEM
PM
CDS
CS
Client
P1
--
--
--
--
--
PK
JRW
DBR
O--
--
--
--
--
--
1
Distribution:
Per Project Distribution Matrix
•
Rayfhem Engineers & SPECIFICATION
C0nstructoIs FOR
FIBER OPTIC CABLE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Project Number 77052.001
Spec. No. F30.01
Page i
SECTION PAGE
1. SCOPE ...... :........................................................................ I........ 1
2. REFERENCES AND STANDARDS .................................................. 1
3. DESIGN, CONSTRUCTION/FABRICATION & INSTALLATION ........... 1
4. TESTING AND INSPECTION......................................................... 7
5. PREPARATION FOR SHIPMENT
G:U10ME\E6828%W LDGOOSE\F30-O1.DOC
•
•
Bayfhem Engineers & SPECIFICATION Project No. 77052.001
Constructors FOR Spec. No. F30.01
FIBER OPTIC CABLE Page No. 1 of 7
1. SCOPE
This specification covers the requirements for single mode, armored fiber optic cable
for underground installation. The fiber optic cable will run approximately 4.5 miles.
Two cables will be installed, each connecting up to two modems (supplied by others)
on each end. Each cable shall consist of 4 fibers. The modems used will be Phoenix
Digital OCM-DPR-13-D-ST-SM. They are single mode operation. See Attachment A for
information. The difference between receiver sensitivity - 32 dbm, and transmit launch
power - 18 dbm, is 14 dbm. The fiber optic cable installation between the two
modems must, at a minimum, fit this installation sensitivity requirement. The
Subcontractor is to furnish, install and test the fiber optic cable. If conflicts between
this specification and the Wild Goose Gas Storage pipeline construction specification
are found, this specification shall take precedence. If this specification takes
precedence and is in violation of a code or requirement, the Subcontractor shall consult
the manufacturer to resolve the conflict.
2. REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
All fiber optic cable specified herein shall be manufactured and tested in accordance
with the latest applicable parts of the following Codes and Standards unless specified
otherwise herein.
2.1 ANSI - American National Standards Institute
2.2 ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials
2.3 IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
2.4 UL - Underwriters' Laboratories, Incorporated
2.5 NESC - National Electrical Safety Code
2.6 TIA/EIA - Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronics Industry
Association
2.7 NEC - National Electric Code
3. DESIGN, CONSTRUCTION/FABRICATION AND INSTALLATION
3.1 Fiber Characteristics
3.1.1 All fibers in the cable must be usable fibers and meet required
specifications.
3.1.2 Each optical fiber shall consist of a doped silica core surrounded by a
concentric silica cladding. The fiber shall be matched clad design.
3.1.3 SINGLE -MODE: The single mode fiber utilized in the cable specified
herein shall conform to the following specifications:
G:\HOME\E6828\WLDGOOSE\F30-Ol.DOC
4
C11
is
Bayfhem Engineers &
Constructors
a.
0.
SPECIFICATION
FOR
FIBER OPTIC CABLE
Project No. 77052.001
Spec. No. F30.01
Page No. 2 of 7
The fiber optic cable shall have a maximum attenuation loss of
0.5 db/km.
The wave length (k) shall be: 1270,,:5 X<_ 1340,m.
3.1.4 The coating shall be a dual -layered, UV -cured acrylate applied by the
fiber manufacturer.
3.1.5 The coating shall be mechanically strippable.
3.2 Specifications for Outdoor Cables
3.2.1. Optical fibers shall be placed inside a loose buffer tube.
3.2.2 The fibers shall not adhere to the inside of the buffer tube.
3.2.3 Each fiber shall be distinguishable by means of color coding according to
the following:
1.
Blue
5.
Slate
9. -
Yellow
2.
Orange
6.
White
10.
Violet
3.
Green
7.
Red
11.
Rose
4.
Brown
8.
Black
12.
Aqua
These colors shall meet TIA/EIA-598-A, "Optical Fiber Cable Color
Coding."
3.2.4 Buffer tubes containing fibers shall be color coded with distinct and
recognizable colors according to the following:
1.
Blue
5.
Slate
9.
Yellow
2.
-Orange
6.
White
10.
Violet
3.
Green
7.
Red
11.
Rose
4.
Brown
8.
Black
12.
Aqua
These colors shall meet TIA/EIA-598-A, "Optical Fiber Cable Color
Coding."
3.2.5 In buffer tubes containing multiple fibers, the colors shall be stable across
the specified storage and operating temperature range and not subject to
fading or smearing onto each other or into the gel filling material. Colors
shall not cause fibers to stick together.
3.2.6 Buffer tubes shall be kink -resistant within the specified minimum bend
radius.
• I 3.2.7 Fillers may be included in the cable core to lend symmetry to the cable
cross-section where. needed.
G:\HO ME\E6828\W LDGOOSE\F90.01.DOC
0
I Rayfhew Engineers &
Constructors
SPECIFICATION Project No. 77052.001
FOR. Spec. No. F30.01
FIBER OPTIC CABLE Page No. 3 of 7
3. 2.8 The central anti -buckling member shall consist of a glass reinforced
plastic rod. The purpose of the central member is to prevent buckling
of the cable.
3.2.9 Each buffer tube shall be filled with a non -hygroscopic, non-nutritive to
fungus, electrically non-conductive, homogenous gel. The gel shall be
free from dirt and foreign matter. The gel shall be readily removable
with conventional non-toxic solvents.
3.2.10 Buffer tubes shall be stranded around a central member using the
reverse oscillation, or "S -Z", stranding process.
3.2.11 The cable core shall contain a water -blocking material. The water
blocking material shall be non-nutritive to fungus, electrically non-
conductive and homogenous. It shall also be free from dirt and foreign
matter and shall be readily removable with conventional non-toxic
solvents.
3.2.12
'Binders shall be applied with sufficient tension to secure the buffer
tubes to the central member without crushing the buffer tubes. The
binders shall be non -hygroscopic, non -wicking and dielectric with low
shrinkage.
• 3.2.13
The cable shall contain at least one ripcord under ,the sheath for easy
sheath removal.
3.2.14 .
Tensile strength shall be provided by a combination of high tensile
strength dielectric yarns.
3.2.15.
The high tensile strength dielectric yarns shall be helically stranded
evenly around the cable core.
3.2.16
Armored cables shall have armor composed of a corrugated steel tape,
plastic -coated on both sides for corrosion resistance, and shall be
applied with an overlapping seam with the corrugations in register. All
armor splices shall be recoated with plastic to maintain the armor's
corrosion resistance. The outer jacket shall be applied over the
corrugated steel tape armor. The outer jacket shall be a medium
density polyethylene with a minimum nominal jacket thickness of 1.25
mm. The polyethylene shall contain carbon black to provide ultraviolet
light protection and shall not promote the growth of fungus.
3.2.17
The jacket or sheath shall be free of holes, splits, and blisters.
3.2.18
The cable jacket shall contain no metal elements and shall be of a
consistent thickness.
• 3.2.19
Cable jackets shall be marked with manufacturer's name, sequential
meter or foot markings, year of manufacture, and a telecommunication
handset symbol, as required by Section 350G of the National Electrical
G:\HOME\E6828\WLDGOOSE\F30.01.DOC
t
0
•
•
Raytheon Engineers & SPECIFICATION Project No. 77052.001
Constructors FOR Spec. No. F30.01
FIBER OPTIC CABLE Page No. 4 of 7
Safety Code (NESC). The actual length of the cable shall be within -
0/+1% of the length markings. The marking shall be in contrasting
color to the cable jacket. The height of the marking shall be
approximately 2.5 mm.
3.2.20 The maximum pulling tension shall be 2700 N (808 Ibf) during
installation (short term) and 890 N (200 lbf) long term installed.
3.2.21 The shipping, storage, installation and operating temperature range of
the cable shall be suitable for the site conditions of 1 15°F maximum to
20°F minimum.
3.3 Installation
3.3.1 General
a. All splices and terminations shall be prepared by a person with at
least five (5) years experience installing, splicing and terminating
fiber optic cables.
b. This procedure provides general information for the installation of
Optical Cable in direct buried applications. These instructions are
intended as guidelines only, as each installation will be influenced
by local conditions. If specific instructions by the cable
manufacturer are in conflict with these instructions, the.engineer
shall be consulted for resolution.
C. Fiber optic cable is a high-capacity transmission medium with
qualities and characteristics which can be degraded when it is
subjected to excessive pulling tension, sharp bends, and crushing
forces. The number of splices in a fiber cable route should be
minimized to reduce transmission losses and splicing labor costs.
d. The Subcontractor shall provide drawings for approval showing
the location and depth of cable, splices and above -ground markers.
at every part of the route. The drawings may be combined with
pipeline drawings or separate, but shall be coordinated with the
pipeline drawings. These drawings shall be. as -built to show cable
location within ± 6 inches after installation has been completed.
3.3.2 Cable Precautions Specifications
a. The maximum pulling tension for armored cable is 2,700 Newtons
(600 lbs).
b. Maximum long-term crush forces are as follows:
G:\HOME\E6828\WLDGOOSE\F30-0t .DOC
Armored cable 100N/cm (57.1 'Ib/in)
L'
0
•
Raytheon Engineers & SPECIFICATION
Constructors FOR
FIBER OPTIC CABLE
3.3.3 Cable Bend Radius
Project No. 77052.001
Spec. No. F30.01
Page No. 5 of 7
a. Cable specification sheets shall be provided which list the
minimum cable bend radius both "During Installation" and "Free
Bend Installed" (the minimum bend radius of the .cable following
installation over the life span of the cable. In the event these
sheets are not available, the following formulas may be used to
determine general guidelines for installing Fiber Optic Cable:
b. For armored cables, multiply 20 times (20X) the cable diameter
to arrive .at a working bend radius for armored cable during
installation. The working bend radius can be safely reduced to
15 times the cable diameter; however, some minor, cosmetic
wrinkling of armored, cables may occur. This wrinkling will not
affect cable performance. .
Cable Diameter. = 11.8 mm (0.48in)
20 x 11.8 mm = 236 mm (9.2 in)
Minimum Working Bend Radius = 23.6 cm (9.2 in)
3.3.4 Cable Depth
The depth at which buried cable can be placed will vary with local
conditions. Minimum cover shall be in accordance with the following:
Minimum Cover of Buried Fiber Optic Cables
Location
Wetlands, Sta. 10 + 00 to Sta 66 + 00
Ricefields, Sta. 66 + 00 to Sta 184 + 00
West Liberty Read, Sta 184 + 00 to Sta.
239+94
All canal and water crossings
3.3.5 Splice Points
Death
80 On (77e
3 feet
36 in (91 eff4
5 feet
aO en (77 eK4
4 feet
7 feet
a. The Subcontractor shall plan the cable installation to determine
the optimuM splice point locations. In order to reach a splicing
vehicle, each splice point should include a minimum of 10 meters
(33 ft.) of cable on both cable ends.
b. All splice, points shall be installed in a direct buried splice
enclosure which will be provided by the Subcontractor. At splice
enclosures, cable slack shall be placed horizontally in the hole.
G:\HOME\E6828kWLDGOOSEkF30-0i.DOC
V
A
C7
•
•
Raytheon Engineers & SPECIFICATION
Constructors FOR
FIBER OPTIC CABLE
Project No. 77052.001
Spec. No. F30.01
Page No. 6 of 7
C. Cable distance between splice points should be accurately
determined to minimize waste. If drawings, as opposed to actual
measurements, are used to determine cable lengths, then an
appropriate factor should be included to allow for drawing errors.
d. Splice points should be located and marked in advance. To
reduce safety hazards, preparation of each positioh should begin
as the cable approaches in order to reduce the time that each hole
remains open. If the hand holes have lockable lids, there are no
restrictions, other than keeping them closed.
e. Marker Signs: The locations for permanent markers, including size
and type, should be shown on the work print.
f. Buried Warning Tape: A bright orange (preferably "ULCC" orange)
warning tape with a minimum width of three inches (76 cm) shall
be buried approximately one foot. (30.5 cm) above the optical
cable. As a minimum, the tape should be marked "WARNING -
OPTICAL CABLE".
g. Bonding and Grounding: All metallic cable elements at splice
points and building entrance shall be grounded. Connection shall
be made to the armored sheath.
h. Fusion splicing shall be used for splice points along with epoxy
coated connectors at the ends of the cable. The splices shall
have a maximum attenuation loss of 0.2 db per splice and the
connectors shall have a maximum loss of 0.5 db per connector.
If a patch has to be used at a splice point, a minimum of 100 ft.
shall be the distance between splice points to allow the ODTR
(Optical Time Domain Reflectometer) to be read properly.
3.3.6 Cable Installation
Cable shall be installed in the same trench as the pipeline. In areas of
rock or rocky soil, cable shall be laid in ;,the trench with the pipeline
having 6 inches of sand or sandy loam below. and above the cable before
backfilling with indigenous, soil. The cable reels shall be disposed of by
the fiber optic Subcontractor. As an alternate, Subcontractor can install
fiberoptic cable in a 2" diameter HDPE conduit.
Following installation of the cable, the section shall be checked with an
OTDR and attenuation for each fibre shall be recorded.
G:\HOME\E6828\W LDGOOSE\F30.01. DOC
C7
•
Ra 1ha 1f En&eeis & SPECIFICATION Project No. 77052.001
Constructors FOR Spec. No. F30.01
FIBER OPTIC CABLE Page No. 7 of 7
4. TESTING AND INSPECTION
4.1 All cabled optical fibers > 1000 meters in length shall be 100% attenuation
tested at the factory. The attenuation specifications of each fiber shall be
supplied with each cable reel.
4.2 The cable manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 registered.
4.3 Each completed cable installation shall -be attenuation tested to ensure the total
attenuation between the final installed end points is within acceptable limits.
5. PREPARATION FOR SHIPMENT
5.1 Cable Reels
5.1.1 The completed cable shall be packaged for shipment on non -returnable
wooden reels.
5.1.2 Top and bottom ends of the cable shall be available for testing.
5.1.3 Both ends of the cable shall be sealed to prevent the ingress of moisture.
5.2 Cable Reel 'Identification
Each cable reel shall be marked with a non -corrosive metal plate or label
securely attached to the reel and plainly stating Buyer's contract or Purchase
Order number, the length of cable on the reel, number and date cable was
tested, temperature rating, gross shipping weight and net weight of the cable. A
shipping tag containing the same information shall be attached to the outer end
of the cable.
G:\HOME\E6828\W LDGOOSE\F30-O1.DOC
Ts� J i
.8211VI eon Engineers &
Constructors
110
is
CLIENT: Wild Goose Storage JOB/INQUIRY NO.: 77052.001
FACILITY: Wild Goose Natural Gas Storage SPEC NO.: F90.01
LOCATION: Butte County, California
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
SPECIFICATION
This title page is a record of all revisions of the specification. Each time the specification is
changed, only the new or revised pages are issued. For convenience, the nature "of each
revision is briefly noted below.
REV. NO.
DATE
BY
CHECKED
APPROVAL
PAGES
NATURE OF REVISIONS
0
3/10/98
,.
All
Issued Approved for
Construction
Rev.
No.
LEAD
PROC
LEAD LEAD LEAD
MECH PIPE CIVIL
LEAD
STRUC
LEAD
ARCH
LEAD
ELEC
LEAD
I&C
OA
rPEM P
CDE
CON
SUP
0
--
-- -- --
--
--
-
-
--
--
Distribution:
Per Project Distribution Matrix EESSlO/yq�
CL A
���jE OF CP\����
i
0
•
Raytheon Engineers & SPECIFICATION FOR Project No. 77052.001
Constructors CONSTRUCTION
INSTALLATION Spec, No. F90.01
CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS . Page i
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1. GENERAL......................................................................................... 1
1.1
Scope.................................................................................... 1
1.2
References............................................................................. 1
1.3
Related Documents................................................................. 2
2. PRODUCTS...................................................................................... 2
2.1 Submittals....:........................................................................ 2
2.2 Materials and Equipment.......................................................... 2
3. EXECUTION..................................................................................... 7
3.1 General.................................................................................. 7
3.2 Equipment and Installation....................................................... 8
3.3 Raceway and Cable Installation ................................................ 9
3.4 Heat Tracing.......................................................................... 20
3.5 Miscellaneous......................................................................... 22
(3.5.4 Testing).................................................................. 23
4. SITE CLEANUP................................................................................. 32
ATTACHMENTS:
Documentation Requirements
GAHOM E\E8828\WLDG00SE\F90-01.D0C
•
0
0
Raytheon Engineers &
Constructors
GENERAL
1.1 Scope
1.1.1 Definitions:
SPECIFICATION FOR
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
Project No. 77052.001
Spec. No. F90.01
Page 1 of 32
Wild Goose Storage Inc.: "WGSI, Owner or Contractor"
Raytheon Engineers & Constructors, Inc.: "Engineer".
Entity performing the Work as described herein: "Subcontractor".
1.1.2 The Subcontractor shall design, furnish, and install complete and
functional electrical systems as required by this specification and related
contract documents and drawings.
1.2 References
1.2.1 All work shall be in accordance with the requirements of the following
codes, standards, and publications in effect March 1, 1998.
a) NFPA-70 National Electric Code (NEC)
b) ANSI C2 National Electrical Safety Code
c) API RP -540 Electrical Installations in Petroleum Processing Plants
(Illumination Levels)
d) OSHA Occupational Safety and Health administration
e) All applicable local, state, county, and city codes and requirements
f) NFPA-780 Lightning Protection Code
g) NFPA-101 Life Safety Code
h) NFPA-497 Electrical Installations in Chemical Plants
i) LPI -175 Lightning Protection Institute
j) 1995 California Electrical Code (CEC) plus the 1996 Errata.
k) API RP -500 Recommended Practice for Classifications of Locations
for Electrical Installation at Petroleum Facilities.
1) IEEE -141 Recommended Practice for Electric Power Distribution for
Industrial Facilities.
m) IEEE -142 Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and
Commercial Power Systems
1.2.2 The design, material and equipment selection and manufacturing, testing,
installation of the facility systems and workmanship shall . comply, as
applicable or unless specifically stated otherwise, with the guidelines of
the following codes, standards and recommended practices in effect
March 1, 1998:
a) ANSI American National Standards Institute
b) IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
c) NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer's Association
d) UL Underwriters Laboratories
e) ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
f) FM Factory Mutual
g) ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers' Association
G: W OM E\E8828\WLDG0OSEAF90-01.D0C
•
Raytheon Engineers &
Constructors
1.3 Related Documents
SPECIFICATION FOR
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
1.3.1 D59.02 - NEMA Frame Induction Motors
Project No. 77052.001
Spec. No. F90.01
Page 2 of 32
1.3.2 F00.04 - Electrical Requirements for Packaged Mechanical Equipment
1.3.3 F04.01 - 480 Volt Motor Control Centers
1.3.4 F30.01 - Fiber Optic Cable Installation Requirements
1.3.5 F95.01 - Electrical Construction for Power Distribution Center (PDC)
1.3.6 F95.01 A - Scope of Work for Power Distribution Center
PRODUCTS
2.1 Submittals
2.1.1 Prior to purchase by the Subcontractor, catalog cut sheets or
manufacturer's drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval
of the following items furnished and installed by the Subcontractor. See
the attached Form 2300-2 "Documentation Requirements" for items to
be approved by the Engineer before purchase.
2.1.2 A complete set of drawing prints shall be maintained by the
Subcontractor and submitted as construction record "as -installed"
drawings.
2.1.3 All electrical equipment and cable test and installation records performed
by the Subcontractor shall be provided to the Contractor for review and
approval.
2.1.4 All receiving. records for equipment purchased by the Contractor and
received by the Subcontractor shall be provided to the Contractor.
2.1.5 The Subcontractor shall provide construction turnover packages to the
Contractor in support of the Project start-up schedule for all equipment
and cables installed.
2.2 Materials and Eauioment
2.2.1 General
® 1a) All material and equipment shall be new, undamaged, and
delivered to the site in its original boxes, packages, etc.
G: W OM E\E8828\WLDG00SENF80-01.D0C
•
is
is
Raytheon Engineers &
SPECIFICATION FOR
Project No.
77052.001
ConstructorsELECTRICAL
INSTALLATION
CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
Spec. No.
Page
F90.01
3 of 32
b) All materials and equipment shall be UL listed and carry their label.
The UL label requirement is waived for categories of equipment
where listing criterion has not been established. This requirement
is applicable to all material, equipment, and installation sections of
this Specification in which the words "listed", "labeled", or
"approved" are used.
2.2.2 Materials
Subcontractor supplied electrical equipment and materials shall meet the
following requirements:
a) Distribution Panelboards
1) Panelboards shall be dead front safety type with main and
branch bolt in style circuit breakers. All panelboard buses
shall be copper and include separate neutral and ground
buses.
2) 120/208VAC panelboards shall be 3 phase, 4 wire,
equipped with molded case branch circuit breakers with
interrupting capacity ratings not less than 10,000 AIC
symmetrical at 208VAC. Enclosures shall be NEMA 1 for
indoors (unclassified areas), and NEMA 3R for outdoors
(unclassified areas). Subcontractor shall provide a minimum
of 25% spare breakers on each panelboard for use by
others.
3) 480VAC panelboards shall be 3 phase, 3 wire, with the
number of circuit breakers as required by Contractor's
design, circuit breaker interrupting capacity shall not be less
than 25,000 AIC symmetrical at 480V. Enclosures shall be
NEMA 1 for indoors (unclassified areas), and NEMA 313 for
outdoors (unclassified areas).
4) Acceptable manufacturers are Square -D, Cutler -Hammer,
General Electric, or Engineer -approved equal.
5) 120/208VAC panelboards located in Class I, Div. 2 Areas
shall be Crouse -Hinds Type D2P6 or D2L, NEMA 7/NEMA 3.
b) Distribution Transformers
1) Transformers for feeding panelboards shall be dry type
general purpose, 3 phase, 60 Hz, 480 delta-208Y/120V,
indoor or outdoor (with rain shield) as required.
G:%HOME%E8828\WLDGOOSE%F80-01.DOC
2) Transformers shall be self cooled by natural convection,
have isolated windings - auto transformers are not
acceptable. Two 2-1/2 per cent above and two 2-1/2 per
cent below taps shall be provided. Acceptable
manufacturers are Square D,. Cutler -Hammer, General
Electric, or Engineer -approved equal.
L`
Raytheon En&eer$ & SPECIFICATION FOR
Constructors ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
cY Switches and Receptacles
Project No. 77052.001
Spec. No. F90.01
Page 4 of 32
1) Convenience receptacles shall be 125V, 3 pole, 20 amp
specification grade grounded type. Acceptable
manufacturers are Crouse -Hinds, Hubbell, Appleton, or
Engineer approved equal.
2) Switches shall be Hubbell specification grade or Engineer -
approved equal.
3) For indoor non -hazardous areas, switch and receptacle
faceplates shall be stamped steel or aluminum, and shall be
ivory color in architecturally finished areas.
4) Convenience receptacles installed within the hazardous
areas shall be Crouse -Hinds type ENR or Engineer -approved
equal listed and approved for use in Class I, Group D,
Division 1 hazardous areas.
d. Wire and Cable
1) All power, control, alarm, and instrumentation wiring
(except thermocouple) shall have conductors of soft
annealed copper, with minimum 98% conductivity and
ASTM Class B stranding.
2) Cable shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with
ICEA standards for the conductor size, voltage class, and
insulation type selected.
3) Low voltage power and control cables shall be copper,
single conductor or multi -conductor, UL type XHHW as
specified in the circuit schedule. Multi -conductor armored
cables shall be rated 600V, 900C type MC (VW -1) tray
rated for cable tray use, with aluminum sheath or
interlocked armor and weather and sunlight -resistant
jacket. Cable shall be suitable for installation in dry and wet
locations, in cable trays, conduits and for direct burial.
Multi -conductor cables and single conductor cables 1/0
AWG and larger shall be cable tray rated. Multi -conductor
control cable color -coding shall be in accordance with ICEA
S-73-532, Table E-2. Multi -conductor power cables shall
include a ground conductor. All multi -conductor cables
installed in Class I, Division 2 areas shall be approved for
Class I, Group D, Division 2 hazardous area installation.
• 4) Instrumentation and thermocouple cable shall be twisted -
shielded (with drain wire) pairs or triads with 15 mils
minimum of flame retardant PVC insulation. Cable shall be
rated 90°C, 600V and be UL listed. Multiple twisted pair
GAHOM E\E8828\WLDG00SE\F80-01.DOC
is
is
M n Engineers &
SPECIFICATION FOR
Project No.
77052.001
ConstructorsELECTRICAL
INSTALLATION
CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
Spec. No.
Page
F90.01
5 of 32
or triad cables shall be furnished with individual pair or triad
and overall shields. Cables shall have sunlight/weather
resistant jackets, be suitable for installation in wet and dry
locations, in conduits and underground duct bank, and be
cable tray rated. Cables installed outside the electrical
building (PDC) shall be armored, type PLTC,with flame -
resistant PVC jacket, approved for Class I, Group D,
Division 2 hazardous area installations. Color coding shall
be black -white for pairs and black -white -red for triads.
Thermocouple extension wire shall be color coded in
accordance with ANSI conventions.
5) Color coding shall be as follows:
A. Single Phase
Line Black
Neutral White
B. All three Phase, 120/208 VAC circuits:
Phase A
Black
Phase B
Red
Phase C
Blue
Neutral (where required)
White
Ground
Green
C. All 277/480 VAC branch circuits:
Phase A
Brown
Phase B
Orange
Phase C
Yellow
Neutral (where required)
Gray
Ground
Green
D. DC Circuits (Power and Control),
Positive Leads & Busses Red
Negative Leads & Busses Black
E. Thermocouple Wiring - per ANSI standards
F. Insulated Grounding Conductors Green
e) Cable Trays
G:W OM SE8828MMOOSEV90-0 / .DOC
1) Cable tray systems shall be made of straight sections,
fittings, and accessories as defined in NEMA standards
publication VE -1. Cable trays shall be UL classified as
equipment ground conductors and cross-sectional areas
labeled in accordance with UL standards.
•
0
•
R.1yf1l0i� Engineers & SPECIFICATION FOR Project No. 77052.001
ConstructorsELECTRICAL INSTALLATION Spec. No. F90.01
CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS Page 6 of 32
2) Cable trays furnished and installed shall meet the following
criteria:
- Steel, hot dipped galvanized after fabrication.
- NEMA Class Designation: NEMA 20C
- Type: Ladder, inside flange, in widths and depths as
specified on the Contractor's drawings. Ladder tray
rung spacing shall be 9 inches.
- Risers and elbows: 24" radius
- Acceptable manufacturer: B -Line or Engineer -
approved equal
- Cable tray covers installed on cable trays containing
power cables shall be louvered.
f) Enclosures
GAHOM E\E8828\WLDGOOSE\F80-0 t .DOC
1) Enclosures for electrical equipment shall be suitable for the
environment in which they will be located, and unless
specifically noted otherwise in the Specification shall be as
follows:
NEMA Type 1 or 12; Indoors - Unclassified Locations
- NEMA Type 4; Outdoor - Unclassified Locations and
Class I, Division 2, Group D (without arcing contacts).
NEMA Type 7/4; Indoor and Outdoor - Class I,
Division 1, Group D locations and Class I, Division 2,
Group D locations (with arcing contacts).
Purged enclosures, if specifically approved by the
Engineer (Raytheon) shall have a "Type Z" purge as
defined in NFPA 496.
2) Heat producing devices, such as lights, lamps,. heaters,.
resistors, motors, solenoids, transformers, rectifiers,
resistance devices, etc., installed in classified locations
shall be contained within enclosures which comply with
NEC Articles 501-3, 501-7, 501-8, and 501-9. The lowest
auto -ignition temperature (AIT) of the flammable gases and
vapor that could be in the area is 4501C, except for the
methanol storage/unloading and well areas , which have an
AIT of 385°C.
3) Local control stations installed in hazardous areas shall be
in NEMA 7/4 or 7/3 explosion proof enclosures approved
for Class I, Group D, Division 1 and 2 installations.
Acceptable manufacturers are Appleton, Crouse -Hinds,
Curlee with GE, Cutler -Hammer, or Allen-Bradley
components.
•
0
•
Raytheon Engineers &
Constructors
3. EXECUTION
3.1 General
SPECIFICATION FOR
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
Project No. 77052.001
Spec. No. F90.01
Page 7 of 32
3.1.1 All electrical work shall be designed and installed in accordance with the
National Electrical Code, The California Electrical Code, the project
construction 'drawings and the notes . thereon, this specification,
applicable vendor installation manuals and drawings and accepted
standard industry practices.
3.1.2 Electrical construction by the Subcontractor shall result in a safe and
reliable system which allows for ease of electrical maintenance.
3.1.3 The Subcontractor shall provide such electrical safety equipment as
required and in such a manner as to provide safety protection for all
personnel in the area of work.
3.1.4 Measurements scaled from drawings to establish dimensions for
installation purposes shall be confirmed by the Subcontractor in the field
prior to installation.
3.1.5 The Subcontractor shall coordinate his work with that of other trades to
assure efficient installation and compliance with all applicable codes.
3.1.6 The Subcontractor shall furnish all materials, equipment, tools, labor,
cleanup (on a daily basis) and supervision required to provide complete
and finished electrical systems as required by this specification.
3.1.7 In case of discrepancies between electrical drawings, specifications, and
applicable codes and standards, such discrepancies shall be brought to
the immediate attention of the Engineer for clarification and approval
prior to installation.
3.1.8 The Subcontractor is responsible to design and install equipment,
conduit, etc. in locations not interfering with Contractor's equipment.
Contractor's drawings and sketches provided to Subcontractor prior to
contract award are for bidding purposes only. Contractor will provide
approved drawings to Subcontractor after contract award.
3.1.9 All electrical construction shall conform to structure, preserve
clearances, avoid obstructions, preserve headroom, and keep openings
and passageways clear without further detailed instruction. The
installation shall be performed with the highest quality and standard
practices of the trade. Damaged equipment and structures shall be
replaced and/or repaired at the Subcontractor's expense, and shall be
subject to Contractor's subsequent approval.
U AHOM E\E6626\WLDG005L%F80-01 .DOC
•
•
Raytheon EIlg1IlCCrS & SPECIFICATION FOR Project No. 77052.001
COIlStrllCtOrS ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION Spec. No. F90.01
CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS Page 8 of 32
3.1.10 The Subcontractor shall also furnish and install all material and
equipment which is not specifically mentioned or shown but which is
necessary for a safe, proper, and complete electrical system.
3.1.11 Concealed work shall be left open (but protected from weather) for
inspection and test until approved by the Contractor.
3.1.12 Equipment fittings and material for use in hazardous locations shall be
U.L. listed for such application and installed in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions. Screws, bolts, and similar components of
explosion -proof enclosures, particularly those of ground joint
construction, shall be of rust and corrosion resisting material. Fittings
shall be case malleable iron or Feraloy.
3.1.13 The ground joint flange construction used in some explosion -proof
enclosures requires extreme care in handling to insure against damage to
the ground surfaces. If the surfaces are allowed to collect dust or dirt,
they shall be cleaned with a solvent and relubricated; enclosures with
corroded surfaces shall not be used unless the surfaces can be cleaned
and returned to original condition without damage. All surfaces shall
have adequate lubrication when assembled.
3.1.14 Crouse -Hinds Type STL Lithium lubricant shall be used as a general
purpose lubricant for threaded covers and ground joints and rotating
operating shafts on control stations.
3.1.15 The Subcontractor is cautioned against drilling or cutting holes in the top
of metal cabinets containing solid-state circuit components. Small metal
chips may affect proper operation of the circuits. When drilling or
cutting holes is impossible to avoid, the Subcontractor shall take steps
to prevent metal chips from falling into the circuit boards, and the
Contractor shall be contacted one day prior to any holes being made.
3.1.16 The Subcontractor shall conform to all safety and equipment tagging
procedures established by the Contractor for site construction, start-up,
and operation activities.
3.2 Eauir)ment Installation
3.2.1 General
a) The Subcontractor shall receive, off-load, store, and install the
following equipment purchased by the Owner:
G:\HOME\E6828\WLDGOOSE\FBO-01.DOC
• Power Distribution Center (PDC)
•
0
Engineers & SPECIFICATION FOR Project No. 77052.001
ConstructorsELECTRICAL INSTALLATION Spec. No. F90.01
CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS Page 9 of 32
b) All equipment shall be inspected for damaged or missing
components. Nameplates and equipment ratings shall be verified
against applicable drawings. The Subcontractor shall perform
vendor's recommended inspection and receiving procedures.
c) The Subcontractor shall install the identified Owner -purchased
equipment in accordance with Contractor's drawings and
specifications. Erection and installation shall also be in
accordance with applicable vendor installation ,drawings and
manuals for the equipment.
d) The Contractor will coordinate and determine cost responsibility of
site visits by field representatives for Owner purchased
equipment.
3.3 Raceway and Cable Installation
3.3.1 Conduit
a) The Subcontractor shall furnish and install conduits in accordance
with the Contractor's drawings, this specification, the NEC, and
applicable local codes.
b) Conduits are shown diagramatically on the Contractor's drawings.
In general, above -grade conduit runs will not be shown or routed
on the drawings. Subcontractor is completely responsible for all
conduit routing and properly locating conduit and cable seals at
area classification boundaries, enclosures, and all other places
required by the National Electrical Code, Article 501.
Subcontractor is responsible for all conduit system design
necessary to accomplish this, including conduit sizing and
conduit/condulet and fitting sizing according to the requirements
of the NEC. Conditions in which seals are found to be installed
improperly (or not at all) shall be corrected by the Subcontractor
to the satisfaction of the Contractor.
c) Cables for low voltage power, control, instrumentation, etc. shall
be installed in rigid hot dipped galvanized steel conduit (RGS)
above grade.
d) Lighting, receptacle, and telephone conduit installed indoors in
unclassified non -hazardous concealed areas of greater than eight
feet above grade, shall be EMT. In other above grade areas or
exposed locations where subject to damage, RGS shall be used.
e) All conduit shall be inspected after delivery to the site. Any conduit
• which has a rough inside surface or has a sharp ridge where the
conduit has been welded shall be rejected and replaced by the
Subcontractor.
GAH OM E\E8828\WLDG00SE\F90-01.D0C
•
40
naylheon Engineers & SPECIFICATION FOR Project No. 77052.001
ConstructorsELECTRICAL INSTALLATION Spec. No. F90.01
CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS -Page 10 of 32
f) Conduits shall be cut square, and all ends shall be reamed to
eliminate sharp edges. Conduits shall be threaded with a maximum
of eight (8) full threads and a minimum of five (5) full threads
engaged.
g) Bends in rigid conduit may be made with prefabricated elbows or
formed on the job with proper tools designed for bending conduit.
In general, the radius of curvature of elbows shall not be less than
six times the outside diameter of the conduit. . .
h) Pull points shall be provided as required to permit. cables to be
installed without damage from pulling. The maximum length of
conduit runs between pull boxes shall be 300 feet. Each 90 degree
bend shall be considered the equivalent of a 50 foot distance. The
maximum number of 90 degree bends or equivalent between
pulling points in any conduit run shall be four. Pull boxes shall be
sized per NEC requirements, unless larger boxes are specified on
the drawings.
i) Cutting or burning structural members to allow passage of conduit
is prohibited.
j) The component parts of conduit systems shall, in general, be of
like material. Where dissimilar metals are used together, suitable
provisions shall be made to prevent galvanic action.
k) Minimum size conduit shall be 3/4 inch except that 1/2 inch size
may be used for short final installations to instruments or other
close conduit work.
3.3.2 Conduit Support
a) All exposed conduit shall be run parallel or perpendicular to walls,
ceilings, pipe racks, or other structural members. Conduit shall not
interfere with the use of passageways, doorways, handrails,
overhead cranes, monorails, equipment removal areas or working
areas, and in no case shall conduit routing present a safety hazard
or interfere with normal plant operating procedures. A minimum
overhead clearance of 8'-0" shall be maintained in passageways.
b) Conduits shall be supported from building structural steel, pipe
racks, concrete walls, etc. Conduit shall not be supported from
pipe hangers.
c) Acceptable supporting and clamp -like materials for exposed conduit
include one -hole clamps and clamp backs, suspension pipe rings,
Korn or Kindorf/Steel City clamps in sizes 1-1/2 inch and smaller,
"J" and "U" bolts, structural steel frames and trapezes concrete
inserts, and galvanized _steel Unistrut. Perforated steel tape,
U MUM1.000
•
•
Raylhe0� Engineers & SPECIFICATION FOR Project No. 77052.001
ConstructorsELECTRICAL INSTALLATION Spec. No. F90.01
CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS Page 11 of 32
stamped steel two -hole straps, and other materials of like nature
shall not be used.
d) Exposed conduit shall be run straight and true to structure lines and
shall be rigidly supported per the NEC between couplings, on either
side of bends, at terminations and fittings, and in general on not
greater than 10 foot centers. Conduit shall not be installed tight
against walls, ceilings, and structural members, etc. Clamp backs
and/or offsets shall be utilized as necessary to maintain uniform
clearances.
e) Conduit may be installed on existing pipe stanchions and other
existing structures or on supports fabricated specifically for the
conduit.,
f) Conduit runs shall be so installed as to avoid proximity to steam,
hot water, and process pipes and hot surfaces in general.
Minimum allowable distance between conduit and such pipes and
surfaces shall be (1) for uninsulated pipe, not less than 12 inches
for parallel runs and 6 inches at crossings; (2) no closer than 2
inches of an insulated pipe; (3) no closer than 4 inches of any
surface to be fireproofed. Runs parallel to hot surfaces shall be
avoided insofar as practical.
g) Conduit and cable passing through building walls shall be
adequately supported to maintain rigidity and strength and shall be
installed in such a way as to eliminate water leaking into the '
building. Hazardous atmosphere sealing shall be in accordance
with the NEC.
3.3.3 Conduit Joints, Fittings and Connections
a) Subcontractor shall furnish and install all fittings, boxes, supports,
etc., necessary for complete raceway systems as required by the
NEC. All support channel, such as Unistrut, shall be galvanized
steel.
b) All fittings installed in conduit runs shall be of such size that the
conductors may be pulled through without damage to the cables.
c) Joints in galvanized conduit and connections to condulets shall be
made using Crouse Hinds STL-8 lubricant. All new threads shall be
completely covered to prevent rusting.
d) In non -hazardous and Division 2 areas, all conduit fittings, such as
LB, T, LL, etc., shall be Crouse -Hinds Form 7 condulets, or equal,
unless required or specified otherwise.
GAHOM BE882O WLDGOOSEW90-07.DOC
•
•
R1y n1 n Engineers & SPECIFICATION FOR Project No. 77052.001
ConstructorsELECTRICAL INSTALLATION Spec. No. F90.01
CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS Page 12 of 32
e) L, LB, T, etc., fittings may be used for 90 degree turns except
conductors 4/0 AWG and larger shall require LBD fittings or
individual conduit run pull boxes sized per the NEC in order to allow
sufficient cable bending radius.
f) Expansion fittings with copper bonding straps shall be installed
when crossing building or structural expansion joints or in straight,
conduit runs at a minimum of 200 feet center to center, if conduit
run is 300 feet or further (4 -inch maximum expansion in either
direction). Conduit expansion fittings, unless otherwise specified,
shall be Crouse -Hinds Type "XD", or Engineer -approved equal.
g) The use of threadless couplings and connectors will not be
permitted. Union fittings shall be installed at threaded hub conduit
terminators and elsewhere as needed to facilitate the installation of
conduit runs.
h) EMT and RGS installed in architecturally finished areas shall be
concealed in walls or above ceilings.
i) All outdoor conduit connections to cabinets, junction boxes, etc.,
for unclassified areas, shall be made with Myer Scru-Tite hubs. For
unclassified indoor locations, locknut and bushing conduit
entrances may be of the double locknut type unless shown
otherwise on the drawings. Bushings shall be the insulating type
and shall be provided with caps to protect the interior of the
conduit system during construction. In hazardous areas, locknut
bushing and double locknut type shall not be depended upon for
bonding purposes. Bonding jumpers with proper fittings shall be
installed in accordance with NEC Article 501-16 requirements.
3.3.4 Conduit Seals and Drains
a) Explosion -proof seals shall be installed at all points required by the
NEC, electrical plans or detail drawings. Explosion -proof seals shall
be installed in all conduit runs crossing, entering, or leaving a
hazardous area in accordance with the NEC.
b) All seals and drains shall be manufactured by Crouse -Hinds. All
seals shall be at least one trade size larger than the incoming
conduit size to ensure they are filled to less than 25% of the
incoming conduit cross-sectional area, per NEC Article 501-5 (C)
(6) (revised for the 1996 NEC).
c) All seal fittings shall be checked against manufacturer's
information to assure that they are of the proper type for their
location in the conduit system. Seals shall be properly packed to
insure wires passing through the seal do not touch together.
GAH OM E\E6625MLOGOOSM90.0 1.DOC
is
•
Raytheon Engineers &
SPECIFICATION FOR
Project No.
77052.001
ConstructorsELECTRICAL
INSTALLATION
Spec. No.
F90.01
CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
. Page
13 of 32
d) Drain seals or seals and drains shall be installed in accordance with
the 1996 NEC Article 501-5, at all process or service conections
that depend on a single compression seal, diaphragm, or tube to
prevent flammable or combustible fluids from entering the electrical
raceway or cable system capable of transmitting fluids. The drains
shall be provided so that primary seal leakage will be obvious.
Where electrical devices are connected to pressurized lines or
equipment containing flammable materials, breathers or drains shall
be installed between the source of pressure and the explosion -
proof seals.
e) Following complete inspection, check-out, and testing by the
Subcontractor and after acceptance of the electrical circuits by the
Contractor, all conduit sealing fittings involved with the entire
conduit system shall be sealed. Sealing compound which is
approved for the use by the seal manufacturer shall be used. After
each seal has been poured, it shall be painted to identify it as
having been poured and ready for inspection. The Subcontractor
shall provide drawing mark-ups to the Contractor identifying
locations of all sealing fitting locations installed by the
Subcontractor.
f) If explosion -proof seals are used at entrances to enclosures,
explosion -proof unions shall be located between the seal and the
enclosure. (The seal must be within 18 inches of the enclosures.)
g) Conduit systems shall be installed in such a manner as to minimize
the accumulation of moisture at low points and pockets. If low
points and pockets are unavoidable, a conduit fitting shall be
provided at the low point with a Crouse -Hinds ECD drain. Conduits
and cable shall enter and exit outdoor junction boxes only on the
side or on the bottom.
h) Junction boxes shall be provided with drains or drilled holes (where
allowed by the area classification) on the underside to allow
draining of liquids or condensation that would otherwise be trapped
within the box.
i) Explosion -proof enclosures shall have explosion -proof breather and
drain fittings.
3.3.5 Flexible Metal Conduit
a) Where vibration is present or flexibility is required for adjustment or
maintenance, and at all motors, conduit connections shall be made
with flexible metal conduit. Installation and use shall be in strict
accordance with the NEC.
�:viomt�te�eze�w�o�oost�rso-vi .00c
•
41
•
Raytheon Engineers & SPECIFICATION FOR Project No. 77052.001
ConstructorsELECTRICAL INSTALLATION Spec. No. F90.01
CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS Page 14 of 32
b) In Class I, Division 2 and unclassified areas, liquid -tight flexible
conduit cutoffs shall be square and made by hacksaw using a
cutting jig which does not deform the conduit. Cut surfaces shall
be coated with rust inhibitor immediately after cutting.
c) The use of flexible conduit will not be accepted as justification for
poor conduit alignment or unworkmanlike installation. Maximum
length of flexible conduit shall be limited to 12 inches per each inch
of conduit diameter. ,
d) Connectors for liquid -tight flexible conduit shall be liquid -tight type
of steel or malleable iron, galvanized, and shall be as manufactured
specifically for the purpose, and shall maintain ground continuity. In
hazardous areas, bonding jumpers with proper fittings shall be
installed in accordance with NEC Article 501-16 requirements. Do
not spiral wrap bonding jumper. Fasten jumper to conduit with a
minimum of three (3) tie wraps.
e) Flexible conduit for Class I, Division I installations shall be Appleton
Type "EXLK", or Engineer -Approved equal.
3.3.6 Cable Tray
a) The Subcontractor shall furnish and install cable trays in
accordance with the Contractor's drawings, this specification, and
the NEC.
b) Cable tray supports shall be designed and installed per the
Contractor's drawings and NEMA VE -1.
c) Cable trays shall be capable of supporting 125% of their uniform
cable load (NEMA VE -1 Table 3-1), plus a 200 pound concentrated
load.
d) All cable tray shall be designed and constructed to prevent cable
damage due to sharp edges, burrs, or projections. After
installation, all rough edges shall be ground smooth to prevent
cable damage.
e) All cable tray sections and fittings shall be designed to
accommodate commercially available conduit clamps which can be
installed without drilling the cable tray side rail.
f) All tray covers shall be furnished with clamps for securing the
covers to the trays at intervals not greater than 48 inches. The
clamps shall be of the channel or bar type which span the width of
the tray and are retained by screw-type fasteners.
GAHOM SE8828MLDG00SE790-01.D0C
•
is
Raytheon Enoneers & . SPECIFICATION FOR Project No. 77052.001
ConstructorsELECTRICAL INSTALLATION Spec. No. F90.01
CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS Page 15 of 32
g) All tray sections and fittings shall be furnished with the
manufacturer's standard connectors, splice plates, and hold-down
hardware. All nuts, bolts, and washers shall be cadmium plated
steel or Engineer -approved alternate.
h) All expansion and adjustable fittings shall be furnished with
bonding jumpers for installation across tray connections.
i) Expansion fittings shall be installed on cable trays crossing building
expansion joints or other locations as required to allow for
movement from expansion, contraction, or vibration. Expansion
connectors shall also be installed at intervals not to exceed 100
feet on straight runs of cable tray.. Expansion conectors shall be
located only at support points. At building expansion joints, each
tray shall be supported.
j. Tray covers shall be installed at all locations as necessary for
physical protection of cables or as shown on the contract
drawings. Tray covers installed on cable trays containing power
cables shall be louvered.
k. Holes in tray side rails for conduit terminations are not permitted.
3.3.7 Cable and Wiring Installation
a) The Subcontractor shall install cables in accordance with the
Contractor's circuit schedule, drawings, this specification, and the
NEC and CEC.
b) The Subcontractor shall furnish 600V power, control,
instrumentation, and thermocouple cables in accordance with the
Contractor's circuit schedule, this specification, and the NEC and
CEC.
c) No wire or cable shown on the drawings shall be pulled until the
entire conduit system for the wire or cable to be pulled has been
completed. Wire and cable shall not be allowed to remain exposed
to the weather.
d) Conduit systems and enclosures shall not be left open nor shall
wires and cables be exposed to moisture or damage during
installation or storage. Immediately after wire or cable has been
pulled into a conduit, all condulet fitting covers, seal covers,
equipment, and junction box covers shall be put into place and
tightened to prevent entry of moisture, dirt, etc. Ends of all
conduits and cables not immediately connected to equipment shall
be protected from damage and sealed to keep out moisture.
o.�nvmncoo<o�rvwaouvanrau•u i .uui,
•
•
•
Ra71 owwo Engineers &
SPECIFICATION FOR
Project No.
77052.001
ConstructorsELECTRICAL
INSTALLATION
Spec. No.
F90.01
CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
Page
16 of 32
e) Insulated wire and cable shall be installed in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendation. Maximum wire tension, maximum
insulation pressure, and minimum bending radius shall not be
exceeded. The maximum pulling tension when using a pulling eye
shall be 0.008 pound per circular mil of copper conductor but shall
not exceed 3,000 pounds in any case.
f) Wire pulling lubricants shall be used on all circuits with insulation
rated at 600 volts or less where the wire size is No,. 4/0 AWG or
.larger. Multi -conductor cables having an O.D. of 0.75 inch or larger
shall require pulling lubricant. Consideration shall be given to use
of lubricant for smaller sizes of wire, especially where the number
of conductors approaches the maximum allowable conduit fill.
Where lubricant is used, it shall be applied by swabbing through
the entire wireway prior to pulling the wire to achieve complete
internal coverage. It shall also be applied to the conductors as
they are installed in the wireway. Wire pulling lubricants shall be in
accordance with the requirements of U.L., applicable to the
specific conductor or cable insulation and raceway material.
g) Installation of cables shall be made end to end without splices.
h) Megger all cables on the reel at receipt, record readings and turn
over the records to the Contractor. Prior to megohmmeter testing,
the Subcontractor shall take necessary safety precautions.
i) Before cable is installed or pulled, the cable reel shall be stored at
the temperature and for the length of time recommended by the
cable manufacturer.
j) Pulling winches and other necessary equipment shall be of
adequate capacity to ensure a steady continuous pull on cables.
Strain gages shall be used to monitor cable pulling tension for runs
where high pulling tensions can be expected.
k) The pulling cable used may be wire, steel cable, nylon or manila
hemp rope. Bare wires and steel cable shall not be used when
pulling cable in conduits which contain nonmetallic bends.
1) Minimum radius of sheaves shall be in accordance with
manufacturer's minimum bending radius of all cables supplied. In
general, unless manufacturer's recommendation is greater, cable
minimum bending radii shall be as follows:
Nonshielded 8 times OD of cable.
Shielded 12 times OD of cable
m) All cables shall be pulled on rollers, sheaves, etc. None of the
cables are to drag on floors, walls or trays.
GMOM OM E\E6828%WLDG00SE\F90-01.DOC
•
•
C7
Riayff�eon Engineers & SPECIFICATION FOR Project No. 77052.001
Constructors ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION Spec. No. F90.01
CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS Page 17 of 32
n) All cable reels shall be manned to reduce pulling tensions.
o) Cable runs shall be measured prior to pulling cable to ensure
adequate cable lengths are on the reels. Lengths shown on the
circuit schedule are approximately and are not to be used for this
requirement.
p) All cables shall be pulled with all the conductors attached to the
pulling eye, or Kellems rotating eye type pulling grips sized to the
cable diameter and in accordance with the design strength of the
pull required.
q) Conductors in vertical raceways shall be supported, except where
the vertical riser is less than 25% of the spacing given in the
following NEC table reference. One cable support shall be provided
at the top of the vertical raceway or as close to the top as
practical, plus a support for each additional interval as specified in
Table 300-19(a) of the National Electric Code.
r) Cables in trays shall be dressed and shall be lashed to the tray at a
maximum of 3 feet -0 inches spacings using cable ties.
s) Direct buried cables shall be installed per the contract drawings,
notes, specifications, and NEC requirements.
3.3.8 Terminations
a) Connections of branch circuit conductors to 120 -volt and 480 -volt
motors shall be made by first installing mechanical hydraulic
compression ring tongue lugs to branch wiring and motor leads.
The ring tongue lugs shall then be bolted together using brass or
silicon bronze alloy hardware. The joints shall then be insulated
utilizing 3M Scotch 88 insulation tape with the first layer reverse -
wrapped (sticky side out). To make a void -free, smooth joint, 3M
"Scotchfil" insulation putty or Plymouth Slipknot filler tape shall be
utilized -after taping with insulation tape. Additional layers of
Scotch 88 shall then be applied over the filler material.
b) Snap -spade, self -insulated compression lugs, which are to be
installed utilizing ratchet -type compression tools, shall be utilized
on Vendor furnished screw-type terminals. Lugs shall be
manufactured by T&B, or Burndy. Compression tools shall be by
the same manufacturer as the lugs. Termination of wire at vendor -
furnished terminal blocks may be by bare wire only if the terminals
furnished by a vendor are clamp type suited for this type of
connection. Terminations with pig -tail leads from field devices
shall be made with Buchanan crimp -type copper splice caps
covered with 3M Scotch 88 tape.
G: W OM ENE8828WVLDGOOSE\FOO-01.D0C
•
•
r-7
LJ
RayM�eon Engineers & SPECIFICATION FOR Project No. 77052.001
COIlStrUCtOrS ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION Spec. No. F90.01
CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS Page 18 of 32
c) Not more than two wires shall be installed to one screw terminal or
terminal block point.
d) If connection of cables with lugs are attached to flat copper bus
surfaces in equipment, the Subcontractor shall not use chemicals
or abrasives which will damage any bus plating that may be
present.
3.3.9 Junction Box and Panel Wiring
a) All wire and cable installed in junction boxes, panelboards,
wireways, control panels, etc., shall be grouped, formed, and laced
with nylon tie wraps to provide a neat and orderly appearance.
Control, RTD's, and alarm wires terminating at junction boxes,
relay panels, control panels, etc., shall be installed to break out of
the bundle adjacent to the terminal to which it is to be attached.
Bundles shall be laced with nylon spiral wrap, T&B Ty -raps or
approved equal. Enough slack shall be left in each spare wire to
reach any terminal or tie-in point within the equipment.
b) Voltage levels shall be segregated within each junction box by
terminal strips. Each junction box and terminal strip shall be
identified by tag number and voltage level. Voltage segregation
shall be 480V, 120VAC, 125VDC, Instrument (4-20 ma and 24V),
Thermocouples and RTD's.
c) Junction boxes shall use Weidmueller SAK Series terminal blocks
Terminals shall be identified in accordance with project drawings.
3.3.10 Wire Tagging
a) Each wire shall be permanently marked at all termination points
with a tag in accordance with the project construction drawings.
Each individual wire color and tag shall be consistent throughout
the entire length of its circuit. Wire markers shall be heat
shrinkable, thermally printed.
b) All power, control, and instrumentation cables installed by the
Subcontractor shall carry cable tags at the origination and
termination points. Circuit numbers as identified in the
Contractor's circuit schedule shall be permanently marked on the
cable tags.
3.3.11 Grounding and Lightning Protection
a) The Subcontractor shall furnish and install the site grounding
system in accordance with the Contractor's drawings, this
specification, the NEC, CEC, and applicable local codes.
Installation shall include ground rods, conductors, test wells, above
and below grade connections.
GAHOM E\E8828\WLDG00SE\F90-01.D0C
•
•
�
ayMieon Engineers & SPECIFICATION FOR Project No. 77052.001
ConstructorsELECTRICAL INSTALLATION Spec. No. F90.01
CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS Page 19 of 32
b) The belowgrade ground loop installed by the subcontractor shall
consist of bare stranded copper conductor and copper -clad ground
rods as specified on the contract drawings.
c) Ground connections to the overall grounding grid made by the
Subcontractor shall include, but not be limited to, building steel,
control panels, electrical switchgear, transformers, substation
equipment, Motor Control Centers, and other equipment as
specified on the Contractor's drawings. Green insulated copper
wire shall be utilized for taps to the main ground grid.
d) All aboveground connections shall utilize mechanical compression
lugs installed on ground cables and attached to equipment using
silicon bronze hardware. All below ground connections shall be
compression type.
e) Ground connections to equipment shall be visible for inspection and
shall be protected by Schedule 40 PVC non-metallic conduit where
concrete foundations or paving are penetrated.
f) Connections to motor frames shall be made with dedicated split -
bolt connectors and to ground buses with compression lugs. Motor
and equipment housing anchor bolts shall not be used for fastening
lugs of grounding cable.
g) Exposed connections shall be spray coated with CRC Urethane
Seal Coat or equal to protect against corrosion.
h) Lightning protection system downcomer cables shall be connected
by the Subcontractor to the building below grade ground grid
system at the Multi -Purpose Building. The downcomer cables will
be installed from the lightning protection system air terminals to
the base of the building by others.
i) Grounding jumpers shall be installed on conduits where threaded
fittings are not used such as locknut entrances to motor conduit
boxes and cabinets, etc.
j) Ground resistance to earth shall be 5 ohms or less. Maximum
resistance between equipment and the ground system shall be 1
ohm.
k) A 2/0 AWG grounding conductor shall be installed in each power
cable tray.
1) All non-current carrying metallic parts of electrical equipment shall
• be grounded per the NEC.
GAH OM E\E8828\WLDG00SE\F90-01.D0C
•
is
•
Raytheon Engineers &
Constructors
3.4 Heat Tracinq
SPECIFICATION FOR Project No. 77052.001
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION Spec. No. F90.01
CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS Page 20 of 32
3.4.1 The Subcontractor shall be responsible for the purchase and installation
of the electrical heat trace system for the electrical heat tracing indicated
on the electrical and piping drawings, piping line list, and highlighted
Process and Instrument Diagrams (P&IDs). Pumps, valves, instruments,
gages, and vessels shall be electrically traced, per the electrical tracing
published manufacturer's standard details and instructions. Piping shall
be electrically traced, per the electrical tracing manufacturer's published
standard details and as shown on the piping line list and on the P&IDs.
3.4.2 The Subcontractor shall furnish electrical heat trace cable, thermostats,
sensors, control, and contactor panels with all labor, tools, materials, and
services required for installation.
3.4.3 The materials to be furnished hereunder shall be of recent manufacture,
standard design and of first quality either meeting or exceeding the
requirements of this Specification. The materials shall be new and
undamaged. Electrical Heat. Tracing shall be installed to facilitate
maintenance.
3.4.4 The heat tracing shall be Thermon type "RSX" or "TSX" for Class I,
Division 2 areas and Thermon Type "D1-RSX" or "D1-TSX" for Class I,
Division 1 areas, or engineer -approved Nelson or Chemelex equivalents of
the self-limiting type. Application and installation of heating cable shall
be in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. The heater
shall respond to varying localized temperature conditions along the line by
self-regulating its heat output at each point along its length without
reliance on thermostat controls. (However, ambient temperature
thermostats shall be provided also, as shown on the drawings).
3.4.5 The electric heat tracing shall consists of flat, flexible, low -heat density
electric heat tracing strips of parallel circuit construction, consisting of
16 AWG conductors and a continuous inner core of self-regulating
conductive material. This core shall be insulated with a polyolefin or
fluoropolymer outer jacket.
3.4.6 Electrical heat tracing for Class I, Division 2 areas, or where specifically
called on the drawings or other documentation, shall, in addition to the
above, include a tinned copper braid shield. In addition, the heat trace
installation, including all equipment and materials shall be suitable for the
area classification as per Article 501 of the NEC. The temperature
rating, or "T" code of the heat tracing cable, per Table 500-3(b) of the
NEC shall be 73" or higher, for a maximum operating temperature no
greater than 200 degrees C. Heat tracing strips shall be capable of being
cut to the desired lengths in the field.
GAHOM RE8828MMOOSET90-01.DOC
•
0
Raytheon Engineers &
Constructors
3.4.7 Components
SPECIFICATION FOR
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
Project No. 77052.001
Spec. No. F90.01
Page 21 of 32
The heat trace system shall consist of the heat tape and the following
components as a minimum:
A. Power connection kit
B. Splice kit
C. End seal kit
D. Tee Kit, where required
E. Tape for securing to irregular shapes
F. End -of -circuit pilot light
G. Control system: Contactor panels, ambient temperature
thermostats, sensors, and temperature transmitters as
specified and shown on the drawings.
Electrical connection, splice, tee and end seal kits shall be
NEMA 4. Pilot lights and contactors shall be UL Listed for the
NEC Area Classification of the area in which they are located
and shall be rated NEMA 4 also. Components shall be of the
same manufacturer as the heat tape (Thermon, Nelson, or
Chemelex).
3.4.8 Install electrical heat tracing in accordance with published manufacturer's
instructions and installation details for the type and style of materials
used.
3.4.9 Electrical heat trace tape shall be installed flat, longitudinally against the
pipes. Spiraling of electrical heat trace tape around pipes is not allowed.
3.4.10 Heat tracing installation work shall be coordinated with the
Mechanical/Piping Subcontractor.
3.4.11 All electrically heat traced equipment shall have permanent tags affixed
to the exterior of the equipment insulation warning of the presence of
the heat tracing. The tags shall be a maximum of ten feet apart on. each
pipe run plus one on each side of each valve or other piece of
equipment. Each end of a heat tracing run shall also be marked with a
permanently affixed label indicating the circuit from which it is fed.
3.4.12 Electrical tracing shall be installed for pumps, valves, instruments and
gages to facilitate easy removal and replacement of these items without
cutting of the heat trace tape.
3.4.13 Factory Tests
e The heat trace components shall be tested by the Seller, prior to
shipment, as necessary to verify proper functioning and to ensure that
they meet or exceed the requirements specified.
GAH 0ME%E8828%WLDG00SE%F80-01.DOC
•
40
0
Raytheon Engineers &
Constructors
3.4.14 Field Tests
SPECIFICATION FOR
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
Project No. 77052.001
Spec. No. F90.01
Page 22 of 32
a) Component manufacturer shall provide a recommended checkout
procedure for verifying proper field installation of the heat tracing
system and proper operation of components provided.
b) Upon completion of the installation, the Engineer will conduct
such checks as required to determine that the heat tracing system
meets specified operational requirements. Should -these checks
indicate that the system does not meet the specified performance
requirements, the cost of all corrective measures shall be borne by
the Subcontractor until such time as checks demonstrate the
specified performance requirements have been met.
3.5 Miscellaneous
3.5.1 Equipment Identification
a) Each item of electrical equipment shall be provided with an
identification tag showing its item number and service or
application. The description shall match that shown on the
electrical drawings. Tags will not be required if tags are furnished
by the vendor of equipment.
b) Tags shall be three-ply phenolic material engraved to show black
lettering on a white background.
c) Motor driver and driven equipment identification tags shall also be
attached to the motor control station and cemented in place using
Goodyear Pliobond adhesive, stainless steel screws, or approved
equal.
d) Each operating device, push button, control switch, etc., furnished
by the Subcontractor, shall be identified using engraved, laminated
plastic nameplates attached using Goodyear Pliobond adhesive, or
equal. Inscription shall properly identify the equipment controlled
and each position of the switch.
3.5.2 Painting
a) All support brackets and miscellaneous steel shall be painted in
accordance with the project paint specification.
b) Burned, cut or otherwise marred galvanized surfaces shall be
repaired the same day with one heavy coat, 4 mils total minimum
thickness wet, of ZRC (The Sealube Company) or Galvanox, Type I
(Subox, Inc.) as follows: Remove slag and other foreign matter, and
apply brush coat of thoroughly mixed coating. The coating shall
overlap the undamaged galvanized area a minimum of 1 inch.
G:W OM E\E8828%WLDGOOSE\F80-01.DOC
0.
0
U
Bay.0 N H i EriglIIeelS & SPECIFICATION FOR Project No. 77052.001
COIlStTUCtOIS ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION Spec. No. F90.01
CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS Page 23 of 32
c) All scratched or defaced equipment installed by the Subcontractor
shall be touched up and repainted to match original finish.
3.5.3 Storage, Maintenance, and Protection of Equipment and Materials
a) Subcontractor shall receive, off-load, store and handle all equipment
and materials, before and during installation, in a manner which will
prevent weather damage or the accumulation of moisture or any
other damaging substance.
b) Prior to permanent closure of openings through building walls and
equipment enclosures for conduit, cable tray, bus duct, etc., the
Subcontractor shall install and maintain temporary barriers to
prevent the entrance of water, dirt, etc.
3.5.4 Testing
a) The testing and commissioning of electrical facilities required by this
specification shall be performed by the Subcontractor. These
requirements reflect only the minimum standards and procedures to
be followed before electrical facilities are placed in service or turned
over to the Owner as being mechanically complete. It shall be the
responsibility of the Subcontractor to make any additional tests or
commissioning checks necessary to provide a safe, reliable and
functionally complete electrical installation.
b) Where alternative methods are preferred by the Subcontractor or
are required to proof -test specific or specially rated equipment or
systems, it shall be the responsibility of the Subcontractor to obtain
the Contractor's approval.
c) Where applicable, the testing and commissioning requirements shall
be conducted in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions or
under the supervision of a manufacturer's representative when
equipment warranties could otherwise be voided.
d) Details of the procedures for testing and commissioning, including
applicable tables and forms for recording results, shall be developed
by the Subcontractor and submitted to the Contractor for approval.
e) All test equipment shall be provided by the Subcontractor and be
subject to approval by the Contractor for accuracy, calibration and
suitability for the intended function.
f) Contractor reserves the right to witness all tests and commissioning
functions and shall be notified in advance. The timing of the
advance notice shall be mutually agreed to by the appropriate field
personnel of both the Subcontractor and the Contractor.
GAHOMRE8828MMOOSSF90-01 AOC
0
0
is
En&eerS & SPECIFICATION FOR Project No. 77052.001
Constructor$ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION Spec. No. F90.01
CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS Page 24 of 32
g) Prior to megohmmeter and high potential testing, the Subcontractor
shall take necessary safety precautions, such as issuing notices of
intended testing and posting safety signs and barriers.
h) Records of the results for each test and commissioning function
shall be submitted to the Contractor on a weekly basis unless
otherwise mutually agreed to by the appropriate field personnel of
both the Subcontractor and the Contractor.
Normally, the results of repetitive tests or commissioning functions,
such as megohmmeter testing of motors or of motor feeder and
control cables, may be grouped on a single record form.
As a minimum, the records shall contain the following information:
1) Description of the test or comissioning function, date
performed, and identification of the test equipment used.
2) Applicable ratings, equipment numbers and location of the
facilities.
3) Size, length and rating of cables; whether cables are shielded
or unshielded.
4) Ambient temperature, and humidity where applicable to the
particular test or commissioning function.
5) Test results including comments where necessary for
clarification.
6) Details of any corrective actions taken.
7) Results after corrective actions have been taken.
8) Signature of the Contractor's representative.
9) Name of the tester and witness(es).
i) Where facilities fail to meet acceptable standards or the intended
function during testing and commissioning, the Contractor shall be
immediately advised.
j) Cables shall be visually inspected on the reels when received at the
jobsite. When damage is suspected or indicated, preliminary
insulation tests shall be performed in accordance with the
requirements of this specification to determine that the cables are
satisfactory and that the insulation values are not less than those
recommended by the manufacturer. For non-metallic sheathed and
unshielded cables, special testing arrangements may be necessary
to proof -test cable insulation.
U:v+um tXtV V Zn%wLUUU V htnrao-o i .uoc
is
•
Raytheon Engineers &
SPECIFICATION FOR
Project No.
77052.001
Constructors
INSTALLATION
Spec. No.
F90.01
CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
CONSTRUCTION
Page
25 of 32
k) The insulation resistance of rotating equipment and transformers
shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of this
specification upon receipt at the jobsite. The results shall be
recorded and forwarded to the Contractor. These initial test results
shall be compared with the results obtained at the time of
commissioning to determine if major insulation degradation has
taken place.
1) .Prior to testing and commissioning of electrical equipment, the
Subcontractor shall thoroughly clean the areas, including dusting
and vacuuming of equipment enclosures on both the outside and
inside, to insure that the equipment is completely free of dust or
other contaminants which could affect performance and reliability.
Carbon tetrachloride shall not be used as a cleaning agent.
m) Where applicable, results of the tests performed shall equal or
exceed the minimum values specified in this specification or
specified by the manufacturers.
n) Insulation Tests
1) The ambient temperature shall be measured and recorded at
the time of all insulation tests. Special humidity
measurements will not be required unless specifically
requested by the Engineer or equipment manufacturer for a
particular equipment test.
2) To assure integrity of the installation and to be certain that
cables and equipment are satisfactory for operation, testing
shall be performed as follows:
• Transformers, motors and cable rated 1,000 volts or less
shall be tested at 500 volts for 120/208 or 240 volt
systems and 1000 volts for 480 volt systems.
• Refer to later sections in this specification for detailed
testing requirements for each type of equipment.
o) Continuity Tests
GAHOM E\E8828\WLDG00SE\F90-01.DOC
This procedure shall apply to all power, control and instrumentation
wire and cable.
1) The cable to be tested shall be permanently installed per
applicable drawings, specification and documents. The cable
shall be de -energized in a manner such that accidental
energization cannot occur during the performance of this
test.
•
40
n En&eerS &
SPECIFICATION FOR
Project No.
77052.001
COIlStIlICtOrS
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
Spec. No.
F90.01
CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
Page
26 of 32
2) The instrument used to determine continuity may be any one
of the following:
• Battery powered bells
• Multimeter
• Sound powered phones
3) Ensure proper point-to-point terminations as well as accurate
terminal designations for all wire and cable -by confirming
their respective continuity and discontinuity using one of the
instruments described above. Upon completion of the above
procedure, this test will be considered satisfactorily
completed.
p) General Commissioning Requirements
1. The specific commissioning requirements, including the
necessary procedures for assuring the . operability and proper
functioning of the various systems and equipment, shall
normally be developed by the Subcontractor, subject to
Contractor approval. These shall include, but not be limited to,
the applicable requirements of this Section.
2) Tests shall be performed to determine the proper functioning
of all disconnect switches, circuit breakers, motor control
equipment, relays, motors, motor -operated valves,
emergency/standby generator facilities, uninterruptible power
systems, automatic transfer equipment, batteries and battery
chargers, lighting systems and pressurization -heating -cooling
systems, including a complete check of all control, interlock,
alarm and sequence circuits.
3) Other checks or tests to be performed shall include:
• Resistance measurements of grounding systems and
connections. Refer to IEEE Standard 81 for methods of
checking ground resistance.
• Phase orientation and marking of all applicable buses and
cable systems.
• Tagging for identification purposes of all cables and
conductors routed through vaults, pull and junction boxes
or other multi -circuit routing points. This tagging shall be in
accordance with applicable installation drawings.
• I Installation of all equipment identification nameplates,
instruction plates and circuit directories.
G:kHOM E\E8828\WLDGOOSE\F80-01.DOC
rn
u
0
RayM1eon Engineers &
Constructors
2E
G: W OM E\E8828%WLDG00SEV90-01.DOC
SPECIFICATION FOR
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
Project No. 77052.001
Spec. No. F90.01
Page 27 of 32
• Functional test of lighting and receptacle systems including
polarity and ground continuity checks of receptacle
circuits. All welding receptacles shall be phased alike.
• Check of seal fittings to ensure each has been properly
sealed with compound.
4) All relays and controls or equipment components that prove to
be sluggish or unpredictable in operation and could affect the
reliability of the facilities shall be repaired or replaced as
necessary.
5) The Subcontractor is responsible for calibration and functional
testing of instrumentation, and power system protective relays
and circuit breakers.
Wire and Cable
1) Before connection to equipment, installed wire and cable shall
be checked in accordance with the following requirements:
• Test for continuity of all conductors and, where applicable,
continuity of metallic shielding.
• Test of insulation resistance of low -voltage wire and cable
using a megohmmeter. Measurements shall be made
between phase conductors and between each phase
conductor and ground.
• Minimum megger readings shall be as listed below. Cables
with unacceptable readings must be checked and approved
by the Contractor.
Type Circuit
Minimum Reading
Control
50M ohm @ 20°C
Lighting Feeders including
5M ohm @ 20°C
lighting panels with
branches open.
As above, with branches
5M ohm.@ 20°C
closed.
Motor and transformer
50M ohm @ 20°C
feeders
•
0
.'7
Raytheon Engineers &
Constructors
r) Motors
SPECIFICATION FOR
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
Project No. 77052.001
Spec. No. F90.01
Page 28 of 32
1) Insulation resistance shall be measured using a megohmmeter
before motors are connected to their supply conductors.
2) The values of insulation resistance for low -voltage motors may
be determined by a single measurement.
3) Generally, the minimum acceptable value , of insulation
resistance in megohms shall be 1.5 megohm corrected to
40°C (1040F) in accordance with IEEE Standard 43.
4) Other commissioning requirements for motors are as follows:
• A check shall be made that bearings are properly lubricated
and, where possible, filled to the correct oil level. If
necessary because of the presence of water or other
contaminants in the lubricant, the grease or oil shall be
replaced before the motor is energized. The Contractor
shall specify the proper grease or oil.
• Where applicable, drain plugs shall be removed and motors
checked for accumulation of water within the housing.
• Each motor shall be checked for correct direction of
rotation.
• A check shall be made that space heaters are properly
interlocked with the motor controller.
s) Motor Control Equipment
GAH OM RE8828MMOOSET90-01.DOC
1) The insulation resistance of switchgear and motor control
equipment shall be tested in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations before completing the associated wire and
cable terminations. Generally, tests will consist of megohm -
meter measurements between each phase and ground and
between phases. It shall be unacceptable if resistance
measured is less than 50 megohms.
2) Precautions required to obtain reliable insulation measurements
usually -include disconnecting lightning arrestors, capacitors,
voltage transformers and secondary ground connections on
current transformers.
3) On completion of the wire and cable terminations, a final
insulation measurement using a megohmmeter shall be
obtained for the entire system. Preferably, the measurement
should be obtained just prior to energizing the equipment, or,
where applicable, prior to turning over the equipment to the
•
0
Raytheon Engineers & SPECIFICATION FOR Project No. 77052.001
ConstructorsELECTRICAL INSTALLATION Spec. No. F90.01
CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS Page 29 of 32
Owner as being mechanically complete. It shall be
unacceptable if resistance measured is less than 50 megohms.
4) Protective relays shall be set in accordance with the drawings
or relay coordination study provided. The relay setting/
calibration shall be performed by a qualified technician.
5) Motor circuit protective devices that have adjustable settings,
such as molded -case circuit breakers or MCP's„shall be set in
accordance with the drawings.
6) Heater elements of thermal overload relays used for motor
protection will be furnished with motor starters and MCC's.
The Subcontractor shall individually check to ensure the proper
element has been selected, installed and set, based on the
motor nameplate full -load current. (Contractor shall go out and
record the actual full load currents shown on the motor
nameplates. Any overload heaters found to be incorrectly
sized shall be replaced. Motor full load currents recorded shall
be submitted to the Contractor and Engineer.)
7) Other devices having variable timing characteristics, such as
time -delay relays used in the automatic restart of motor
drivers, shall be set and tested in accordance with the
drawings and manufacturer's recommendations.
t) Transformers
1) Using a megohmmeter, the insulation resistance of transformer
windings shall be checked in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations. A transformer shall be
considered unacceptable if the resistance measured is less
than five megohms.
2) Manual tap changers shall be operated and set at the proper
tap setting. When the settings are completed, the changers
shall be locked with the Owner's padlocks.
u) Uninterruptible Power Systems
1) The Subcontractor shall provide labor as required to support
testing of the UPS' systems in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
2) In addition to routine inspection, the following minimum field
checks and tests shall be conducted:
• Adjustment of the battery charger for normal float and
equalizing charge rates including, as applicable, a check of
the battery electrolyte or cell voltage.
G: W OM RE8828MLDG00SEW90-01.DOC
•
0
0
Rayff�eon Engineers & SPECIFICATION FOR Project No. 77052.001
Constructors ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION Spec. No. F90.01
CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS Page hof 32
• Short-circuit test to check the performance of the inverter
in the current -limit mode.
• Transient -response tests, as applicable to the particular
installation, including measuring and recording the results.
• Simulation of all alarm conditions.
.3) For short-circuit and transient -response tests, equivalent test
loads may be used when the actual loads cannot be connected
for test.
4) Transient -response tests shall be made under the following
conditions:
• Simulation of inverter failure and operation of the transfer
switch without loss of load.
• Retransfer of full load to the inverter without loss of load.
• Simulation of an alternating -current power failure to the
battery charger.
• Simulation of a battery failure.
• Energization of the single largest inductive load or
combination of loads which may be energized
simultaneously without loss of other operating loads.
v) Controls
-Equipment controls shall be tested for proper operation and
interlocking.
w) Alarms
Systems and circuits shall be individually checked by manually
operating the initiating device for each alarm condition. .
x) Mechanical Inspection and Commissioning
G:\HOME\E8828\WLDGOOSE\F80-01.DOC
Bolted bus joints, terminal points and other connections for each
separate equipment installation shall be checked. for tightness.
Special tools shall be utilized where necessary to conform with the
manufacturer's recommendations.
C7
•
Raytheon Engineers &
SPECIFICATION FOR
Project No.
77052.001
Constructors
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
Spec. No.
Page
F90.01
31 of 32
y) Grounding and Bonding Tests
The Subcontractor shall perform ground -to -earth resistance tests on
all ground rods and selected ground .interfaces.
1) The earth ground resistance for isolated instrument ground
rods shall be less than one ohm when measured by the three-
point stake technique.
2) The earth ground resistance for driven ground rods shall not be
less than 25 ohms per rod when measured by the three-point
stake technique. The earth ground resistance of the grounding
grid shall not be less than 5 ohms.
3) Bonding resistance tests shall be performed on all non-current
carrying parts of electrical equipment, structural steel, conduit
systems, cable trays, etc., and connections to the facility
grounding system.
4) Lightning protection systems shall have a DC point resistance
to earth of less than five ohms, as measured by the three-point
or equivalent method.
z) Standby Generator'Testing
GAHOM BE6828MLOGOOSEW90-01.DOC
1) The Subcontractor shall provide and support an authorized
manufacturer's representative to field inspect and commission
the standby diesel -engine generator set.
2) Insulation resistance of equipment and wiring shall be
measured using a megohmmeter. 480/277 volt insulation/
wiring shall be tested at 1000 volts. Lower . voltage
insulation/wiring shall be tested at 500 volts. Precautions to
be taken prior to testing include disconnecting devices such as
capacitors, voltage transformers, lightning arrestors, secondary
ground connections on current transformers, etc.
3) Perform phase testing on the generator to verify that the
proper phase relationship and phase sequence exists between
the generator and the standby power system.
4) A check shall be made to ensure that bearings are properly
lubricated and, if applicable, filled to the correct oil level. If
necessary, because of the presence of water or other
contaminants in the lubricant, the grease or oil shall be
replaced before engine -generator start-up. The Contractor
shall specify the proper grease or oil.
Ell
RayJUL
�eon Engineers &
Constructors
SITE CLEANUP
SPECIFICATION FOR
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
Project No. 77052.001
Spec. No. F90.01
Page 32 of 32
Work areas shall be kept clean of excess material and debris on a daily basis.
Subcontractor shall remove debris from the plant site and shall keep the work area
clean and orderly.
G:W OM E\E8828MMOOSEV90-01.DOC
kb
Bayfffeon Engineers &
i
i,
0
0
so
Constructors
CLIENT: Wild Goose Storage
JOB/INQUIRY NO.: 77052.001
FACILITY: Wild Goose Gas Storage
SPEC NO.: F95.01 A
LOCATION: Butte County, California
PROJECT SPECIFICATION
i ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION
SCOPE OF WORK
For
^' POWER DISTRIBUTION CENTER
This title page is a record of all revisions of the specification. Each time the specification is
changed, only the new or revised pages are issued. For convenience,
the nature of each
revision is briefly noted below.
REV. NO.
DATE
BY
CHECKED
APPROVAL
PAGES
NATURE OF REVISIONS
P1
9/16/97
PK
JGA
i,1-9,
Preliminary for bid
Att A
O
2/02/98
HBC--
1,11-10
Conform for purchase
Att. A
QROFESS/pN
LOp��'�l
c'
W �
a a E95 66 °^
Exp
xp..LPI
-
.LPI FC
RIC P ��
F OF callEo�
Rev.
LEAD
LEAD
LEAD
LEAD
LEAD
LEAD LEAD
LEAD
CON
No.
PROC
MECH
PIPE
CIVIL
STRUC
ARCH ELEC
I&C
QA
PEM PM
CDE SUP
P1
--
--
--
--
VV
-- --
WCS
JRW
tJEY -
-- --
O--
--
--
--
--
w�
--
--
Distribution:
Per Project Distribution Matrix .
0
•
SECTION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Engineers &
Constructors
SCOPE OF WORK
POWER DISTRIBUTION
CENTER
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Job/Inquiry No. 77052.001
Spec. No. F95.01 A
Page i
PAGE
GENERAL...................................................................................... 1
WORK TO BE PERFORMED............................................................. 1
WORK BY OTHERS........................................................................ 4
SUPPLEMENTS.............................................................................. 5
ACCEPTABLE VENDOR LIST........................................................... 6
ATTACHMENT A..................................................................................... 7
ATTACHMENTB..................................................................................... 9
ATTACHMENTC..................................................................................... 11
PK)WGSI)\SPECS\F•SERIES\F95.01 A)
0
is
Raytheon Engineers & SCOPE OF WORK Job/Inquiry No. 77052.001
POWER DISTRIBUTION Spec. No. F95.01 A
Constructors CENTER Page 1 of 12
1. GENERAL
The Scope of Work for the Power Distribution Center (PDC) specification package
includes design, fabrication, delivery, assembly and installation of the specified PDC
complete with all required systems and equipment installed, wired and tested. All
design, fabrication and materials shall strictly adhere to the requirements of the
Specifications, Drawings, Sketches, Codes, Standards, Data or other documentation
attached or referenced herein.
2. WORK TO BE PERFORMED
2.1. PDC Building
2.1.1. Furnish a complete PDC building per Specification F95.01, Sketch
SK 17-F95.01-1 and this Scope of Work. Building is to be designed
for modular construction with shipping splits located approximately
as shown (if required). Building shall include access stairs and
platforms at each doorway and necessary platforms to move
equipment in and out of the building. Exterior photo -cell controlled
lighting shall be furnished for all stairs and platforms.
2.1.2. 'The intent of the PDC modular design concept is to require the
Seller to be the single source of responsibility for and the
coordinator of the complete and fully tested Power Distribution
Center building and equipment. The general arrangement sketches
for the PDC is the Buyer's concept for maximizing the fabrication,
equipment installation, equipment wiring and testing which may be
accomplished at the Seller's facility. The Seller is encouraged to
suggest modifications to these layouts to optimize or simplify the
equipment arrangement, fabrication, wiring, shipping, assembly and
installation of the PDC.
All drawings and calculations prepared by the Seller shall be sealed
with the appropriate Engineering discipline's professional registration
stamp for the State of California.
2.1.3. Cable tray and conduit systems inside the PDC shall be furnished
and installed as complete systems to the maximum extent possible.
Those items requiring disassembly at shipping splits for
transportation to the jobsite shall be designed in such a way as to
minimize the. field time required for re -assembly of these items. All
cabling and wiring shall be routed to minimize crossing of shipping
splits. Those circuits that are required to be determinated for
transportation shall be disconnected at the closest end to the
shipping split, tagged and coiled for reinstallation at the jobsite.
However, where possible, the Seller shall provide shipping split
interface terminals/boxes or connectors.
GAHOMEW6828MU)GOOSEW95.01 A
E,
•
•
Raytheon Engineers & SCOPE OF WORK Job/Inquiry No. 77052.001
POWER DISTRIBUTION Spec. No. F95.01A
Constructors CENTER Page 2 of 12
2.1.4. Furnish and install all lighting and convenience receptacles including
fluorescent interior lighting, HPS photocell controlled exterior
lighting, emergency lights, exit signs and 120 volt duplex
receptacles.
2.1.5. Furnish and install lighting and 120V power transformer(s) and
panelboard(s) including all feeder and branch circuit wiring.
2.1.6. Furnish and install panelboards as shown on the one -line drawings.
Forty-two (42) circuit panelboards shall have 25% spare breakers.
2.1.7. Furnish and install complete grounding systems including equipment
grounding and isolated instrument grounding.
2.1.8. The support steel arrangement shall be coordinated with the
equipment layout to permit bottom entrance of cables and conduit
into the motor control center (MCC) and other cabinets, motor
starters, and remote control panels as required.
2.1.9. The Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) 1/0 racks will be furnished
to the PDC Seller for installation in the PDC at the PDC Seller's
facility (The PLC Manufacturer will be Allen-Bradley, model #5/40).
The Seller shall provide the required remote 1/0 racks and equipment
as specified in attachment "PLC supplement to PDC". Interface
control wiring between the PLC remote 1/0 racks and the motor
starters, motor control centers, battery/charger system alarms,
Standby Generator/Automatic Transfer Switch (ATS) alarms,
Instrument Air System alarms, fire alarm panel alarms, and HVAC
system alarms available within the PDC shall be furnished and
installed by the PDC Seller. Power wiring from the 120 volt
distribution panelboard and the 24 VDC battery/charger system to
the PLC cabinets shall be furnished and installed by the PDC Seller.
All wiring installed by the PDC Seller to the PLC system shall be
fully tested by PDC Seller and the PLC system shall be operationally
demonstrated prior to shipment for the 1/0 points installed and
furnished by the PDC seller.
G:\H0ME\E6828\WLDG00SET95.01 A
TWIF
2.1.8. The support steel arrangement shall be coordinated with the
equipment layout to permit bottom entrance of cables and conduit
into the motor control center (MCC) and other cabinets, motor
starters, and remote control panels as required.
2.1.9. The Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) 1/0 racks will be furnished
to the PDC Seller for installation in the PDC at the PDC Seller's
facility (The PLC Manufacturer will be Allen-Bradley, model #5/40).
The Seller shall provide the required remote 1/0 racks and equipment
as specified in attachment "PLC supplement to PDC". Interface
control wiring between the PLC remote 1/0 racks and the motor
starters, motor control centers, battery/charger system alarms,
Standby Generator/Automatic Transfer Switch (ATS) alarms,
Instrument Air System alarms, fire alarm panel alarms, and HVAC
system alarms available within the PDC shall be furnished and
installed by the PDC Seller. Power wiring from the 120 volt
distribution panelboard and the 24 VDC battery/charger system to
the PLC cabinets shall be furnished and installed by the PDC Seller.
All wiring installed by the PDC Seller to the PLC system shall be
fully tested by PDC Seller and the PLC system shall be operationally
demonstrated prior to shipment for the 1/0 points installed and
furnished by the PDC seller.
G:\H0ME\E6828\WLDG00SET95.01 A
•
•
Bayf mn Engineers & SCOPE OF WORK Job/Inquiry No. 77052.001
POWER DISTRIBUTION Spec. No. F95.01 A
Constructors CENTER Page 3 of * 12
2.1.10. Space shall be allocated for miscellaneous equipment as indicated
on the general arrangement sketches, such as remote control
panels, intra -plant communication equipment, telephone equipment,
transformers and distribution panels (for field use). The installation
and wiring of these items will be by others.
2.1.11.' A lightning protection system shall be designed and furnished in
accordance with the requirements of NFPA 780 and, UL96A and
installed on each PDC.
2.2. 480V Motor Control Center
2.2.1. The 480V Motor Control Center shall be designed, furnished and
installed per the requirements of the 480V Motor Control Center
Specification/Data Sheets, Specification No. F04.01.
2.2.2. The 480V Motor Control Center shall be installed in the PDC at the
PDC Seller's facility. The equipment shall be fully tested after
installation in the PDC is complete.
2.2.3. The arrangement of the equipment within the PDC shall be fully
coordinated with the structural steel to assure adequate space for
bottom entrance of conduit and cables.
2.2.4. The PLC system 1/0 wiring which interfaces with the 480V motor
control center starters shall be fully installed, tested and proper
operation demonstrated at the PDC Seller's facility.
2.3. 24 VDC Battery/Charger System
2.3.1. The 24 VDC Battery/Charger System shall be furnished by the Seller
and designed and installed in the PDC at the PDC Seller's facility.
The equipment shall be fully tested after installation in the PDC is
complete..
2.3.2. The 24 VDC Battery/Charger System shall be installed complete
including shielded isolation transformer, battery charger, fused
battery disconnect, batteries, distribution panels, feeder wiring from
the standby distribution panel, interconnecting wiring between
system components, and interconnecting wiring with the PLC.
2.3.3. The control power wiring from the 24 VDC distribution panel shall
be installed complete between the distribution panelboard and the
PLC 1/0 cabinets/racks and other PDC Seller -supplied equipment and
devices requiring 24 VDC.
G:\HOME\E6828\WLDGOOSE\F95.01 A
u
•
Rayffww Engineers & SCOPE OF WORK Job/Inquiry No. 77052.001
POWER DISTRIBUTION Spec. No. F95.01 A
Constructors CENTER Page 4 of 12
2.4. PDC HVAC System Requirements
2.4.1. The MCC Room HVAC system shall consist of wall -mounted HVAC
units and shall be designed in accordance with the environmental
conditions listed in Specification No. F95.01, Electrical Construction
for Power Distribution Center (PDC), Section 3.1.
2.4.2. The Mechanical Equipment Room, containing the 'Instrument Air
System and the Standby Generator System, shall include roof -
mounted exhaust fans to operate when the temperature exceeds
85°F.
2.5. Standby Generator and ATS
The Standby Generator and Automatic Transfer Switch (ATS) shall .be supplied
and installed by the PDC vendor. They shall be located and connected per
Drawing 17-10-202 and Sketch SK -17-F95.01-1.
2.6.' Instrument Air Compressor
The Instrument Air Compressor skid shall be provided by others and installed
by the PDC vendor. The skid shall be located per Sketch SK -17-F95.01-1 and
Drawing File #1 -SKID.
3. WORK BY OTHERS
• I 3.1. Design and installation of PDC building foundation piers.
GAH0ME\E6828\WLDG00SE\F95.01 A
-- --- --
- - --- ----- - -- - - -
2.4. PDC HVAC System Requirements
2.4.1. The MCC Room HVAC system shall consist of wall -mounted HVAC
units and shall be designed in accordance with the environmental
conditions listed in Specification No. F95.01, Electrical Construction
for Power Distribution Center (PDC), Section 3.1.
2.4.2. The Mechanical Equipment Room, containing the 'Instrument Air
System and the Standby Generator System, shall include roof -
mounted exhaust fans to operate when the temperature exceeds
85°F.
2.5. Standby Generator and ATS
The Standby Generator and Automatic Transfer Switch (ATS) shall .be supplied
and installed by the PDC vendor. They shall be located and connected per
Drawing 17-10-202 and Sketch SK -17-F95.01-1.
2.6.' Instrument Air Compressor
The Instrument Air Compressor skid shall be provided by others and installed
by the PDC vendor. The skid shall be located per Sketch SK -17-F95.01-1 and
Drawing File #1 -SKID.
3. WORK BY OTHERS
• I 3.1. Design and installation of PDC building foundation piers.
GAH0ME\E6828\WLDG00SE\F95.01 A
•
Raytheon Engineers & SCOPE OF WORK Job/Inquiry No. 77052.001
POWER DISTRIBUTION Spec. No. F95.01 A
Constructors CENTER Page 5 of 12
3.2. Design and installation of foundations for stairs and platforms.
3.3. Installation and wiring of remote control panels.
3.4. Installation and connection of all power, control and instrument wiring for
circuits with destinations external to the building.
3.5. Sealing of cable tray penetration fittings at PDC building walls.
3.6. Installation of cable trays and supports below the PDC (supported from PDC I
steel structure).
3.7. Installation and wiring of fire alarm equipment.
3.8. Supply of PLC YE) eabinets (unless PDG selleF *9 te supply. see Seetien 2. 1. 10
3.9. Installation and wiring of intra -plant communication equipment, telephone
equipment.
4. SUPPLEMENTS
4.1. Specifications
4.1.1. D59.02 - NEMA Frame Induction Motors
4.1.2. F00.04 - Electrical Specification for Packaged Mechanical
Equipment
4.1.3. F95.01 - Electrical Construction For Power Distribution Center
4.1.4'. G52 - Instrumentation and Control Requirements for Packaged
Mechanical Equipment
4.1.5. F04.01 - 480 Volt Motor Control Centers
4.2. Drawings and Sketches
4.2.1. Drawing 17-10-201, One Line Diagram Sheet 1
• I 4.2.2. . Drawing 17-10-202, One Line Diagram Sheet 2
G:\HOME\E6828\WLDGOOSE\F95.01 A
r.
C7
•
•
Bayf mini Engineers & SCOPE OF WORK Job/Inquiry No. 77052.001
POWER DISTRIBUTION Spec. No. F95.01 A
Constructors CENTER Page 6 of 12
4.2.3. Sketch SK 17-F95.01-1 PDC Preliminary Arrangement
4.2.4. Sketch SK -17-F04.01-1 Size .1 through 3 FVNR Starter Schematic
4.2.5. Sketch SK 17-1704.01-3 Size 4 and 5 FVNR Starter Schematic
4.2.6. Sketch SK 17-F95.01-2 Termination Cabinet
4.2.7. Sketch SK PLC -001 PDC Building PLC Equipment
4.2.8. - Drawing File #1 -SKID, Plan View of Instrument Air Skid
4.3. Other Attachments
Induction Motor Data Sheets
PLC Supplement to PDC
5. ACCEPTABLE VENDOR LIST
The Vendor's listed are provided to establish a standard of acceptable quality and
experience for the specific equipment listed. Alternate Vendors or fabricated
equipment using major components manufactured by acceptable vendors may be
proposed. Buyer may require additional information on experience and quality 'of
proposed products for evaluation.
5.1. 480V Motor Control Centers
• Cutler -Hammer
• - -Allen Bradley -
5.2. 24 VDC Battery/Charger System
15 KVA shielded iselatien tFansfefFneF, 129Q40 Veit te 120Q40 Veit-,
• Hayley charger, Catalog no. CCB24E250F24H-60, 24 VDC, 250 amp
output
• 8 hour Gel Cell back up batteries with seismic -rack
• Battery fused disconnect switch
• 24 VDC circuit breaker distribution panelboard.
G:\HOME\E6828\WLDGOOSE\F95.01 A
101
a
•
is
Bayfhew Engineers & SCOPE OF WORK Job/Inquiry No. 77052.001
POWER DISTRIBUTION Spec. No. F95.01 A
Constructors CENTER Page 7 of 12
ATTACHMENT A
1. SELLER'S PROPOSAL
As part of the proposal, the Seller shall furnish drawings and descriptive material
covering the general design, construction, operation and special features of the Power
Distribution Centers and accessories. The proposal documents shall include at least
the following:
1.1. Typical floor plans, cross sections, overall dimensions, and approximate I
weights with installed equipment.
1.2. Outline and foundation requirements.
1.3. Catalog and descriptive literature of all fire protection devices and other
miscellaneous devices.
1.4. A list of equipment shipped separately with field installation requirements.
1.5. All exceptions to specifications.
1.6. Details on alternate designs proposed, complete with typical construction
drawings, bill of material and descriptive literature.
1.7. Any recommended changes in equipment arrangement and dimensions
affording space or cost savings.
1.8. System descriptions and catalog information on all components for the,
following equipment:
1.8.1. Motor Control Centers
1.8.2. Battery/Charger System
1.8.3. PLC Termination and 1/0 Cabinets
1.8.4. Standby Generator and ATS
1.8.5. PLC Equipment supplied by PDC Vendor
GAHOWE6828MLDGOOSET95.01 A
0
V.�
Raytheon Engineers & SCOPE OF WORK Job/Inquiry No. 77052.001
POWER DISTRIBUTION Spec. No. . F95.01 A
Constructors CENTER Page 8 of 12
2. AVAILABILITY OF PARTS AND SERVICE
2.1. Location of nearest factories from which replacement parts will be
available for all major equipment supplied.
2.2. Location of Seller's service headquarters nearest to Butte County,
California '
2.3. Number of qualified service engineers permanently employed at each
service headquarters.
G AHOMBE6828MLDGOOSET95.01 A
0
0
•
•
Rayf mM Engineers & SCOPE OF WORK Job/Inquiry No. 77052.001
POWER DISTRIBUTION Spec. No. F95.01 A
Constructors CENTER Page 9 of 12
ATTACHMENT B
SELLER INSTRUCTIONS
1. PRICES TO BE QUOTED BY SELLER
1.1. Seller's proposal shall include per diem rates for a Service Engineer to conduct
a post -installation inspection and service of the equipment furnished prior to
energizing. These prices shall be quoted separately from the equipment
prices.
1.2. The Seller shall quote unit prices as specified below. These prices will be used
to adjust the total bid price for any future variations in design and equipment.
Seller's proposal shall also include unit prices for the addition or deletion of
each 12 inches of building length (complete with HVAC and lighting systems).
1.3. The Seller's proposal shall include a price list for all standard options and
accessories. Completeness of the list may be an evaluation factor. The prices
may be used to adjust the total bid price.
1.4. The Seller shall quote unit prices as specified below for the variable frequency
drives (VFD) with input and output filters.
Unit Pricing
Before
Engineering
Starts
Unit Price
After Final
Drawings
Complete
Each 12 inches
Description
Unit Price
Add or Delete
PDC
1.41
$1,853.00
1.3. The Seller's proposal shall include a price list for all standard options and
accessories. Completeness of the list may be an evaluation factor. The prices
may be used to adjust the total bid price.
1.4. The Seller shall quote unit prices as specified below for the variable frequency
drives (VFD) with input and output filters.
Unit Pricing
Before
Engineering
Starts
After
Engineering
Starts
After Final
Drawings
Complete
Add Delete
Add Delete
Add
Delete
1.41
20 HP VFD
4,061 4,061
4,111 4,081
4,161
2,994
1.42
25 HP VFD
4,468 4,468
4,518 4,418
4,568
3,294
1.43
30 Hp VFD
5,045 5,045
4,095 4,995
5,195
3,718
1.44
40'H VFD
6,114 6,114
6,154 6,064
6,204.
4,507
GAH0ME\E6828\WLDG00SE\F95.01 A
J
•
�ay�h@011 Engineers & SCOPE OF WORK Job/Inquiry No. 77052.001
POWER DISTRIBUTION Spec. No. F95.01 A
Constructors CENTER Page 10 of 12
1.5. The Seller shall quote the difference in cost for the motor control 1/0 Rack to
be put inside the MCC.
Price Adder $ 1,950.00
1.6. The Seller shall quote as an option the cost difference to put the VFD's inside
the MCC cubicles.
Price Adder $35,510.00
G:\H0ME\E8828\WLDG00SE\F95.01 A
9
14
•
__0
A Y
Bayf m Engineers & SCOPE OF WORK Job/Inquiry No. 77052.001
POWER DISTRIBUTION Spec. No. F95.01 A
Constructors CENTER Page 11 of 12
ATTACHMENT C
POWER DISTRIBUTION CENTER (PDC)
EQUIIPMENT SUPPLIER
MCC(AllenBridle Cutler Hammerer PDC Vendor
20 50 KW, 120Q40 480/277 VAC Onan PDC Vendor
Standby Generator (Diesel), w/AtsTS &
Hospital Grade Exhaust/Muffler
INSTALL/WIRE
PDC Vendor
PDC Vendor
(Wired as shown on one -lines)
Dry Type Transformers as shown on the PDC Vendor PDC Vendor
One -Line Diagrams (Except for com- (Wired as shown on one -lines)
pressor Building, &-Cathodic Protection
Transformers & Metering Building
Lighting & Power Distribution Panel- PDC Vendor PDC Vendor
boards (except for Compressor Building (Wired as shown on one -lines)
and Office/Control Building, Metering
Building)
Lighting (Interior & Exterior), including PDC Vendor PDC Vendor
Receptacles, Exit Signs & Emergency
Twin Head Battery Packs
Hayley #CCB24E250F24H-60, 24VDC, PDC Vendor PDC Vendor
250 Amp Output Battery Charger (Wired to Battery & DC Panel)
w/442 8 Hr. Gel Cell Battery & Seismic Rack
24 VDC Power Distribution Panelboard
Allen-Bradley PLC IQ Reek
Equipment & Termination Cabinet
PDC Vendor PDC Vendor
(Wired to all users in PDC)
By OtheFs PDC Vendor
PDC Vendor
Panel)
(Wired to MCC, DC Panel &
PLC)
- - -- -- -- -- -- ---- -- -
-
G:\HOME\E6828\WLDGOOSE\F95.01 A
f
NIeOfl EAglIIeerS &SCOPE OF WORK Job/Inquiry No: 77052.001
POWER DISTRIBUTION Spec. No. F95.01 A
Constructors CENTER Page 12 of 12
EQUIIPMENT SUPPLIER
(2) 10 HP Instrument Air Compressors By Others
w/Alternator/Control Panel, Instrument
Air Receiver Tank & Dual Heatless Dryers
Bard erEqual Wall -Mount A/C PDC Vendor
Units in MCC Room (Sized for
Northern California)
Exhaust Fans in Mechanical Equipment PDC Vendor
Room
UPS & fire Alarm Cabinet By Others
Fire Detection/Protection
By Others
Compressor & Shop Building
By Others
Transformers & Distribution Panelboards
Cathodic Protection
By Others
Transformer & Rectifier
Standby Power Distribution
PDC Vendor
Panelboard
PDC Power & Lighting
PDC Vendor
Distribution Panelboard
PG&E Substation
By PG&E
Building Wiring, Cable Tray, Wireways,
PDC Vendor
Conduit, Grounding, Lightning Protection
Office/Control Building
By Others
Distirbution Panelboard
ESD Relay Panel w/all Wiring & 12
PDC Vendor
Allen-Bradley Type 700P Relays
(NEMA 1 Enclosure)
Misc. Circuit Breakers as shown on
PDC Vendor
the One-Line.Diagrams
PG&E Metering Building
By Others
Transformer & Panelboard
GAHOMBE6828MLOGOOSET95.01 A
INSTALLIWIRE
PDC Vendor
(Wired to MCC .& PLC)
PDC Vendor II
(Wired as shown oh one -lines)
PDC Vendor
(Wired as shown on one -lines)
By Others
(Another location)
By Others
By Others
(Another location)
By Others
(Another location)
PDC Vendor
(Wired as shown on one -lines)
PDC Vendor
(Wired as shown on oneAnes)
By PG&E
PDC Vendor
By Others
(Another location)
PDC Vendor
(Wired to MCC & PLC)
.PDC Vendor
(Wired as shown on one -lines)
By Others